Home

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION EL

1. E E CR RS 41 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC 1 LG DRIVER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 12V 0V PASSENGER DOOR SWITCHIOFF CLOSED OPEN 5V OV DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 5V OV KEY SWITCH KEY INSERTED KEY REMOVED FROM IGN KEY CYLINDER 12V INSERT LG 27 5 SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION ENES UM ILLUMINATION OFF UNLOCK EC R INTERIORLAMP LANE INTERIOR LAMP DOORS ARE LOCKED USING KEYFOB UNLOCK LOCK WITH LAMP SWITCH IN DOOR POSITION EG EE FRONT STEP LAMP ANY DOOR SWITCH ON OPEN OFF CLOSED 12V DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCHES NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK s eom 22212052 49 RB POWER SOURCE FUSE BATTERY SAVER 12V 0V 64 X GROUND et ser _ 1 REFER TO SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE IN SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT SU ST RS SG SEL577Y EL 107 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS CONSULT II Inspection P
2. GG 07 lt 97 58 2 GG 58 97 2 2 Be SE gt ACE 2 5 a 98 5 Uis ape en IDX BR B EI E El 2122 GY 28 29 B119 Se 5 og e 5 3160 EL 197 AUDIO Wiring Diagram AUDIO Cont d E EL AUDIO 03 Een A thon PRECEDING PAGE ug lt gt lt H o LAN L Y LAN L Y BR BR W BR BR W Geo Gea 860 Gea L Y L W L Y BR BR W B w BR BR W D61 BR W L W LAN L Y B 50 SPEAKER TU LH LH RY 50 RH M602 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING ic x 112 11415 01 031 SUPER Fie BR BR W MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ Ho 063 2 felele THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL317O EL 198 AUDIO Wiring Diagram AUDIO Cont d EL AUDIO 04 BATTERY REFER TO 2 15A EL POWER BR B R L B W R B TS WITH TCS Y MA D WITH VDC CL 1200209 WITH HEATED SEAT WITHOUT 1 9 5 17 lt gt 611 ED
3. 1 2540 EL 13 SUPPLY ROUTING Wiring Diagram POWER EL POWER 03 Y R B W TO TO TO EL HLAMP SC CHARGE EL HSTRG EL DTRL PRECEDING PAGE R L G R W G TO EL HORN EL KEYLES EL VEHSEC JOINT EL F FOG EL VEHSEC EL VEHSEC TAIL LAMP RELAY FUSE BLOCK 85 EL TAIL L EL CORNER EL ILL EL CHIME REFER TO THE FOLLOWING t E83 GD FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B NENNEN 61 62 63 64 6566167 68 69 70 7172 EET S qp MEL2550 EL 14 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING Wiring Diagram POWER ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW IN ACC OR ON NHELO0006S02 EL POWER 04 GI REFER TO 5 EL POWER 01 BOA 40 R E LG G FUSE BLOWER 11 HS RELAY 117 0118 7 9 SU E D BR OR W ST RS BY B B B B B SC Ae TEES M87 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING i m 818 ED ED FUSE JUNCTION BOX J B MEL256O EL 15 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING Wiring Diagram POWER Cont d IGNITION POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW IN ON AND OR START EL POWER 05 REFER 80 40 80A EL POWER 01 02 R L W L gt IGNITION SWITCH E93 B gt TO EL POWER 07 FUSE IGNITION BLOCK RELAY J B
4. 9913 23 919 za SOL 408098 uA 10014 c AO 919 18 SOL HI Josuas uA 1104 6913 SOL S2 5 Lesa 13 23 epioJu L 1913 408498 1404 0913 Apog 1086098 9UOZ 5219 Z A 79 YSN 104 9 49 94 104 Ae 9 ug YSN 104 HI 94 epeueoO 104 HT duiejpeeH 019 4 HH vv H1 9 HH e a Gita v HH Z AD Apog H1 H1 10014 vL 1012euuoo g 1ol98uuo2o c L 101289uuoo 1 e oJ Jeuonipuoo L eje1 Ajunoes o u8A JOOP 1011 1000 14044 2 Andes dwej epeuey 104 104 146
5. 2 4 sew yams BIR ST RS 888 SOL 1949W uomneulquio duie oL 1012euuoo pog YOUMS 044409 1000 U9JAS yun 9019 snd a r 4901q snd yoolq snd uoud 183 pue 40 SOL Cea OL Cea oL Cra oL oL IDX EW EO ZO en amp 91 M sew eg rO rO 9 70 404 v8 QIN nS sum i ev 88 10 CON v SW EY vera vv sseuJeu MEL2130 EL 481 HARNESS LAYOUT Main Harness Cont d Suonoos ly pue 23 S3SONSVIG 318n0HL JO 93 Jo eseo ui 1deoxe 5 012 2 9599 12euuoosip jou og Ssepoo ejqnoJi
6. 0713 youms pue 0913 pue uouws BunuBr uouws 88 3 v3 youms 813 7 youms 10014 youms ZL A5 8 98 888 0 za 813 Sv 99 6913 Sv oL WA zd epoiq C M Buried oL U91IAS uoniuBi 204 snj 5 GOSV dois 204 9604 e o 9 M 9 M NS CIM IE E013 MEL217O EL 486 HARNESS LAYOUT Engine Room Harness Cont d NOTE WA LG SU RS EL 487 HARNESS LAYOUT Engine Control Harness Engine Control Harness 0135 Failure to do so may cause the to have diagnostic trouble codes Do not disconnect these connectors except in the case of working according to WORK FLOW of TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections x
7. speaker amp High mounted stop lamp With rear air spoiler Body No 2 sub harness Seat belt buckle switch RH View with center pillar lower garnish RH removed 8127 a o ee Body ground Power seat switch RH sub harness Front seat cushion Front seat back heater RH heater RH sub harness sub harness Rear seat Rear seat back cushion heater heater RH RH sub harness sub harness 6147 Gs 8552 5557 Rear door harness Rear door harness RH 5106 NUMBER CON NECTOR NUMBER K X gt aa CONNECT TO Front door switch RH 140 Trunk combination lamp stop and tail Trunk lid combination lamp RH For reverse Trunk lid combination lamp LH For reverse Trunk lid combination lamp LH For stop and tail Power seat switch RH Front seatback heater RH Rear seatback heater RH Rear power window switch RH Rear heated seat switch RH Body ground Shield wire Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Terminal No 40 This sub harness is not shown in Harness Layout EL section MEL240O EL 30 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d TAIL HARNESS NHELO0008S06 View with trunk room G rear trim removed Rear combination lamp stop tail LG 4 m BR
8. 8 AT Lel gt 1151 85 2 253 253 ST L R L R RS REFER TO THE FOLLOWING ELECTRICAL UNITS 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 0 71 72 73 74 75 76 78 79 8018182183184185 86187 88 29 31 32 33 34 3536 3738 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 19 50 51 52 58 54 55 MEL370O EL 459 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses NHEL0331 WORK FLOW NHEL0331S01 1 Print all the data of SELF DIAG RESULTS for ENGINE VDC and displayed on 5011 1 Example SELECT DIAG MODE SELF DIAG RESULTS WORK SUPPORT DTC RESULTS TIME CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000J gt T Tem eere 2 Print all the data of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for ENGINE VDC and A T displayed on CON SULT II Example SELECT DIAG MODE CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR WORK SUPPORT SELF DIAG RESULTS INITIAL DIAG TRANSMIT DIAG DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR SPEC CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ACTIVE TEST Rx Attach the printed sheet of SELF DIAG RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT onto the check sheet Refer to CHECK SHEET EL 461 4 Based the DIAG SUPPORT results put v marks onto the items with UNKWN in the check sheet table Refer to CHECK SHEET El 461
9. WOW 99 esneo os op 01 eJnj reJ y YOO pue oj eg x J1osues 1401 co Gmo em Gen P M soyuow 1404 OZ M za 0110 z sseujeu qns L SseuJeu qns ex uontuD vo 1 Buueejs 29 494701 vq 993 0L 718 01 6200 888 01 Gem 659 0220 vo ZUM pun YOO HUS OL AD sq 88891 zzW qO HUN 200 v3 ION 220 HO ew Buueeis uouws GEN 10sues DuueeiS g M 8 240 rO uouws pue uowws g AD 4osues jepad 10191955 9 zg
10. o41uoo euiBu3 youms uonisod pegneNPued 913 v3 013 0L orao 914 p sseuseu qns ojluo5 108498 yoouy Z AD Geld vA 8 9 za 2 1OSu S amod 6 Gu vd 894 01 8 v3 q 5 Josues peeds x Z AD v4 Josues e g 2 559 5 0o4juoo quiesse p109 e g 263 74 169 L Sseujeu qns 2 4ueg 408495 ueB xo 01 293 SV BIR ST RS hi yueg 10595 uonisod Jojenjoe 9131044 21129 3 piousjos SALA exelu yueg 1051095 2 yueg 1080958 1 yueg Josues 24 91 eed oL Geta o1 Josuas aJnssaJd ZL 40128uu00 01 jonuo5 0409 86 16 6 1 Can Woga punoJB punoJB ON 4019ef u 109fu 2 ON 02 uous Jasuepuoy ON uolluB 9 uoniuf piou os
11. 8 3 GI 7 AUTO LIGHT 5 SENSOR 14 31 AUTO SEAT BELT BUKCLE SWITCH LH 28 m LG 3 2 17 FRONT 1 FRONT 2 1 REAR REAR Sw L LH Y RH FE 13 STEERING SWITCH 4 COMBINATION SU SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH BR BY 33 pu COMMUNICATION T F HA FRONT LOCK N UNLOCK FRONT H CPU POWER cu WINDOW Q WINDOW ET MAIN OT J SWITCH DOOR LOCK AND DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK SWITCH LOCK D UN UNLOCK IDX FULL BETWEEN FULL N BETWEEN FULL FULL SIROKE STROKE AND N STROKE AND N STROKE KEY CYLINDER 56 e F O O o TI 9 47 hazard 48 warning MEL359O EL 363 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table NHEL0126 Terminal Wire Voltage Connections Operated condition Approximate val No color ues OFF Closed ON Open 12V OV OFF Closed ON Open 5V gt OV OFF Closed ON Open 5V gt OV ON Open gt OFF Closed TT Light is applied to auto light sen 1 to 5V Ignition switch 501 position Light is not applied to auto light Less than 1V sensor 8 Autolightsensor ano Auto light sensor Power Ignition switch OFF ON gt 5V
12. g e o s m 9 E 5 8 5 s 8 931 345 H1 44 45 45 5 NOLLVNIBWOO 3009 43133 4009 93009 LNOYS 4 0 0 7 T Eg YILIN 7000 LINN TOXLNOO YILIN dri Le OC OF LEV 2 asam H asas H SL 11 vl 1 eudjue o Wa sks uongurunjroj H3JONVHO Q2 oin 09 NO 49 99 HOLIMS NOILINS NN po MEL3140 EL 195 AUDIO Wiring Diagram AUDIO Wiring Diagram AUDIO NHEL0081 EL AUDIO 01 WITH CD AUTO CHANGER BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH ACC OR ON FUSE 10A BLOCK J B L 2 1 REFER TO EL POWER PU Y G 81 15 Y Y maaan Y gt EL AUDIO 04 Ow D PU dc TO EL AUDIO 05 lt EL AUDIO 05 G W EL W ANT mmm EL ILL R W a PU Y G W R Y R W 5 BAT BACK UP AUDIO UNIT REFER TO THE FOLLOWING W w MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B MEL315O EL 196 AUDIO Wiring Diagram AUDIO Cont d EL AUDIO 02 WA LG G W db TO EL AUDIO 04 lt D t on r3 33
13. n m 2 o o o lt o 2 a o o o 2 5 m A gt TIS Engine ground MEL2180 EL 488 HARNESS LAYOUT Engine Control Harness Cont d ce o 8 E 2 suo 15 s ly pue 23 u O1 JO se3 u 1deoxe sio1399uuo3 s u 139uuo3sip 1ou Sepoo WO3 esneo os 941184 edal Ajainoes 510 y YOO pue eg 8 ON 109 5 9 24 13 ON 109 ON c3 299 13 g ssousey gqns yueq 10 uonisod jeusueo e o 24 884 01 za 1 044403 L exelu 29 CAM LO piouejos 2 1 6614 24 ainsseid 148 6614 Gu go Gra 1 S ON 2 veld 24 Jopelu 615 ON Gerd 9 ssouJeu qns 604 10sues uonisod yeusquej e g 13 824 01 i vo
14. 2 Hic HOLIMS 2 HOLIMS HOLIMS HOLIMS HLOIMS 4008 _ 5008 3009 WOO 1NO23 1NOM3 ANNAL gt 3 z Q 330 86 NO z HOLIMS 9 A33 3503 3503 7 1 15 40 NO HOLIMS MEL2870 EL 102 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Wiring Diagram INT L Wiring Diagram INT L IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START BATTERY 117 GD Es mre R B A NEXT mmm Re di PAGE M15 F B B R G 25 27 KEY SW DOOR SW AS LG P L 127 106 B12 12 3415 6 7 8 9 t0 tt BE EL 103 EL INT L 01 WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE HEFER TO EL POWER SMAHT ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 1 64 7 L 5 lt N REFER TO THE FOLLOWING M15 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK 1 JUNCTION BOX J B LG MEL288O INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Wiring Diagram INT L EL INT L 02 SMART ROOM BATTERY ERRAT SH WITH REAR SUNSHADE LAMP SAVER mus WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE WIT
15. 41516171816 is ia vs te 6 34 95 36 57 88 39 40 4 9 20 21 22 25 24 E TEESE cD pees FA PU Y PU Y 817 PU Y JOINT CONNECTOR 7 pe e m m e Lol ed 8 A E M25 M87 E53 E22 E11 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B GY m m CEC MEL354O EL 332 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram VEHSEC FIG 2 NHELO0122S02 EL VEHSEC 02 SMART SRS WITH REAR SUNSHADE CONTROL UNIT WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE Gl 1143 D CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED BR 121314 5 6 17 218 4151 6117 re re 20 2122 gt B10 B107 B29 B129 iir Mi Gru eoo W W MEL387O EL 333 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram VEHSEC FIG 3 NHELO0122S03 EL VEHSEC 03 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT COM 4144 33 L M38 062 561 51 551 DOOR LOCK AND DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH p UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK BETWEEN BETWEEN FULL FULL STROKE STROKE AND N AND N FULL STROKE FULL STROKE LOCK SW UNLOCK SW REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 63
16. SOURCE FUSE 64 GROUND SEL392Y EL 84 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses NHELO0033 Turn signal and hazard warning 1 Hazard switch Check hazard switch lamps do not operate 2 Combination flasher unit Refer to combination flasher unit check 3 Open in combination flasher Check wiring to combination flasher unit for open unit circuit circuit Turn signal lamps do not operate 1 10A fuse Check 10A fuse No 26 located in fuse block J B but hazard warning lamps operate 2 Hazard switch Turn ignition switch ON and verify battery positive 3 Turn signal switch voltage is present at terminal 2 of hazard switch 4 Open turn signal switch cir Check hazard switch cuit Check turn signal switch Check the wire between combination flasher unit LG terminal 3 and turn signal switch terminal 1 for open Circuit Hazard warning lamps do not 1 15A fuse Check 15A fuse No 5 located in fuse block J B EC ate but turn signal lamps operate 2 Hazard switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 Open in hazard switch circuit 3 of hazard switch Check hazard switch Check the between combination unit terminal 3 and hazard switch terminal 4 for open cir Front turn signal lamp LH 1 Bulb Check bulb d
17. 5 H1 14044 H1 jeubis usin 14044 H1 epis Apog 01 9 6 1O193uuo2o 8 1012euu00 4 10198uu0O0O lqisnj pue snd 10151591 Buiddoig 021 19 5 4 Meneg 024 o1 16 Apog IDX V A 49 ZENS d 2 4 9 A9 9 d8 9 9 d8 9 d8 c AD 49 9 M 9 9 9 AD c AD 8 d 8 c AD eva 55 v3 v8 ra gea 70 ea 9 Gea y 73 M DME sza Gea v3 sa eq 03 29 613 13 25 y Fd 91a S13 53 23 19 MEL2160 EL 485 HARNESS LAYOUT Engine Room Harness Cont d suonaes pue 23 S3SONOVIG JO 01 JO eased eu ui 1deoxe sJ0 2euuoo 12euuoosip JOU og eui esneo os 911164 Jredaj sj0j2euuoo YOO pue ans L Ae o1 Ayanoes 11295 9 9IU9A
18. W B GY G Y Y GY 2 Yo GY GIY GY Hey ow UE Gay G Y 587 HS 3 G Y 3 uuLock 4 A unLock o unLock 4 Ji LOCK VX ACTUATOR LOCK 14 ACTUATOR LOCK LH RH RH D84 D37 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 12 4 5 6 al Wy SUPER 101112113 MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ MA em 1112131415 e Dv 8 90 HT2 TS EIAS a heheehe keim 28 050 584 CD GY GY MEL348O EL 280 DOOR LOCK Wiring Diagram D LOCK Cont d SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR 25126 27 28 293031132 33 89515 15553545558 Gu 198 20415 5 tercer A 1 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC 1 LG DRIVER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 12V EM 2 PASSENGER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 5V REAR DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 5V IGNITION KEY SWITCH 25 INSERT KEY INSERTED KEY REMOVED FROM IGN KEY CYLINDER ww 16 SE COMMUNICATION DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCHES NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK ES INTERFACE FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK EG 43 GROUND 49 POWERS
19. 1849W peieeu 5 g M Crew 24 pesn JON 09 4 01 513 eq 021 108196 yun yun yun 169 uo iMs epeusuns 88 pun 15 45 ueisAs OL U91IAS Joyeoipul Andes 6015 018 OL 6018 oL 191S A L Josues peojung 100p 9A0 5 874 91 70 rv 0880 V A 82 91 A9 SS Qt v3 HAS OZ M 91 M GOIN 24 9 AO c o 260 zo 0L M 6 B L 14 13 GW 24 Oc M 188 4 MEL2140 EL 482 HARNESS LAYOUT Main Harn
20. 1 Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth dampened in alcohol eU 2 Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen Shake silver composition container before use BR 3 Place ruler on glass along broken line Deposit conductive sil ver composition on break with drawing pen Slightly overlap existing heat wire on both sides preferably 5 mm 0 20 in of ST the break 4 After repair has been completed check repaired wire for con tinuity This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is deposited BT Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted 5 Apply constant stream hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun A minimum dis tance of 3 cm 1 2 in should be kept between repaired area IDX and hot air outlet If a heat gun is not available let the repaired area dry for 24 hours EL 193 AUDIO System Description System Description Refer to Owner s Manual for audio system operating instructions Power is supplied at all times e through 15A fuse No 56 located in the fuse block J B to speaker amp terminal 27 and to CD auto changer terminal 3 with CD auto changer to audio unit terminal 6 through 15A fuse No 67 located in the fuse block J B to woofer terminal 48 With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e throug
21. SU BIR ST RS gt lt A B104 W 1 21 41314 5 6 7 8 9 0 GY 48 46 I40 38 MEL364O EL 401 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram NAVI EL NAVI 03 lt then PRECEDING PAGE p SY gt _ gt uw o o LW L Y x BR W BR 8 ETE 29 D 08 40 Gd LW L Y L Y BR BR W B W BR BR W 289 si BR BR W LW L Y L W L Y B el 727 7 T SPEAKER 50 LH R1 1 Led em 50 M602 4 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 112 11415 01 031 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ NH 6 Beebe THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3650 EL 402 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram NAVI Cont d EL NAVI 04 GPS ANTENNA EL ILL WA LG EL ILL EE e TO EL NAVI 02 RS FRONT MONITOR OD SG 1 213 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 36 34 32 lt lt 1262422 t2 13 14 t5 te 17 t8 19 20 21 22 23 24 L foe 2 672 S THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HAR
22. CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT II Without CONSULT II 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 42 BR Y Smart entrance control unit connector Vehicle security horn should operate LA STET po EN SEL043YA Refer to wiring diagram in EL 335 3 Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 and M145 terminal 21 OR and 59 P DISCONNECT Smart entrance control unit connector Vehicle security headlamp alarm should operate SEL198Y OK or NG p Horn and headlamp alarm is OK p GO TO 3 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAYS Check vehicle security horn relay 1 and relay 2 OK or NG EL 355 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses 4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAYS 1 Disconnect vehicle security horn relay 1 and relay 2 connectors 2 Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground Vehicle security horn relay connectors Yn DISCONNECT Relay 1 TS 3 2 SEL044Y Does battery voltage exist p 5 Check the following e 10A fuse No 61 located in the fuse and fusible link box e Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relays and fuse 5 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAYS CIRCUIT
23. QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING Select one of the following 7 BI AIRPORT SYSTEM SETTING a Select one of the following K top VL tom ROUTE PRIORITIES 12 1 amm Minimise Toll Road y 4 n is v TIT 11101960 0205 ra erry SYSTEM SETTING x select one of the following TRACKING clear the existing trail 000 select Off NAVIGATION SYSTEM oP oy quo pe 6 Select an item from the list ROUTE PRIORITIES MODE NHEL0301S06 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Select Route Priorities Select an item from the list TRACKING MODE NHEL0301S07 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Select Tracking Select or icon To leave no trail on the map select Off To leave a trail in the map select On Push MAP switch then the display will go back to the current location map NOTE When trail display is turned OFF trail data is erased from the memory EL 422 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Control Panel Mode DISPLAY SETTING MODE NHEL0301S08 Display Color Setting MIN 1 Sta
24. epeusuns 1 Awe dois 9L M M 8L M 9 4 9L M 02 28 8 8L M 9L M CIM 898 cd 198 za v3 98 69 v3 70 a v3 48 098 8 658 rv gsm 488 sv 28 868 sg 188 so 068 sva SU BIR ST RS apeysuns sedi Apog punoi6 Apog OL H1 20 49 sisouDeip apis epeusuns 1e8J lun epeusuns apis HJ 1Jeuoisuej aJd H1 105095 1 HI YUMS epjonq 1295 ees poyeoy sseujeu qns HI 16898 juol4 jees pejeeu oym Apog HJ Joop Jasuapuoy qO 0218 OL Gus 108498 155944 ujejs s 14 ssed q yun A 914 Gor epeusuns Awe epeusuns 1681 991 epeusuns Jess epeusuns
25. 2590 Circuit POWER SUPPLY ROUTING Fusible links Inspection Inspection FUSE e If fuse is blown be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse e Use fuse of specified rating Never use fuse of more than specified rating e Do not partially install fuse always insert it into fuse holder properly e Remove fuse for ELECTRICAL PARTS BAT if vehicle is not used for a long period of time NHEL0007 FUSIBLE LINK NHEL0007S02 A melted lusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip If its condition is questionable use circuit tester or test lamp CAUTION e If fusible link should melt it is possible that critical circuit power supply or large current carrying circuit is shorted In such a case carefully check and eliminate cause of problem e Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape Impor tant Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness vinyl or rubber parts CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMISTOR TYPE ss The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow The temperature and resistance of the thermistor element varies with current flow Excessive current flow will cause the element s temperature to rise When the temperature reaches a specified level the electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit current Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool
26. Pattern Lock doors using key keyfob SECURITY indicator lamp will illuminate for 30 seconds 1 Pattern Lock doors using lock unlock key or keyfob and then close door SECURITY indicator lamp will illuminate for 30 seconds OK ARMED SECURITY indicator lamp will start to blink every 2 6 seconds ALARM Unlock any door without key or keyfob and then open door or open hood or trunk without key The vehicle security theft warning system will be in alarm NG SYMPTOM 2 Alarm horn and headlamp will operate Alarm operation will stop automatically after 50 seconds SYMPTOM 3 DISARMED SYMPTOM 4 Unlock any door using key or keyfob Alarm horn and headlamp will stop System is OK SEL731WB For details of Pattern A and 4 vehicle security theft warning system setting refer to Refer to After performing preliminary check go to symptom chart on next page EL 340 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses SYMPTOM CHART NHELO123S02 Gl I 5 5 lt lt 0 gt 7 O O 2 O LLI LLI 0 gt 5 I gt LG SYMPTOM Q z 5 5 I S lt D E E lt tu 2 o 5 313 5 38 P I 21 5 E 5 2 gt 5 gt PE gt 2 gt gt gt H oc Y LL
27. e Ground terminal etc HARNESS LAYOUT Outline Outline NHELO0132 Body No 2 harness Room lamp harness Rear door harness RH Front door harness RH Tail harness Main harness Engine control harness Engine room harness Rear door harness LH Front door harness LH Body harness NOTE For detailed ground distribution information refer to Ground Distribution GROUND 1 20 EL 478 HARNESS LAYOUT Outline Cont d NOTE LG SU RS EL 479 HARNESS LAYOUT Main Harness Main Harness NHEL0133 For detail ground distribution information refer to GROUND DISTRIBUTION Body ground o o o tn 2 tc tc o 5 m 6 z 41 x o0 c 9 lt 2 gt gt O o 2 gt a E o o gt LL D a gt oO gt 5 0 a o gt 7 FE 2 5o cag 25 5 5 lt D
28. EL 243 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses Cont d DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 Lifting motor rear check 1 OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR REAR Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 6 or 7 and ground CONNECT 22 Seat control unit LH of lifting switch rear NHEL0277S12 Terminals Voltage V 22 SEL625W OK or NG Replace seat control unit LH 2 LIFTING MOTOR REAR 1 Disconnect rear lifting device LH connector 2 Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation Rear lifting Y device LH TS 1 3 DISCONNECT 3 1 Terminals A 7 SEL626W OK or NG Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor rear Replace lifting motor rear EL 244 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10 Power seat switch check 0277513 LE CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH 1 Disconnect power seat switch LH connector 2 Check continuity between power seat switch terminals B515 Is wien conaton Power seat switch LH Slidin Forward roto BELHA ohol 121713 ____ O TEET Reclining THUS ess Tol 9 10 Lifting O Front em Lifting Rear com SELO16Y OK or NG Check the follo
29. REFER THE FOLLOWING SIT 5 FUSE M71 1504 91716151311 162 71147 JUNCTION BOX J B THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3200 EL 204 AUDIO Location of Antenna Location of Antenna NHEL0087 Rear window printed antenna Main Rear window printed antenna Sub Antenna amp MEL378K Window Antenna Repair ELEMENT CHECK n 1 Attach probe circuit tester in ohm range to antenna terminal on each side If an element is OK continuity should exist If an element is broken no continuity should exist Go to step 2 NHEL0250 Ohmmeter EL 205 AUDIO Window Antenna Repair e When measuring continuity wrap tin foil around the top of probe Then press the foil against the wire with your fin Heat wire ger Tester probe No continuity Ohmmeter gt gt Continuity exist 2 To locate broken point move probe along element Tester needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point Ohmmeter ELEMENT REPAIR Reier to Filament Repair REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER EL 206 SUNROOF System Description System Description NHEL0222 OUTLINE Electric sunroof system consists of e Sunroof switch e Sunroof motor e Smart entrance control unit Smart entran
30. REFER TO THE FOLLOWING IE SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK IDX JUNCTION BOX J B MEL3810 EL 73 STOP Wiring Diagram STOP L Cont d EL STOP L 02 WITH REAR AIR SPOILER B24 PRECEDING gt 12 a C EL TAIL L R L m 69 109 x R G R G RL R G HIGH TRUNK LID TRUNK LID MOUNTED COMBINATION COMBINATION STOP LAMP LAMP LH LAMP RH B143 B140 8162 WS L 4 UJ 1 B140 B143 B161 B162 w BR B MEL273O EL 74 Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram BACK L 0026 5 FUSE Gl EL POWER J B OR EM i i F17 LG F10 OR AT PARK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH AX SU BR G W ST TRUNK LID TRUNK LID COMBINATION COMBINATION LAMP LH LAMP RH BACK UP LAMP BACK UP LAMP BS W He 24 BT G W GW G W L w 5 85 1 THE FOLLOWING TEELEN ET I E83 FUSE BLOCK Ww 18 JUNCTION BOX B ID AETA 202 60180 87 m 6 MEL274O EL 75 FRONT LAMP System Description System Descripti
31. 10 T E 18 HS BR B R L B W CJ EA B R L B W Y u M 9 B 6 HUU UJ 2 0 EL AUDIO 01 ___ 1 __ 27 4 4 lt G W m ST LG B Y RS x BT AMP INPUT INPUT GND E SG REFER THE FOLLOWING 36 34 32 lt lt 4 26 2422 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ TEPEE 51617189 0 SP Cod Gt 5 5 po pes pa spe IDX amg 8 612 MEL318O EL 199 AUDIO Wiring Diagram AUDIO Cont d EL AUDIO 05 WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE tun er e M nm 9 6 Ser re 08 lt lt hr TO EL AUDIO 01 i ee of 2 lt lt OO LH OUT OUT LH BACK UP o lt 99 odi 6 eo 2 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 2 e 215 112 l MEL319O EL 200 AUDIO Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses Possible causes NHEL0220 AUDIO UNIT NHEL0220S01 Symptom Repair order GI Audio unit inoperative no digital display and no 10A fuse Poor audio unit case ground Check 10A fuse N
32. 5V OV 12V aa IGNITION SWITCH OR START MORE THAN 5 MINUTES WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES 19 YB TAILLAMP RELAY Out put SWITCH 1ST OR 2ND ON OR START OPERATE NOT OPERATE E E TAIL LAMP SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR 2ND POSITION HEADLAMP SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH EXCEPT AUTO 12V 0V ON POSITION AUTO POSITION __ 5 IGNITION SWITCH POSITION 27 SWITCH ON GNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION 49 POWER SOURCE FUSE 12 1 WITCH 1ST OR 2ND ON OR START IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START WITH LIGHTING OFF TAIL LAMP RELAY S HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL OPERATE NOT OPERATE SB R TAILLAMP SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 15 OR 2ND POSITION L 6_ B jJGROUND _______ NOTE For CONSULT II Inspection Procedure refer to HEADLAMP FOR usay 61 48 For CONSULT II Application Items refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA Trouble Diagnoses for exterior lamp battery saver control refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA EL 98 EL 47 LESS THAN 1V 12V 12V SEL548Y INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS System Description System Description NHELO0165 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times 0165501 e through 10A fuse 13 located in the fu
33. SVIA 9 ON 401991 9 14044 JOSu s 701 108095 SSEW CD 514 OL 9 9 IDX SLIM 993 SV 8 49 G94 23 e a ca 9 9 294 ZO 194 0 093 85 693 1 893 28 9 9 484 10 8 9 99 e a 884 584 sg 193 90 094 90 674 874 78 Sra vo E 13 B ora 93 SEI g A9 063 20 063 28 624 20 84 ud 3 v3 8 9 8 4 9 C14 y 79 S AO 74 OWAD 01 9 63 za 2190 EL 489 HARNESS LAYOUT Body Harness 0136 Body Harness suonaes pue 293 JO MYOM 01 JO ses ui s10 2euuoo 95991 129uuoosip JOU Sepoo qno41 oansouBeip eui esneo Aew os jeunoes sj0 2euuoo
34. TO EL HORN ac m EL VEHSEC OR E EL H LAMP EL DTRL gt gt 5 EL TURN GYR TO JOINT CONNECTOR 7 E18 GY L GY R HL FLASHER FLASHER HORN DOOR DOOR DOOR OUT1 OUT LH RH OUT UNLOCK UNLOCK LOCK OUT OUT OUT OUT DR ASRR w m REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK i3 JUNCTION BOX J B AED 50 5152 53 54 55 56 4145 A 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 GY E18 RET Cep Heo 69 509 Es GD E MEL351O EL 301 LG 55 SG REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram KEYLES SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND CONDITION OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 2 RL PASSENGER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 3 HW J REARDOORSWITCH ____ CLOSED ON OPEN IGNITION SWITCH MORE THAN 5 MINUTES LH WITH LIGHTING OFF oy SWITCH 2ND ON OR START HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL IGNITION KEY SWITCH INSERT KEY INSERTED KEY REMOVED FROM IGN KEY CYLINDER 12 26 PU gt POSITION GNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH IS
35. smart entrance control unit Before replacing the control unit perform DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR 1 Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector 2 Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation Door lock 1 3 3 1 YH actuator TS connector Door lock actuator operation DISCONNECT Front LH Terminals between 1 and gt 3 Unlocked Locked Front RH Terminals between 3 and 1 Rear LH Locked Unlocked Rear RH SEL222W OK or NG OK Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit connector and door lock actuator NG Replace door lock actuator EL 292 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHEL0111 Fuse block J B HBBBBBBBBOE z Vehicle security 222 J horn 2 E63 vw u kem Vehicle security Cero LG E P QJ door lt gt x z switch LH AT Door lock and unlock switch LH gt pw Smart entrance 277 4143 144 1145 is 1 5 43 JN BR a 77 7 Driver side view with lower instrument panel removed SEL054YA System Description m INPUTS Power is supplied at all times e to smart
36. unlock switch terminal switch connector 2 Ground terminal 3 Door lock switch terminal Yn 31211 is Terminals Key position Continuity Neutral Lock SEL187Y OK or NG Check the following e Door key cylinder switch ground circuit Harness for open or short between front power window main switch and door key inder switch If above systems are normal replace the front power window mian switch Replace door key cylinder switch EL 118 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer Cont d DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 SYMPTOM Interior lamp timer does not cancel properly 1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check ignition switch ON signal IGN ON SW DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR When ignition switch is ON IGN ON SW ON When ignition switch is OFF IGNON SW OFF SEL318W Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 G and ground Smart entrance control HS unit connector DISCONNECT Terminals Ignition switch position Battery SEL995X OK or NG p GOTO 2 Check the following e 10A fuse 10 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse EL 119 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble
37. Component Inspection ECM and TCM ECM TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION e Remove ECM and from vehicle e Check resistance between ECM terminals 109 and 113 e Check resistance between TCM terminals 5 and 6 Unit Resistance value 0 ECM 109 113 Approx 108 132 EL 472 NHEL0332 NHEL0332S01 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Engine Compartment Engine Compartment NHELO0129 Front wiper motor Relay box 1 pon ABS TCS control unit Gl Daytime light control unit For Canada eo 6 J Hood switch Le Fuse and fusible link box Vehicle security horn TI Relay 2 Door mirror defogger relay With door mirror defogger Tail all lamp relay Park Neutral position relay ST Throttle control motor relay AS Cornering lamp relay Front fog lamp relay Cooling fan relay 3 Horn 15 Air conditioner 1 MA ays security relay 2 AN Vehicle security horn relay 1 E70 relay IK gt Cooling fan 2 Headlamp LH relay Cooling fan relay 1 27 Headlamp RH relay For Canada E123 For Canada E121 For USA For USA MEL2450 EL 473 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Passenger Compartment Passenger Compartment NHELO0130 Front monitor Smart entrance control unit IVIS NATS IMMU NAVI control unit
38. VOVNVD 2045021 51 VOVNVO 404 GH la IB L ID Q 1041109 O QOL o 0 E x 4 5 54 2 u A AIR BAG G YnQOoN 1OMINOO SOSN3S NOISSIN HOLIMS SISONSVIQ 5 A T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP W2L H3HSVM pag 7 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR 4191 49 NO HOLIMS MEL2950 EL 149 WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram WARN Wiring Diagram WARN NHELO0050 IER SWITCH EL WARN 01 IER OR START lt TS gt WITH TCS 108 BLOCK REFER TO EL POWER gt EL WARN 05 OV EL WARN 07 INDICATOR MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP COMBINATION METER 482 3 LEVEL LOW 7 B M87 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 451067 48 49 5o 51 52 59 E4 5 SUPER 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63164 65 66 67 68 MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 FUSE BLOCK 273 415 16 7 8 9 0 s MB JD ED W ELECTRICAL UNITS MEL2960 EL 150 WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram WARN EL WARN 02 gt TO EL THA wARN 05 gt TO EL PRECEDING ADH WARN 07 gt gt NEXT EE ere bs TO EL COMBINATION
39. CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT II With CONSULT II 1 Select ACTIVE TEST in MULTI REMOTE ENT with CONSULT II 2 Select HORN and touch ON ACTIVE TEST Horn should sound NOTE If CONSULT is not available skip this procedure and go to the next step OK or NG p reminder operation is OK p 4 3 CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULTI Without CONSULT II 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 42 BR Y Smart entrance control unit connector E 4 DISCONNECT SEL028Y Refer to wiring diagram in EL 300 Does horn sound Replace smart entrance control unit EL 315 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses 4 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY 2 Check vehicle security horn relay 2 OK or NG Replace vehicle security horn relay 2 5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY 2 1 Disconnect vehicle security horn relay 2 harness connector 2 Check voltage between vehicle security horn relay 2 harness connector E63 terminal 1 G R and ground Vehicle security horn relay 2 Xn 52 SEL031Y Does battery voltage exist Check the following e 10A fuse No 61 located in fuse and fusible link box e Harness for open or short between vehicle secur
40. Dig 8 GD vor uy niy IN BI IK 521 SD 2520 EL 11 SUPPLY ROUTING Wiring Diagram POWER Wiring Diagram POWER BATTERY POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW IN ANY POSITION NHEL0006 NHEL0006S01 EL POWER 01 0 lt TS gt WITH TCS 120 LINK BOX WITH VDC 1 40 415 50 5 30A SC CHAGE FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX R L Y L B G W B L gt TO EL POWER 04 05 CIRCUIT BREAKER R TO EL POWER 04 05 EL AUT DP EL KEYLES REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSIBLE LINK BOX 417 E67 5 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B 0658955880 ells pel 9 MEL253O EL 12 SUPPLY ROUTING Wiring Diagram POWER EL POWER 02 PRECEDING PAGE 5 LG TO EC LOAD EC MAIN ELHLAMP EL EC PGC V EL DTRL EL VEHSEC ELVEHSEC EC IVCB2 EC IGNSYS o w sp TO EL POWER 05 m SU E BLOCK ST E E OR L OR L RS TO EC ASC BS EC ASCBOF SG REFER TO THE FOLLOWING Gs FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B 148444444820
41. IND 12 22 Z vC NOILVNISAOO 00 44119 1 d O Oj O JO HOLIMS NOLLISOd L J vc 12 26 VE 26 S v 1O31NOO IAVN uu 1s s ISNA 2 35014 3613 2 14 15 40 NO 49 DOV HOLIMS HOLIMS MEL3620 EL 399 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram NAVI Wiring Diagram NAVI NHEL0298 IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH EL NAVI 01 ON OR START ACC OR ON on lt TS gt WITH TCS REFER TO EL POWER WITH VDC NAVI CONTROL UNIT T G W PU R Io AT VSSMTR EL AUT DP EL AUDIO FTO CONTROL UNIT F66 PARK NEUTRAL G W POSITION SWITCH F152 G W E F10 GND A METER ABS TCS OUT CONTROL UNIT 62 S gt Sem SUPER 177 GD JUNCTION ae JUNCTION BOX J B 162 F48 ELECTRICAL UNITS REFER TV FOLLOWING gt OP 5 THE FOLLOWING MEL363O EL 400 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram NAVI Cont d EL NAVI 02 TO EL NAVI 04 gt gt gt Y v PRECEDING PAGE WA LG
42. 0 rz os 16 5 2 lt z 0 lt 2 20 a 2 D gt Z O lt O amp lt lt lt lt SYMPTOM Odo Oxo 90 Light warning chime does not X vate Ignition key warning chime does not X Seat belt warning chime does X AT activate SU BR ST RS DISCONNECT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK A Power Supply Circuit Check Smart entrance control unit connector Terminals Wire color voltage 49 R B Ground Battery voltage SG EL 167 WARNING Diagnoses Ground Check DISCONNECT Terminals Continuity 4 Wire color Smart entrance control 43 B Ground Yes unit connector 64 B Ground Yes NHEL0055S0202 EL 168 WARNING Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK NHEL0055S03 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check lighting switch LIGHT SW 1ST in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II wowon LIGHT SW 1ST When lighting switch is in 1st or 2nd position LIGHT SW1ST ON When lighting switch is in OFF position LIGHT SW 1ST OFF SEL991X Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 19 Y B connector M145 terminal 57 Y B and ground Smart e
43. 1 0142504 Door harness front GY 6 Front power window regulator RH SMJ To Det BR 2 Front door speaker RH W 8 Door mirror actuator RH W 8 Front power window switch RH GI W 12 Front power window switch Door sub harness W 2 Front step lamp RH SMJ 031 037 GY 4 Front door lock actuator RH W 16 To 38 W 10 To M39 EM LG SU MEL2270 BR ST RS HA SG EL 497 HARNESS LAYOUT Rear Door Harness Rear Door Harness 0143 LH SIDE NHELO0143S03 To B31 Without heated seat Rear door speaker LH Rear door lock actuator LH Hear power window switch LH Rear power window regulator LH B71 With heated seat Rear heated seat switch LH With heated seat MEL2280 EL 498 HARNESS LAYOUT Rear Door Harness RH SIDE NHEL0143S04 GI MA LG G W 10 8130 Without heated seat AT W 8 Rear power window switch RH BR 2 Rear power window regulator RH GY 4 Rear door lock actuator RH BR 2 Rear door speaker W 18 146 With heated seat W 4 Rear heated seat switch RH BU With heated seat MEL2290 ST RS BY HA SG EL 499 BULB SPECIFICATIONS NHEL0144 Headlamp Headlamp NHEL0144803 iem Wattage W High Low 60 35 HB3 Exterior Lamp n item Wattage W Front fog lamp Front turn signal lamp P
44. E51 che 891 7 2670 EL 58 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM Wiring Diagram DTRL Cont d EL DTRL 04 MAIN SW MAIN SW 00 B OR EM B OR B L 1 PU gt C WARN PU peer 2 INDICATOR EJ FE Fl AT LAW e APPLIED BRAKE DED RELEASED L AX gt Fa Lon mm LOR m 1 __ T 25545 LG R LG R SU gt _ gt 9 SWITCH LIGHTING RS 12 gt CONNECTOR 7 E18 1 j s ITI REFER THE FOLLOWING gagga COTA M32 M15 SUPER BR GY MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ IDX MEL2680 EL 59 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses NHEL0265 WARNING e The xenon headlamp has a high tension current generating area Be extremely careful when remov ing and installing Be certain to disconnect the battery negative cable prior to removing or install ing e When the xenon headlamp is lit do not touch the harness covered with red or amber insulation bulb itself or the bulb socket with your bare hands e Never service a xenon headlamp with we
45. FIG 2 W W B B THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3110 EL 180 CIGARETTE Wiring Diagram CIGAR Wiring Diagram CIGAR IGNITION SWITCH ACC OR ON NHELO0156 EL CIGAR 01 FUSE REFER TO EL POWER 4 4 B B B B 8 A THE FOLLOWING 2 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B MEL3120 EL 181 MA LG CLOCK Wiring Diagram CLOCK Wiring Diagram CLOCK NHEL0166 BATTERY FUSE 10A BLOCK REFER TO EL POWER R W TO EL ILL Y R Wm RW 4 P L B R Y 89 _ 21 M30 B R Y gt _ gt R Y wi TO EL ILL B B B B 3 JL 3 25 M87 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 730 ns FUSE BLOCK m JUNCTION BOX MEL466K EL 182 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHELO0072 Driver dash side view with lower finisher and ABS control unit removed ___ Fuse block J B Fuel pump relay Phos Rear window 2 ground 77 cable ENS Rear window defogger cable Driver side view with lower instr
46. 54 660 Replace steering wheel angle sensor Repair harness between steering wheel angle sensor and harness connector M227 VDC TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK 1 0331506 Sr 1 ignition switch 2 Check the terminals connector of VDC TCS ABS control unit for damage bend and loose connection control unit side and harness side SEL565Y OK or NG OK or NG GO TO 2 Repair terminal or connector EL 467 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect VDC TCS ABS control unit connector 2 Check resistance between VDC TCS ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 L and 63 24 VDC TCS ABS control unit connector _ fol connector Approx 54 660 SEL566Y gt Replace VDC TCS ABS control unit Repair harness between VDC TCS ABS control unit and harness connector B58 CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK E CHECK CONNECTOR Turn ignition switch OFF Check following terminals and connector for damage bend and loose connection control module side control unit side sensor side and harness side TCM ECM VDC TCS ABS control unit Steering wheel angle sensor Between ECM and TCM NG Repair terminal or connector NHEL0331S08 OK or NG EN CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnec
47. NHEL0024 IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH EL TAIL L 01 ON OR START ACC OR ON ee WITH REAR SUNSHADE BLOCK WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE J B ELPOWER ILSK LG AIL SMART FUSE SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR ENTRANCE GND SIGNAL POWER N CONTROL UNIT DOORSW DOOR SW DR 144 5 SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH SWITCH OPEN CLOSED ST BT JOINT CONNECTOR 7 1 1 50 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ PSS etes exei 1 FUSE BLOCK IDX JUNCTION BOX J B 21113 201 202 E18 S 55 62 c Gu 2690 PARKING LICENSE LAMPS Wiring Diagram TAIL L EL TAIL L 02 BATTERY TO EL POWER TAIL LAMP RELAY SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 111 FUSE BLOCK J B 283 85 FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP RH COMBINATION SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH E155 CO NT NNECTOR 7 i REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B BR BR L E75 2 15 2 3 8 ED MEL2700 EL 68 PARKING LICENSE LAMPS Wirin
48. RS CORNERING LAMP Wiring Diagram CORNER Wiring Diagram CORNER EL CORNER 01 WITH REAR SUNSHADE 0270 IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY ON OR START ACC OR ON FUSE BLOCK cea WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE J B AUTO LIGHT SENSOR M202 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 143 1142 FUSE SENSOR SENSOR GND SIGNAL POWER DOOR SW DOOR SW DR RR COMBINATION SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH OPEN CLOSED 7 pect hes ITI REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ inet 1 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B Tic s B 71615 es 1 wo 2790 CORNERING LAMP Wiring Diagram CORNER EL CORNER 02 BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START LG CORNERING LAMP RELAY FE COMBINATION SWITCH CORNERING COMBINATION SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH ST RS JOINT CONNECTOR 7 B Wall B B B B B B 1 L961 e ITI E ITI m m REFER TO THE FOLLOWING M15 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 7 8 318061
49. 0196 DESCRIPTION 1 Operation Flow NHEL0196S01 NHEL0196S0101 SYSTEM phase SECURITY indicator lamp output DISARMED T3 0 2 sec T4 2 4 sec PRE ARMED T2 30 sec T3 0 2 sec T4 2 4 sec 2 Setting The Vehicle Security System Initial condition 1 Ignition switch is in OFF position Disarmed phase When the vehicle security system is in the disarmed phase the security indicator lamp blinks every 2 6 sec onds Pre armed phase and armed phase When the following operation 1 or 2 is performed the vehicle security system turns into the pre armed phase The security indicator lamp illuminates 1 Smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob after hood trunk lid and all doors are closed 2 Hood trunk lid and all doors are closed after front doors are locked by key lock unlock switch or keyfob After about 30 seconds the system automatically shifts into the armed phase the system is set The security indicator lamp blinks every 2 6 seconds 3 Canceling The Set Vehicle Security System When the following 1 or 2 operation is performed the armed phase is canceled 1 Unlock the doors with the key or keyfob 2 Open the trunk lid with the key or keyfob 4 Activating The Alarm Operation of The Vehicle Security System Make sure the system is in the armed phase The security indicator lamp blinks every 2 6 seconds When the following operation
50. 1 1 Position Sensor Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank O2S2B2 EC EN 2 TPS2 2 Position Sensor Sensor OVRCSV Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve TPS3 Throttle Position Sensor Camshalt Position Sensor PHASE Phase Bank 1 TRNSCV Homelink Universal Transceiver Camshaft Position Sensor TURN EL Turn Signal and Hazard Warning PHASE Phase Bank 2 Lamps PHONE Telephone Pre wire VDC BR Vehicle Dynamics Control PORIN Control Solenoid Valve System PNP SW Park Neutral Position Switch VENT V Canister Vent Control alve EL 502 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES CELL CODES Code Wiring Diagram Name VIAS Variable Induction Air Control System GI VIAS V Variable Induction Air Control System VSS Vehicle Speed Sensor Vehicle Speed 20 Revolution Sensor VSSMTR Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR W ANT Audio Antenna LG WARN Warning Lamps WINDOW Power Window G WIPER Front Wiper and Washer SU BR ST RS BY SG EL 503
51. 4 1009 2514 282520 Lavis A SdAB dwnd 4 1514 Td 192520 123 1 513 78 904 4 mm m 25 xus iso a 1 218 915 Sg 9Sv 5 585 NIVA E sg osv amnd 3 NIVA avoi 1 3SH 181520 dWvi H 5720 915 5 BB y Ep Bl n6 avay 119 30109 23 5 AMOSS322V B lol J J L T P 1 4015 110101 20A d Sol 15 TNO ONO SASNOI LHS SIVN HOLIMS Vivi 21QNON AOSNHL NOLLINSI dT 430 43d 531 3 58 25 vo 56 73 wa aaa arses 408059 Gov 9 Q 1nv E n aa 8 Bush e 43d S VN ET n Ts Tui 3SVHd 213 NS O3SH3A 1414 2013 STU 1213 NYOH avo 904 4 O3SH3A M C L 58 T 9 1S H Lv S NUS OIgnv z ra 8 l pa 8 I 8 8 a Eg m a 61 voe i GD vor 2 nae cres Faros 890 891 vos WIV BRA Lina
52. MULTI ANSWER BACK SET AUTO LOCK SET PANIC ALARM SET TRUNK OPENER PW DOWN SET EL 320 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ID Code Entry Procedure KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT II NHEL0117S02 Close all doors S Insert key into and remove it from ignition key cylinder more than six times within 10 seconds Hazard warning lamps will then flash twice NOTE Withdraw key completely from ignition key cylinder each time If procedure is performed too fast system will not enter registration mode LG Insert key into ignition key cylinder and turn to ACC position Push any button on remote controller once Hazard warning lamp will then flash twice At this time the oldest ID code is erased and the new ID code is entered Do want enter additional remote controller ID codes A maximum four ID codes can be entered If more than four ID codes are entered the oldest ID code will be erased ADDITIONAL ID CODE ENTRY Unlock the door then lock again with lock unlock switch LH in power window main switch NOTE Operate this procedure even if the door is in the state of the un lock ST Push any button on remote controller once Hazard warning lamp will then flash twice At this time The oldest ID code is erased and the new ID code is BT entered A maximum four ID codes can be entered If
53. X Applicable Drive position cannot be retained in gt eem Does not operate during manual 2 End After performing preliminary check go to symptom chart below Before starting trouble diagnoses below perform preliminary check Symptom numbers in the symptom chart cor respond with those of preliminary check SYMPTOM CHART NHEL0277S03 Diagnostic procedure 8 LO cO N 5 LU 2 LU 5 oc o oc oc Des gt gt gt gt gt ma 5 na 2 LLI 5 5 O Ox 5 O o O ua E m 8 2 5 O 9 8 8 5 Oa 5 ne Ne Oo O 35 65 6 52 se 55 3 5 5 28 2 lt lt lt 5 lt 9 ats eo a eO 52 Eu Sliding Reclining X Lifting Front Lifting Rear Sliding Reclining Lifting Front Lifting Rear Sliding Reclining Lifting Front Lifting Rear EL 230 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure 32 Gl LLI Lu Lu Hip 22 Lu cs 22 oc 5 Dx 5 gt gt Q e Qoo Q Q 5 lt lt c lio
54. at the same time LK UN BTN ON ON SEL423Y OK or NG Keyfob is OK Further inspection is necessary Refer to SYMPTOM CHART EL 305 NG keyfob Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure EL 307 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0195S03 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 49 R B or 51 W R and ground DISCONNECT Smart entrance control unit connector Battery voltage should exist 52 SEL018Y OK or NG Check the following e 40A fusible link letter 1 located in fuse and fusible link box e 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B e E90 circuit breaker e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 26 PU and ground while ignition switch is ACC Smart entrance control unit connector V DISCONNECT Battery voltage should exist SEL019Y Refer to wiring diagram in EL 298 OK or NG p Check the following e 10A fuse 1 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between smart en
55. es I I I I lt I I I I I B UJ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3r 0 r U rae BR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH E1 ST RS JOINT CONNECTOR 7 P BT Tg mrss s ees ALTERNATOR 1 APPLIED swiTCH ed A 4 3 E22 ET 1 SG REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ A IDX gt GY GY GY B GY MEL2990 EL 153 WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram WARN Cont d TO EL WARN 01 Y COMBINATION METER 2 59 4 a 1e L L R H 0 warn o1 on M D n B B B B B m ABS TCS CONTROL UNIT 425 4 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 12 345 6 3 7 8 9 454647 4849 50851 52 053 64 15 SUPER 56157 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 1 MEL3000 EL 154 Wiring Diagram WARN EL WARN 06 lt C gt FOR CANADA Gl WARNING LAMPS b NEXT PAGE EL WARN 03 lt EP WARN o2 COMBINATION METER 434 0214 eM LG DIODE 13 EPHE PU mamas C C Ui 58 E51 D BR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH D 85 7 BT ks rmt 9 PARKING B B B B B ALTE
56. Condition of driver s door CLOSED Approx 5 GA Condition of driver s door OPENED 0 SEL996X OK or NG NG p 3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3 Door switch driver side connector B29 Continuity Door switch is pushed 5 Door switch 15 released Yes SEL325W Check the following e Driver side door switch ground circuit and condition e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and driver side door switch Replace driver side door switch EL 173 WARNING Diagnoses 4 CHECK WARNING CHIME With CONSULT II Perform CHIME in ACTIVE TEST mode with CONSULT II ACTIVE TEST CHIME OFF Warning chime should operate SEL320W NG Replace smart entrance control unit EL 174 FRONT WIPER AND System Description System Description NHEL0057 WIPER OPERATION The wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch NHEL0057S01 There are three wiper switch positions GI e LO speed HI speed e INT Intermittent With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied e through 204 fuse No 25 located in the fuse block J B e wiper motor terminal 4 e to wiper switch terminal 15 Le Low Mist and High Speed Wiper Operation G
57. DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses Cont d DOOR SWITCH CHECK T CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door switches DOOR SW DR DOOR SW AS DOOR SW RR in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II When any doors are open wowon ___ DOOR SW DR ON DOOR SW RR DOOR SW AS ON DOOR SW RR When any doors are closed DOOR SW DR OFF DOOR SW AS OFF DOOR SW RR OFF SEL009Y Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminals 1 LG 2 R L or 3 R W and ground Smart entrance control unit connector Front LH Open door switch Open on 2 Ground door switch Closed R Open 3 Ground door switches Closed Approx SEL010Y Refer to wiring diagram in 2 278 OK or NG p Door switch is OK 2 2 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1 Disconnect door switch harness connector 2 Check continuity between door switch connector terminals Door switch connector Door switch connector Front LH Rear LH 10 5 Front RH 61 DISCONNECT Rear RH DISCONNECT Continuity Front door pt switches Open Closed m 2 o SEL192W Check the following Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch door switch EL 286 DOOR LOCK Trouble
58. Fuse block J B circuit breaker Audio unit A C auto amp E Air bag diagnosis sensor unit I Rear window defogger relay Transmission control module Power window H Seat control unit LH y Combination flasher unit VDC TCS ABS control unit instrument panel LH side Power window hd 47 Combination flasher unit 77 T PUDE nO Ecc 7 Circuit breaker B 242 o Q Fuse block J B MEL246O EL 474 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Passenger Compartment 2 Driver side view with lower View with steering wheel and steering Passenger side view with dash side instrument panel removed column removed lower finisher removed WS os 2125 22 EM Blower motor relay LG 3 view with console box assembly view with lower instrument e Passenger side view with lower removed center panel removed instrument panel removed EC J FRAY shitt lock control unit aa gt q Ki 2 e Heater unit Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Driver side view with dash side 4 Driver side view with lower lower finisher removed instrument panel removed 244 x RS ey Rear window defogger relay Under driver seat Seat control unit LH RA MEL247O EL 475 ELECTRICAL UNITS L
59. 3 Check continuity between NAVI control unit terminal 42 and AUDIO unit terminal 36 4 Check continuity between NAVI control unit terminal 43 and AUDIO unit terminal 34 NAVI control unit H S connector AUDIO unit connector M68 34136 42143 1 011 Does continuity exist SEL647X Yes or No Repair or replace audio unit Refer to AUDIO in EL section of Service Manual Repair or replace harness or connector EL 432 NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition 1 Not Abnormal This Condition 15 Not Abnormal NHEL0304 EXAMPLE OF BASIC OPERATIONAL ERRORS NHEL0304S01 2 Monitor brightness control is to full dark Readjust monitor brightness Map does not appear Map CD is not inserted or inserted upside down Insert the map with the label facing up on display Map mode is turned OFF Press the MAP button No guide tone is heard Voice guide adjustment OFF Volume is set to the tor highest level Adjust the voice guide level Voice guide volume is OWES OF flgrrest level too high or too low Dark display Slow DE Wait until vehicle interior temperature rises to appro Low vehicle interior temperature image movement priate level Small black or white dots appear on the Unique liquid crystal display phenomena No problem screen Unable to read CD Check map CD surface If dirty wipe clean with message appears Map CD surface is tainted CD surface is partially soft cloth
60. AIRBAG MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP __ __ iis E i EL 127 aim With TS With TCS o 40 o 48 47 02 61 o5 o 10 09 13 32 49 18 15 16 17 12 59 28 67 45 68 46 51 54 27 56 57 Schematic 0293 2420 LG METERS GAUGES Wiring Diagram METER Wiring Diagram METER NHEL0045 IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH EL METER 01 SAL ERY ON OR START ACC OR ON XTS WITH TCS FUSE BLOCK REFERTO WITH VDC J B EL POWER RS WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE PU R B AT VSSMTR EL NAVI EL AUT DP EL AUDIO D P L gt TO EC VSS Y R P L WATER GAUGE UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT WITH ODO TRIP METER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 REFER THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 71819 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 2122 JUNCTION BOX J B E162 248 678 0 12 13 1415 1617 1811912 2910 EL 128 METERS AND GAUGES Meter Gauge Operation and Odo Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode Meter Gauge Operation and Odo Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode DIAGNOSIS FUNC
61. IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START 10 BLOCK EL POWER J B M19 INDICATOR INDICATOR LAMP LAMP REAR SEAT CUSHION REAR SEAT BACK HEATER LH HEATER LH B12 8 LG Bice 6 L L L THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER RH EL 252 EL HSEAT 02 WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B MEL3320 SEAT Seatback Heating Unit Seatback Heating Unit 1 0294 Seatback trim 1 y Thermostat Heating unit LG Increasing to Decreasing to 35 45 25 35 95 113 77 95 temperature Thermostat operation FE Seat cushion trim SBT314 AT SU 55 25 RS EL 253 SUNSHADE Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHEL0278 Under rear parcel shelf Rear sunshade unit Rear sunshade unit Fuse block J B Rear sunshade switch SEL636W EL 254 SUNSHADE System Description System Description When ignition switch is in ACC or ON position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 23 located in the fuse block J B e to rear sunshade unit terminal 5 Ground is supplied at all times e rear sunshade unit terminal 6 e
62. NOTE If NG is displayed on INITIAL DIAG Initial diagnosis as DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for diagnosed control unit replace the control unit 5 According to the check sheet results example start inspection Refer to CHECK SHEET RESULTS EXAMPLE EL 460 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses CHECK SHEET NHEL0331S02 NOTE If is displayed on INITIAL DIAG Initial diagnosis as DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for the diagnosed control unit replace the control unit Check sheet table CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit eee nose diagnosis diagnosis STRG TCM ENGINE UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN __ UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN Symptoms Attach copy of Attach copy of Attach copy of ENGINE VDC A T SELF DIAG RESULTS SELF DIAG RESULTS SELF DIAG RESULTS BR BY Attach copy of Attach copy of Attach copy of ENGINE VDC A T CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR PKIA8324E rug IDX EL 461 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d CHECK SHEET RESULTS EXAMPLE NOTE If is displayed on INITIAL DIAG Initial diagnosis as DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for diagnosed control unit replace the control unit NHEL0331S03 Case 1 NHEL0331S0301 Check harness betw
63. e 10A fuse No 10 located in fuse block J B e 10A fuse No 21 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and fuse EL 246 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 21 and ground Seat control unit LH Condition Voltage V Selector lever is in position Except above Approx 12 SEL631W OK or NG Check the following e Park position switch e Park position switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and park position switch CHECK DRIVER DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 9 and ground Seat control unit LH Condition Voltage V Driver s door is open Driver s door is closed SEL632W Check the following e Driver door switch e Driver door switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and driver door switch 5 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Does M operate normally Yes or No Check speedometer and vehicle speed sensor circuit Refer to EL 133 EL 247 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 6 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PULL UP VOLTAGE 1 Turn ignition switch ON 2 Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 32 and ground AEA Seat control u
64. Apog epeusuns H1 4 Apog a r 490 q 791 oL IDX 9 CLA 9 M GIA GIA CIA M M CIM c d 6 9 S A9 01 9 8 81 9 ssausey 979 28 era vv sg 9 9 sg Leg g 108 vO rcg PE PEE Gea v3 618 218 vg 86 46 m N LL MEL2210 EL 491 HARNESS LAYOUT Body No 2 Harness Body No 2 Harness 0137 E D o o N 2 U lower garnish removed 127 1 ground View with center Body ground View with seatback side finisher RH removed MEL222O EL 492 HARNESS LAYOUT Body 2 Harness LG SU dur 901 pejunou ufiH 2 8 6918 eg 6019 01 vg 191045 Apog BIR ST RS yeas 55 5 1895 s
65. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect VDC TCS ABS control unit connector and harness connector B58 2 Check continuity between VDC TCS ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 L and 63 R VDC TCS ABS control unit connector cuNm 0 CONNECTOR Continuity should not exist 61 63 SEL569Y NG Repair harness between VDC TCS ABS control unit and harness connector B58 e Repair harness between harness connector B2 and harness connector B58 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between VDC TCS ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 L 63 R and ground AE VDC TCS ABS control unit connector C UNIT CONNECTOR cuwr o CONNECTOR Continuity should not exist 61 63 SEL570Y e Repair harness between VDC TCS ABS control unit and harness connector B58 e Repair harness between harness connector B2 and harness connector B58 EL 470 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses 8 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect steering wheel angle sensor connector 2 Check continuity between steering wheel angle sensor harness connector M218 terminals 5 L and 4 R 24 Steering wheel angle sensor connector nam Continuity should not exist SEL571Y gt GO TO 9 Repair harness between steering wheel angle sensor and harness connector M227 e Repair harness between ha
66. Description Select unlock mode can be changed in this mode Selects ON OFF of select unlock mode Key reminder door mode can be changed in this mode Selects ON OFF of key reminder door mode EL 283 WA LG RS DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses SYMPTOM CHART NHEL0193S01 NHEL0193 SYMPTOM x O O 5 O a 2 5 a z lt gt Oo a lt gt FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK KEY SWITCH INSERT CHECK DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK DOOR SWITCH CHECK Power door lock does not operate with door lock X X and unlock switch LH and RH on door trim Power door lock does not operate with front door X X key cylinder operation EL 284 DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses DISCONNECT MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK A Main Power Supply Circuit Check NHEL0193S0201 Smart entrance control unit connector Terminals Ignition switch Battery volt Battery volt age age Battery volt age Ground DISCONNECT Z Ground Check Smart entrance control Smart entrance control Terminals Continuity unit connector unit connector 43 Ground Yes 64 Ground Yes EL 285
67. LID OPENER ACTUATOR IS OPERATED USING 12V ACTUATOR n ON OFF GROUND SEL987XA EL 214 TELEPHONE PRE WIRE Wiring Diagram PHONE Wiring Diagram PHONE CU 27 5 4 FUSE BLOCK REFER TO EN J B L POWER 11 ep NHELO170 EL PHONE 01 BATTERY RY e G 3 1 2 L N REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK W JUNCTION BOX J B FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B MEL295K EL 215 LG AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHEL0272 Fuse block J B shh 222 pee 0202022221 Sliding Lifting a Driver s seat lt control unit Reclining 1 52 2 5 V lt Seat memory switch m SEL383YA EL 216 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER System Description System Description NHEL0273 OPERATIVE CONDITION The drive position can be set in 2 ways manually and automatically NHEL0273S01 Manual Operation NHEL0273S0101 The driver s seat can be adjusted for sliding reclining front cushion height and rear cushion height with the LH power seat switches The manual operation can be adjusted with the IGN key in any position Automatic Operation NHEL0273S0102 The driver s sea
68. LIGHTING 2ND SWITCH JOINT CONNECTOR 7 p 3 77 ra B B B B B B A A A E53 E11 M25 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B 12141015181716 4 29 W GY MEL2830 EL 94 ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram ILL EL ILL 03 HS WITH HEATED STEERING GI PAGE DO h we C m aw gt WA EM Ai M30 R L LG R W HEATED FE STEERING zs 9 ILLUMI NATION 0013 SU 12 PRECEDING p o ST PAGE CRY o o o O m PAGE RS BY B B B B B B HA 4 87 SC BEEN ERO 859 5 618181 DX 052 penenie MEL284O EL 95 ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram ILL CTS WITH TCS lt VD gt WITH VDC WITH REAR SUNSHADE PRECEDING SR nw mO Q Q AH RUMIGATION RW RW R W R W Fa 54 L8 1 CONTROL REAR AUTO UNIT OFF SWITCH ILLUMINATION QI LUMINATION 9 ILLUMINATION LLUMINATION oles raka E Ley 29 5 25 R Y R Y R Y R Y VD PRECEDING lt RY Cmm yy gt
69. OK or NG Continuity should not exist SEL445Y NG Repair harness between harness connector M223 and harness connector M15 10 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect ABS TCS control unit connector 2 Check continuity between ABS TCS control unit harness connector E162 terminals 30 L and 29 ABS TCS control unit connector C UNIT O CONNECTOR Continuity should not exist 30 29 SEL446Y OK or NG NG Repair harness between ABS TCS control unit and harness connector E81 11 HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS TCS control unit harness connector E162 terminals 30 L 29 R and ground ABS TCS control unit connector _C UNIT _ CONNECTOR 30 29 Continuity should not exist SEL447Y NG p Repair harness between ABS TCS control unit and harness connector E81 EL 456 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check components inspection Refer to INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION EL 457 OK or NG Connect all the connectors and diagnose again Refer to Work Flow EL 447 Component Inspection LC ECM and TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION P e Remove and from vehicle EC Check resistance between ECM terminals 109 and 113 e Check resistance between TCM t
70. Replace smart entrance control unit Electrical Components Inspection WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY DX Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 6 and 7 Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between ter Yes minals 1 and 2 No current supply No EL 191 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Electrical Components Inspection Cont d A C auto amp connector 69 6 volts normal filament Heat wire Tester probe volts REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH NHEL0076S02 Check continuity between terminals when rear window defogger switch is pushed and released Yes Filament Check NHEL0077 1 Attach probe circuit tester volt range to middle portion of each filament e When measuring voltage wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe Then press the foil against the wire with your finger 2 filament is burned out circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts EL 192 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Filament Check 3 To locate burned out point move probe to left and right along filament Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point GI MA Filament Repair Le 0078 REPAIR EQUIPMENT 1 0078501 Conductive silver composition Dupont 4817 equivalent EC 2 Ruler 30 cm 11 8 in long 3 Drawing pen 4 Heat gun FE 5 Alcohol 6 Cloth AT REPAIRING PROCEDURE
71. e 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch SEL549Y p Replace key switch EL 311 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH LH CHECK NHEL0195S06 CHECK DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door lock unlock switch LOCK SW DR AS UNLK SW DR AS in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR LOCK SWDR AS OFF UNLKSWDR AS X OFF When lock unlock switch is turned to LOCK LOCK SW DR AS ON When lock unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK UNLK SW DR AS ON SEL341W Without CONSULT II Remove key from ignition switch 1 Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK 3 Voltage 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL396Y Refer to wiring diagram in EL 299 OK or NG lock unlock switch is OK Check the following Ground circuit for each front power window switch e Harness for open or short between each front power win
72. 1 Disconnect vehicle security horn relay 1 and relay 2 connectors 2 Check voltage between terminals of each relay Battery voltage should exist Y DISCONNECT 24 Vehicle security horn Vehicle security horn relay 1 connector relay 2 connector SELO45Y OK or NG Check harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay 2 and headlamp relays Check the following e Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay 1 and fuse e Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay 1 and relay 2 e Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay 1 and vehicle security horn EL 356 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Description Description NHEL0124 OUTLINE NHEL0124S01 The smart entrance control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations e Heated steering e Headlamp system e Warning chime e Rear defogger and door mirror defogger e Power door lock e Remote keyless entry system e Vehicle security system e Interior lamp In addition the following timer operations are controlled by the smart entrance control unit e Battery saver control e Retained power control BATTERY SAVER CONTROL Headlamps Parking Lamps License Lamps Tail Lamps Fog Lamps lllumination Lamps While the headlamp is turned ON by ist or 2ND step of light switch the 5 minute timer is activated when the ignition switch signal changes from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF
73. 2 e to rear power window regulator RH terminal 1 2 Ground is supplied e to rear power window regulator RH terminal 2 1 e through rear power window switch RH terminal 2 1 rear power window switch RH terminal 4 3 e through front power window main switch terminal 10 9 Then the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released Power Window Opened Closed Operation e When ignition key switch is OFF front power window opened closed turning the front door key cylinder to UNLOCK LOCK direction e Power window can be opened as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the UNLOCK direction e Power window can be closed as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the LOCK direction The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out e While performing open close the window power window is stopped at the position as the door key cylin der is placed on Neutral NHEL0191S0105 EL 262 POWER WINDOW System Description Cont d e When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated AUTO OPERATION NHEL0191S02 The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the driver s and passenger s window without holding the window switch in the down or up position The AUTO feature operates on the driver s and passenger s side window POWER WINDOW LOCK NHELO191S09 The power window lock is designed to
74. 38 37 6 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 16 15114113112111110 9 THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3280 EL 223 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Wiring Diagram AUT DP EL AUT DP 04 WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE FRONT FRONT REAR REAR DOOR SLIDING SLIDING RECLIN RECLIN LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING P RANGE Sw SW INGSW INGSW sW SW SW SW 8512 8513 SW DR FR FR RR UP DOWN DOWN GY G W WR L W G Y G B ORB WG Y R x 5 WE EST uu BR LG BACK WARD WARD NING SLIDING RECLINING SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH FRONT BR LG POWER SEAT SWITCH LH BR ERONT DOOR OPEN SWITCH LH CLOSED B m BR 553 PARK POSITION SWITCH M225 87 818029 2 89 festeno ur 31712 819 THIS CONNECTOR IS SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION 329 EL 224 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Wiring Diagram AUT DP EL AUT DP 05 FORWARD BACKWARD SLIDING FORWARD BACKWARD RECLINING gt gt P BR W B LG YG BN gt m Qm j m E GYR P YG BR w B LG B Y G 1211 281 3 72 EW POWER PULSE PULSESLIDING SLIDING PULSE RECLINING RECLINING seat SW
75. 9 Qo O o 5 5 25 25 Psy 4 amp Os Oe og 2 8 9 0 5 SG 0 5 O L s Og Oc 2 2 Z5 zo L Os Os Q Qo t Oe lt lt lt lt lt 59 lt lt a O 9 9 2 do not operate manual operation Lifting Rea Lifting Rea Rear No functions operate during auto 3 matic operation and some all func tions do not during manual opera tion 4 do not operate during automatic Lifting Front LLL 5 No automatic operation functions operate 6 Drive position cannot be retained in the memory START signal ST RS X IGN ON signal Does not operate during manual Reclining 21222 122 ales during auto Froni matic operation Lifting Rea Lifting Rea Automatic operation cannot be can celed 9 Memory indicator does not light up X Applicable EL 231 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses mum DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 mom P Power supply and ground circuit for driver s seat control unit Power Supply Circuit Check 1 027750401 Seat control unit LH Check between seat control unit LH termi
76. Approx 12 Rear window defogger switch is 0 SEL997X OK or NG Check the following e Rear window defogger relay Refer to 1 191 e Rear window defogger circuit e Rear window defogger filament Refer to 1 192 EL 188 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Trouble Diagnoses 2 CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect control unit connector 2 Turn ignition switch to ON position 3 Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 37 G R and ground Smart entrance control unit connector DISCONNECT Battery voltage should exist SEL998X Check the following e 10A fuse 10 located in the fuse block J B e Rear window defogger relay e Harness for open or short between 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B and rear window defogger relay e Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and smart entrance control unit EL 189 02 25 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Trouble Diagnoses CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Select REAR DEF SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA TE MONITOR REAR DEF SW When rear window defogger switch is pushed REAR DEF SW should be Without CONSULT II Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 1
77. BR ST RS CONNECTOR BT n r1 11 B B BB B B B HA E Bas G gt 3 D THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 57 58 59 60161 62163 64 GY MEL309O EL 163 WARNING Wiring Diagram SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR 2627 031 232621282803 22 53 495051 55534588 D 98 57580 06166364 ev SMART CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC LG DRIVER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN IGNITION SWITCH MORE THAN 5 MINUTES WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES TAIL LAMP RELAY SWITCH 1ST OR 2ND ON OR START HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL OPERATE NOT OPERATE 1V 12V 20 58 SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 18 OR 2ND POSITION 12V IGNITION KEY SWITCH 25 B R INSERT KEY INSERTED KEY REMOVED FROM IGN KEY CYLINDER 12 27 IGNITION SWITCH ON IGNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION 43 B __ sss 49 RB POWER SOURCE FUSE IGNITION SWITCH START MORE THAN 5 MINUTES WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES 57 YB RELAY SWITCH 1ST OR 2ND ON OR START HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL LESS THAN OPERATE NOT OPERATE 1V 1
78. Body ground ST RS MEL620K EL 31 COMBINATION SWITCH Check Check NHEL0009 TURN FRONT WIPER MIST s i 14 0X 240506 lt 31 33 8 12 3 1 2 151317116 42111019 1 51617 Front Heated steering Steering switch Air bag Front fog and Light and turn and horn switch cornering lamp FRONT FOG FRONT WIPER AND SWITCH WIPER VOLUME ON O 32 __ CORNERING LAMP SWITCH TURN SIGNAL LAMP SWITCH MEL244O EL 32 COMBINATION SWITCH Replacement Replacement For removal and installation of spiral cable refer to RS 21 Installation Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable e Each switch can be replaced without removing spiral cable 1 Remove the instrument lower panel on driver side 2 Remove the steering column cover 3 Remove lighting switch or wiper and washer switch mounting screw 4 Remove lighting switch or wiper and washer switch from the spiral cable 5 Disconnect lighting switch or wiper and washer switch connec Screw BRE D EL 33 LG STEERING SWITCH Check Check NHEL0011 ACCEL RES CRUISE ON OFF STEERING WHEEL ANGLE SENSOR CONNECTOR THERMOSTAT M650 M219 P S To main harness DRIVER SPIRAL CABLE M217 is To main harne
79. HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3270 EL 221 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Wiring Diagram AUT DP Cont a m EL AUT DP 02 M4 D1 PRECEDING lt lt Y R Y R MEMORY OF o MEMORY INDICATOR 2 SWITCH 1 OR P L R B D E gym H R B LB G Y 0 L B G Y R E P M ao OR P L B G Y R OR P L B G Y d Ugh Gre B Y P B RAN PU MEMORY 1 MEMORY 2 MEMORY SET IND IND SW 1 REFER THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ A ZS 57 5 3 OC THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3840 EL 222 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Wiring Diagram AUT DP Cont d EL AUT DP 03 IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START lt TS gt WITH TCS H FU WITH VDC Sie BLOGK REFER TO EL POWER CONTROL UNIT LH CANCEL SW LG UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT WITH ODO TRIP METER CANCEL MEMORY SU SWITCH SEAT ON CANCEL SWITCH BR RS SG REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 FUSE JUNCTION BOX J B 162 F8 ELECTRICAL UNITS IDX 16171819 Goa 8 epre r repre eo C280 7 6 51 4114131211 7126 25124123 22 5 121120119 18117 Ga 7 6 5 14132 16 5 14 109 20 39
80. IGN ON SW ACC ON SW KEY CYL LK SW KEY CYL UN SW DOOR SW RR DOOR SW DR DOOR SW AS TRUNK SW HOOD SWITCH LOCK SW DR AS UNLK SW DR AS LK BUTTON SIG UN BUTTON SIG TRUNK BTN SIG Active Test Test Item THEFT IND HORN HEADLAMP Work Support Test Item THEFT ALM TRG SECURITY ALARM SET CONSULT II Application CONSULT II Application Item NHEL0245 1 0245501 1 024550101 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch in ACC position Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch Indicates ON OFF condition of rear door switch Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch RH Indicates ON OFF condition of trunk switch Indicates ON OFF condition of hood switch Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch LH and RH Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock LH and RH Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from keyfob Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from keyfob Indicates ON OFF condition of trunk open signal from NHEL0245S0102 Description This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation The lamp will be turned on when CONSULT II screen is touched This test
81. N N JJ 13 PU Y Trunk room lamp switch ON Open OFF Closed OV 12V 14 G W Rear window defogger switch OFF ON Only when pushed 5V OV 16 OFF Only when pulled 12V gt OV switch More than 5 minutes after ignition switch is 12V turned to OFF Ignition switch ON or START position with lighting OFF position switch 1ST Within 5 minutes 19 Y B Tail lamp relay Output 2ND after ignition 2 0V switch is turned to OFF position ON or START position 0V Headlamps illuminate by auto light control Operate Less than 1V Not operate 12V 20 Tail lamp switch Light switch OFF or AUTO 1ST or 2ND position 12V 0V More than 5 minutes after ignition switch is 12V turned to OFF Ignition switch or START position th liqhti OFF position with lighting Bi 21 Headlamp LH switch 2ND Within minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF position ON or START position 0V Headlamps illuminate by auto light control 0V Except PASS or 2ND position 12V Lighting switch 22 L OR Headlamp switch PASS OF ANDI oN Headlamps illuminate by auto light control Operate 10V gt 12V Not operate EL 364 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table Terminal Wire volage Connections Operated condition Approximate val No color ues Ignition switch Lighting switch Except AU
82. NG gt is malfunctioning Replace IMMU Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to operation manual IVIS NVIS EL 387 SU 02 25 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5 Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 Self diagnostic results NHEL0177813 LOCK MODE displayed on CONSULT II screen CONFIRM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS LOCK is displayed on CONSULT II screen SELF DIAGNOSIS DTC RESULTS TIME SEL295W Is CONSULT II screen displayed as above 2 gt SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 a ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE Turn ignition switch OFF Turn ignition switch ON with registered key Do not start engine Wait 5 seconds Return the key to OFF position Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice total of three cycles Start the engine Does engine start Yes p System is OK Now system is escaped from LOCK MODE 3 CHECK IMMU ILLUSTRATION Check IMMU installation Refer to How to Replace IMMU in EL 389 OK or NG NG Reinstall IMMU correctly EL 388 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses 4 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT II Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to CONSULT II operation manual IVIS NVIS
83. NHEL0326S06 AT 2 Check the terminals and connector of ABS TCS control unit for damage bend and loose connection control unit side and harness side NG p Repair terminal or connector OK or NG 2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect ABS TCS control unit connector 2 Check resistance between ABS TCS control unit harness connector E162 terminals 30 L and 29 R 24 ABS TCS control unit connector 30 29 Approx 54 66 OK or NG Replace ABS TCS control unit Repair harness between ABS TCS control unit and harness connector E81 EL 451 SEL438Y SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d TCM CIRCUIT CHECK 1 CHECK CONNECTOR Turn ignition switch OFF Check following terminals and connector for damage bend and loose connection control module side and harness side TCM Harness connector F53 Harness connector M223 Harness connector M15 Harness connector E81 OK or NG NG p Repair terminal or connector CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect TCM connector 2 Check resistance between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 L and 6 TCM connector TCM CONNECTOR Senec Approx 108 1320 SEL439Y Replace harness ABS TCS control unit and CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK CHECK CONNECTOR Turn ignition switch OFF Check following termi
84. Not operate 12V Except PASS or 2ND position 12V Lighting switch PASS or 2ND position 0 with lighting switch 2ND 0V 60 Headlamps illuminate by auto light control Operate 10V 12V Not operate When trunk lid opener actuator is operated using n Bn keyfob ON OFF COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SIGNAL Voltage 12 V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester EL 366 HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Wiring Diagram TRNSCV Wiring Diagram TRNSCV IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START BATTERY NHELO0127 EL TRNSCV 01 FUSE Gl BLOCK REFER EL POWER MD MA EM LG SMART ENTRANCE BATTERY R G R G SU 1 BR B B 1 Lee HOMELINK 3 x 87 25 REFER THE FOLLOWING RS FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B B MEL360O SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC 27 J GNITIONSWITCH ON X GNITIONKEYISIN ON POSITION 43 B GROUND _______ IDX POWER SOURCE FUSE BATTERY SAVER BATTERY SAVER DOSE OPERATE DOES NOT OPERATE 12V 0V LAMP ON OFF mm GROUND SEL983X EL 367 UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses
85. OPERATE NOT OPERATE 1V 12V 20 SB TAILLAMPSWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR 2ND POSITION IGNITION SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH EXCEPT AUTO s w POSITION 27 GNITIONSWITCH ON JIGNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION ___43 pls 49 POWER SOURCE FUSE ON OR START WITH LIGHTING OFF 57 YB TAIL LAMP RELAY SWITCH 1ST OR 2ND HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL OPERATE NOT OPERATE 1V 12V 58 58 TAILLAMPSWITCH J LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR 2ND POSITION 64 B ROUND SEL546Y NOTE CONSULT II Inspection Procedure refer to HEADLAMP FOR usay 48 For CONSULT II Application Items refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA Trouble Diagnoses No lamps operate including head 1 10A fuse NHELO211 Check 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B lamps 2 Lighting switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 Smart entrance control unit 49 of smart entrance control unit Check lighting switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 EL 71 LG SG PARKING LICENSE LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d No parking side marker license 10A fuse and tail lamps operate but head Tail lamp relay lamps do operate Tail lamp relay circuit Lighting switch Lighting switch c
86. OUTPUT 1 Disconnect combination meter 2 Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M33 terminal 18 PU W and ground Battery voltage should exist DISCONNECT A Combination meter connector Terminals Ignition switch position 0V Battery voltage SEL413Y OK or NG No 5 Disconnect combination meter connector and connector Check continuity between combination meter terminal 18 and ECM terminal 18 Continuity should exist Check continuity between combination meter terminal 18 and ground Continuity should not exist Combination meter connector 5 1 DISCONNECT x OK or NG Thermal transmitter is OK Repair harness or connector SEL417Y EL 137 METERS GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 3 CHECK WATER TEMPERATURE OUTPUT SIGNAL 1 Connect combination meter connector and ECM connector 2 Start engine 3 Check output signal between combination meter harness connector M33 terminal 18 PU W and ground Use SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE in SUB MODE with CONSULT II Triggering Menu Start Triggering Auto Trigger gt gt A 5 0 V Div 50 ms Div SEL414Y OK or NG Replace combination meter NG ECM EL 138 METERS AND GAUGES Electrical Components Inspection Electrical Components Inspection FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK e For removal refer
87. PARK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH PU W PUR PU R 51 1 gt P B P B P B dc 1 1 gt Y PU o Y PU gt 1 GY R d 9 GY R dE I I 1 G W G W GW gt gt gt BR BR BR gt REFER TO THE FOLLOWING A A A M19 E83 AA 2 8 4 8 A T2 8 AN 83 FUSE BLOCK 6 7 819 10 5 6 7 8 G 14151916 JUNCTION BOX J B MEL3060 EL 158 A T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram AT IND EL AT IND 02 WA LG V PRECEDING PAGE BIR SU METER RS hi A T INDICATOR B UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT WITH ODO TRIP METER 5 26 27 28 29 5 30 31 32 33 4 42 43 44 MEL307O EL 159 WARNING Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHELO052 Fuse block J B 41516 17 18 19 20 eise P switch LH panel removed SELO52YA System Description The warning chime is controlled by the smart entrance control unit The warning chime is located in the smart entrance control unit Power is supplied at all times e through 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 and to key switch terminal 3 through 10A fuse No 60 located in the
88. ZOO zzoz OWOD SWITCH RH LIGHTING SWITCH AUTOTIST 10 O6 9 REAR DOOR OMBINATION SWITCH 23 20 58 C OFT REAR 4 DOOR SWITCH o LH 3 O FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH AUTO LIGHT SENSOR EL 92 NHEL0036 MEL281O ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram ILL Wiring Diagram ILL IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH EL ILL 01 WITH SUNSHADE 305 WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE 17 EL POWER TE MA 118 24 P B G PU EM LG R B G PU SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL EG BAT IGN FUSE UNIT I SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR DOOR SW DOOR SW DOOR SW DR RR AS GND2 GND SIGNAL 0014 9 R 4 4 Wife SU W R R mc J SG REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B PL M201 M202 B10 107 12151050 Gu MEL282O ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram ILL EL ILL 02 BATTERY REFER TO EL POWER JOINT CONNECTOR 14 FUSE BLOCK 419 E83 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL RIB A gt EL ILL 05 UNIT Rv NEXT PAGE sll CONTROL ASHTRAY DEVICE SWITCH ILLUMINATION SJ ILLUMINATION MZ R Y l Qmm dC NEXT PAGE COMBINATION SWITCH
89. and ground connector Continuity should not exist 5 6 OK or NG SEL441Y NG Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53 EL 454 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses 6 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect harness connector M15 2 Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 14C L and 15C R SMJ harness connector SMJ o CoNNECTOR Continuity should not exist 14C 15C NG p Repair harness between harness connector M223 and harness connector M15 SEL442Y CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 14C L 15C R and ground SMJ harness connector M AM Continuity should not exist 14C 15C OK or NG SEL443Y NG Repair harness between harness connector M223 and harness connector M15 8 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 11C L and 12C R SMJ harness connector SMJ O CONNECTOR 11C 12C NG p harness between harness connector M223 and harness connector M15 Continuity should not exist SEL444Y OK or NG EL 455 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 9 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M15 terminals 11C L 12C R and ground SMJ harness connector 11C 12C
90. e Displayed street name information at a highway exit may differ from the information posted on the actual road signs e Street name information displayed on the enlarged intersection map may differ from the information posted on the actual road signs EL 439 LG SU 55 25 RS SG NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal Cont d The enlarged intersection map may display an Unknown Street message at some street intersections Because of road configuration etc the guide may finish early If this occurs follow the marker to reach your destination Destination area side information left side and right side may differ from actual conditions because of data error Unable to Set Destination Way Point and or menu items 1 030450301 Symptom Possible cause Repair order Unable to search way points in A way point already crossed or determined to If you desire to pass through way point for a re search mode have been crossed second time reperform route edit Set designation areas and perform route Route search does not occur search Car marker does not appear on recom Drive on the recommended route mended route Turn list is not displayed Turn the route guide ON Push VOICE Switch Route guide is canceled Drive the vehicle on the search object route or perform a manual route search Note that all rou
91. one way traffic etc A roundabout route may area settings be displayed Landmark display does not show Mistaken or missing map data may result in Change map CD actual conditions erroneous display Course search data may not exist for closely the destination area to the general route AT Recommended route drawn positioned starting point way points and des indicated by a thick brown line However slightly away from starting point tination area shown on the map Route guide even if the selected route is a major way points and destination area starting point way point and destination point appropriate route search data may not be may be separated available LOCATION OF CAR MARKER vehicle has been parked a multi level parking facility or underground parking facility the car marker SU position may be inaccurate immediately after exiting the parking facility e The GPS accuracy is within 100 m 300 ft Even when receiving conditions are excellent further posi tional correction may not occur STREET INDICATION e Street names displayed on the map may differ from the actual street names e An Unknown Street message may appear on the map in place of street name information 02 25 0304505 ES EA R C H NHEL0304S06 RS e Position may be searched by house number However the displayed position and street may differ from the actual position
92. perform Adjust Cur rent Location MODE uem uM Driving road similar c Driving winding roads AC 25 e Driving on road surfaces i toar requiring frequent steering 5 M r S Repeated back and forth T 41 e Vehicle operation in area NN driving in rkinq lot A 7 vehicle driving lt Long distance having numeral roads arranged similar area in grid pattern e Parking the vehicle in with driving the vehicle area with banked curves or turning the on slanted surface SEL698V EL 434 NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal Cont d Possible cause Slippery road surface Map display for a given road does not appear Area Slanted area New road Map data On wet icy or gravel road where frequent wheel slippage occurs dis tance calculations may be errone ous The position marker may show the vehicle to be in inaccurate posi tion Hilly areas where the road has banked curves When the vehicle enters these banked curves there may be an error in steering angle measurement The position marker may show the vehicle to be in inac curate position When the vehicle is driven on a newly constructed road that does not appear on the existing map Map marking and
93. switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch For further procedures refer to the following pages which describe each application item of the control panel mode DISPLAY AUTO OPEN MODE NHELO0301S03 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting EL 420 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Control Panel Mode 5 Select Display Auto 6 Select Auto Manual icon 16 DISPLAY To manually open the display select Manual To manually open the display select Manual automatically open the display select Auto 7 Push MAP switch then the display will go back to the current location GPS INFORMATION NHEL0301S04 1 Start the engine 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display SU 3 Push SETTING switch 4 Select System Setting 5 Select GPS information BR ST RS 6 Then GPS information will be displayed Previous BT _ Longitude 1 I 118 24 14 3000 SG QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING MODE Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Select Quick Stop Customer Setting quo om EL 421 Control Panel
94. 000 km 13 000 miles GPS receiver calculates the three dimensional position of the vehicle latitude longitude and altitude from the sea level by the time difference of the radio wave arriving from more than four GPS satellites three dimensional positioning When the radio wave is received from only three GPS satellites the two dimensional position latitude and longitude is calculated using the altitude from the sea level data calculated by using four GPS satellites two dimensional positioning Positioning capability is degraded in the following cases e In two dimensional positioning when the vehicle s altitude from the sea level changes the precision becomes lower e Thelocation detection performance can have an error of about 100 m 300 ft even in three dimensional positioning with high precision Because the precision is influenced by the location of GPS satellites used for positioning the location detection performance may drop depending on the location of GPS sat ellites e When the radio wave from GPS satellites cannot be received for example when the vehicle is in a tunnel in a parking lot inside building under an elevated superhighway or near strong power lines the location may not be detected Turbulent electric weather conditions may also affect positioning perfor mance If something is placed on the antenna the radio wave from GPS satellites may not be received COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NAVI Control Uni
95. 021450203 Description Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by mode setting Selects interior lamp battery saver control period between two modes e 1 30 minutes MODE 2 60 minutes EL 110 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 SYMPTOM Interior lamp timer does not operate CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check ignition switch ON signal IGN ON SW DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR When ignition switch is ON IGN ON SW ON When ignition switch is OFF IGN SW OFF SEL318W Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 and ground Smart entrance control unit connector A 7 Terminals Ignition switch position DISCONNECT Battery voltage SELOO3Y OK or NG p GOTO 2 Check the following e 10A fuse 10 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse EL 111 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 2 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT I Check driver door switch signal DOOR SW DR in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA 21 MONITOR
96. 2107 lt HS gt rz r3 E ILLUMI REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 123 s SUPER 6 71819 to MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 5 4 7 gt lt w BR MEL344O SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND 1 LG J RIVERDOORSWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCHES NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK B ON O 49 88 POWER SOURCE FUSE tV 64 J GROUIND 6 1 REFER TO SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE IN SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT SEL480Y EL 270 POWER WINDOW CONSULT II Inspection Procedure link connector CONSULTI Inspection Procedure RETAINED PWR 1 Turn ignition switch column S RM 2 7 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to Gl NHEL0235 NHEL0235S01 the data link connector MA 127 EM 3 Turn ignition switch ON 16 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I E AT m su BR p ST 5 Touch SMART ENTRANCE 6 Touch RETAINED PWR 4 RETAINED PWR HEAD 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST and WORK SUPPORT are available DX EL 271 CONSULT II Application Items POWER WIND
97. 2ND POSITION IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START MORE THAN 5 MINUTES WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES PERO a TIENE SWITCH OFF OR 1ST ON OR START HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL 12V 0V mi 18 22 L OR HEADLAMP SWITCH OPERATE NOT OPERATE 26 GNITION SWITCH ACC _ POSITION 27 SWITCH ON IGNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION GROUND 49 RB POWERSOURCE FUSE 58 SB TAILLAMP SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR 2ND POSITION LIGHTING SWITCH EXCEPT PASS OR 2ND POSITION LG R HEADLAMP SWITCH PASS OR 2ND POSITION HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL OPERATE NOT OPERATE 64 For CONSULT II Inspection Procedure refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA For CONSULT II Application Items refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA Trouble Diagnoses for battery saver control refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA EL 47 EL 79 10V 12V 12V 0V 10V 12V SEL551Y LG SG FRONT 1 Aiming Adjustment x Aiming Adjustment Aiming adjusting screw 9 NHELO02 Before performing aiming adjustment make sure of the following 1 Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure 2 Place vehicle on level ground 3 See that vehicle is unloaded except fo
98. 5 sec MODE 2 OFF Mode MODE 3 1 5 sec EM PW DOWN SET The unlock button s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods e MODE 1 3 2 OFF Mode MODE 5 sec LG Trouble Diagnoses uus PS SYMPTOM CHART NHELO0195S01 NOTE SU e Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob e The panic alarm operation and trunk lid opener operation of keyfob system do not activate with the ignition key inserted BR the ignition key cylinder Reference 51 Symptom Diagnoses service procedure page EL All function of remote keyless entry system do not 1 Keyfob battery and function check 807 RS operate 2 Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control Boa unit check 3 Replace keyfob Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure 819 NOTE If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT II is OK keyfob is not malfunctioning new ID of cannot entered 1 Keyfob battery and function check 807 2 Key switch insert check 811 Se 3 Door switch check Bid 4 Door lock unlock switch LH check 812 5 Power supply ground circuit for smart entrance control Bo8 unit check DX 6 Replace keyfob Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure Bid NOTE If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT II is OK keyfob is not malfunctioning Door lock or unlock does not function 1 Keyfob battery and function
99. 82 53 4 cv MID FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B IDX O 24116662 mm m RZ i2 1 3 L 312 8 33 31 E116 E117 E126 E155 E156 MEL280O EL 89 LAMP Wiring Diagram CORNER SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR E 54 GY GY 4314445 4614748 SMART CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN TERMINAL GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC LG DRIVER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 12V PASSENGER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 3 RA OOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 20 SB TAILLAMP SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR 2ND POSITION 12V 0V OR START MORE THAN 5 MINUTES IGNITION SWITCH 1 WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES 4 alas SWITCH OFF 1ST ON OR START HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL uma CERT Pass Postion 22 SWITCH HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL VUE OPERATE NOT OPERATE __26 PU GNITION SWITCH ACC l ACC POSITION 12V 27 GNITION SWITCH ON X IGNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION 12V GROUND 49 POWER SOURCE FUSE 12V 58 SB TAILLAMP SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUT
100. Application Items 0217 NHEL0217S01 NHEL0217S0101 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of key switch Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH NHEL0217S0102 Description This test is able to check key warning chime operation Key warning chime sounds for 2 when touching ON on CONSULT II screen NHEL0217S02 1 021750201 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of lighting switch Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH NHEL0217S0202 Description This test is able to check light warning chime operation Light warning chime sounds for 2 when touching CONSULT II screen NHEL0217S03 NHEL0217S0301 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of seat belt switch NHEL0217S0302 Description This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation Seat belt warning chime sounds when touching on CONSULT II screen EL 166 WARNING Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses SYMPTOM CHART NHELO0055 0055501 cc oc 2 oc m 5 T O E OG O ui OJ 55 22 252 2 x n E a o O O EI Lo n gt O
101. BATTERY Wiring Diagram H LAMP Cont d EL H LAMP 02 20 15 20 REFER EL POWER 55 P B UR P B R B L R HEADLAMP LH RELAY Ere 5 LG R L OR L Y 8 58 59 60 61 62 63164 GY W EL 43 HEADLAMP REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 MEL2620 LG ST RS SG HEADLAMP FOR USA Wiring Diagram H LAMP Cont d Ep Uy RR Sv TOLED f LOR mama LOR Ci 1 EL H LAMP 03 I gt GR Lavr m LG R DIODE PRECEDING PAGE L p Zp wc IR mie Re me 10 gt I B OR I SD I I To ID Ke METER HIGH BEAM INDICATOR M32 B Y COMBINATION SWITCH LIGHTING WITCH JOINT CONNECTOR 7 Pes BY Om fi Q mc L 25 26 27 28 29 3 30 31 3233 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 161519 le MEL2630 EL 44 HEADLAMP FOR USA Wiring Diagram H LAMP SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR 28530313 998868 ub zu 38594041421 664 46 47 48 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALU
102. COMP 01 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY ON OR START FUSE BLOCK REFER TO oD EL POWER GY L M19 UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT WITH METER G TO AT VSSMTR G gt EL NAVI EL AUDIO EL AUT DP G G G R gt r TIC 0 mac zm muaz mM 40 2 21 0 OR B B R TS WITH TCS B Y B OR r1 r1 FE mi WITH VDC B B BY B B B B RS WITH REAR SUNSHADE o SENSOR WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE 8 uE KE ESS REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B ELECTRICAL UNITS i 5 6 7 48 9 50 maenda je 56 57 158159 61 162163 65 67 555758 816015 Jez 63 64 65 66 67 68 gt lt EE ar MEL2920 EL 142 BOARD COMPUTER Wiring Diagram B COMP Cont d EL B COMP 02 AUDIO GND BR W LG PRECEDING e PAGE G R SWITCH STEERING SWITCH ED SU ST RS qe 33 92131 THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL2930 EL 143 BOARD COMPUTER Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses nm SEGMENT CHECK Board computer display segment can be checked by the procedure shown below 1 Turn ignition switch to
103. DEACTIVATION SETTING 1 NHEL0302S02 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch The voice prompt can be turned on off by pressing the Guid ance Volume button VOICE VOLUME SETTING 1 1 0302503 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Volume of the voice can be controlled by bending the joystick to left right EL 426 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses SYMPTOM CHART NHEL0303 NHEL0303S01 Symptom Diagnoses service procedure L G Any function of the system Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit EL 430 Strange screen color 1 Check DISPLAY SETTING MODE 1 423 unusual screen brightness 2 Check display in DIAGNOSE THE DISPLAY MODE 1 414 The display is not dimmed 1 Check DISPLAY SETTING MODE EL 423 when turning lighting Switch 2 Check lighting switch signal input to NAVI control unit correctly in DIAGNOSIS LG to ON FOR THE SIGNALS FROM THE CAR MODE No navigation guide voice 1 Check Guide Volume Setting EL 426 heard from both front speakers 2 Check voice guide operation EL 431 Beep does not sound when Check BEEP ON OFF MODE the system guides route Position marker does AT trace along t
104. Diagnoses KEY SWITCH INSERT CHECK CHECK KEY SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check key switch KEY ON SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II When key is inserted to KEY ON SW 22 ignition key cylinder KEY ON SW ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder KEY ONSW OFF SEL315W NHEL0193S04 Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 25 B R and ground Smart entrance control unit connector Voltage V Condition of key switch Key is inserted 12 12V Condition of key switch Key is removed OV 0 SEL011Y Refer to wiring diagram in EL 279 NG gt GO TO 2 OK or NG 2 _ KEY SWITCH INSERT Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4 Key switch connector Continuity p Condition of key switch Key is inserted Yes Condition of key switch Key is inserted No OK or NG Check the following e 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch SEL549Y p Replace key switch EL 287 DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK _NHEL0193S05 CHECK DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH IN
105. Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 2 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT I Check driver door switch signal DOOR SW DR in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA 21 MONITOR When front LH door is DOOR SW DR open DOOR SW DR ON When driver s door is closed DOOR SW DR OFF Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 1 LG and ground Voltage V SEL319WA Smart entrance control unit connector Condition of driver s door CLOSED Approx 5 Condition of driver s door OPENED 0 SEL004Y OK or NG NG p 3 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH Check continuity between door switch connector B29 terminals 2 and 3 Front door switch LH Continuity Door switch is pushed ams Door switch is released Yes SEL325WB Check the following e Front LH door switch ground circuit and condition e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front LH door switch p front LH door switch EL 120 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 4 CHECK DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door lock unlock switch LOCK SW DR AS UNLK SW DR AS in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II ewm LOCKSWDR AS OFF UNLK SWDR AS OFF When lock unloc
106. E11 E22 and E53 With power and ground supplied the cornering lamp relay is energized Power is supplied e from terminal 3 of the cornering lamp relay e cornering lamp switch terminal 61 RH turn When the turn signal lever is moved to the RH position power is supplied e from terminal 61 of the cornering lamp switch e through terminal 62 of the cornering lamp switch e to cornering lamp RH terminal 1 Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of cornering lamp RH through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 The RH cornering lamp illuminates until the turn signal lever returns to NEUTRAL position LH turn When the turn signal lever is moved to the LH position power is supplied e from terminal 61 of the cornering lamp switch e through terminal 63 of the cornering lamp switch e to cornering lamp LH terminal 1 Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of cornering lamp LH through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 The LH cornering lamp illuminates until the turn signal lever returns to NEUTRAL position EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL Cornering lamp will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned ON START from OFF ACC Continuity between terminals 19 and 20 and between terminals 57 and 58 of smart entrance control unit will be disturbed after 5 minutes then the headlamps will be turned off Then cornering lamp is turned off While the headlamp is turned ON by AUTO of light switch the 5 minute timer i
107. For details refer to 407 SELF DI AGNOSIS RESULTS M 1 Self Diagnosis To obtain detailed diagnosis results on the screen touch Naviga tion or Display or GPS Antenna Self Diagnosis Display the result of self diaanosis elfediagnosis was successful urther diagnosis and adjustment 15 recommended follow confirmation and adiustment mode or 5 vice m nua EL 406 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Self diagnosis Mode SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS NHEL0299S03 Diagnosed Displayed Diagnoses service procedure Recheck system at each check or Detailed result Description replacement When malfunction is color i eliminated further repair work 15 not required GPS antenna is connected to NAVI Green control unit correctly GPS Antenna 1 Check GPS antenna feeder cable M GPS Connection to the follow connection at NAVI control unit antenna Vallaw ing unit is abnormal See GPS antenna connection error is 2 Visually check GPS antenna connection the Service Manual for detected feeder cable If NG replace GPS LG further diagnosis antenna assembly 3 Replace GPS antenna Red is abnormal NAVI control unit is malfunctioning Replace NAVI control unit Self diagnosis for CD ROM DRIVER of Any CD ROM is not inserted or 15 inserted into NAVI control unit
108. GPS Information Quick Stop Customer Setting Tracking Display Setting Heading Nearby Display Icons Adjust Current Loca tion Avoid Area Setting Beep On Off Clear Memory Adare Quieter Louder Display can be set to open by either of the following controls e Display will be opened when OPEN CLOSE SW is selected with Key SW positioned 420 e Display will automatically opened when Key SW is turned OFF to The GPS data includes longitude latitude and altitude distance above sea level of the present vehicle position and current date and time for the area in which the vehicle is 421 being driven Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position Route Priorities Priorities of search request and automatic re searching can be set for route search 422 following display settings can customized e Display color Day mode or Night mode EL 423 e Brightness of display Current location of position marker can be adjusted Direction of position marker also can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is not matched EL 424 with the actual direction Address book Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted EL 42 55 BOOK Guidance Volume 2 3 po HOW PERFORM CONTROL 1 NHELO0301S02 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE
109. HEATED HEATED STEERING 9 INDICATOR ILLUMINATION EM a SU R BR HEATED i 1 STEERING m m m m m A M25 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING RS SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION 8 9 M17 M19 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B BY 5 ol 12111617 THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION se MEL3260 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC HEATED STEERING SWITCH OFF ON ONLY WHEN PUSHED 27 G IGNITION SWITCH ON IGNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION IDX HEATED STEERING RELAY OFF ON IGNITION KEY IS IN ON POSITION ___ 9 RB SOURCE FUSE SEL478Y EL 37 HEADLAMP FOR USA Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location 1 0252 Instrument panel driver side SS sensor Smart entrance 48 CD CD CB Fuse block J B 2 20 222 12222202211 6 Front door switch LH System Description NHEL0253 The headlamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and smart entrance control unit And the exterior lamp battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times e to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 6 through 2
110. IN ON POSITION IGNITION KEYHOLE DOORS USING OFF UNLOCK 12V DOORS LOCKED USING R NrERIOR PAME UNLOCK LOCK WITH LAMP SWITCH IN DOOR POSITION COMMUNICATION DOOR LOCK 8 UNLOCK SWITCHES NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK INTERFACE FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN WHEN PANIC ALARM 15 OPERATED USING KEYFOB BR Y 12V ov OFF GROUND LB TURN SIGNAL LAMP 5 UNLOCK IS USING m WHEN DOOR LOCK OR UNLOCK IS OPERATED USING KEYFOB GY R RH TURN SIGNAL LAMP SEE 12V POWER SOURCE FUSE BATTERY SAVER LXWCHVSNUERDOSECPENATE O SAVER DOSE OPERATE DOES NOT OPERATE 12V INTERIOR LAMP ON OFF POWER SOURCE PTC 2V O 54 GY DOORLOCKACTUATORS DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCH FREE LOCK OV 12V DRIVER DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCH FREE UNLOCK PASSENGER AND REAR DOORS DOOR LOCK 8 UNLOCK SWITCH FREE UNLOCK 12V IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START MORE THAN 5 MINUTES WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES DEAE EON SWITCH 2ND ON OR START HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL LESS THAN OPERATE NOT OPERATE 1V 12V TRUNK
111. INSIDE MIRROR Wiring Diagram I MIRR Wiring Diagram I MIRR 0271 EL I MIRR 01 IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START 1 B UB REFER TO EL POWER LG OR AUTO ANTI DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SU BR ST B AS BY 4 4 5 L wm lt N THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK rmn R2 7 615 4 3 2 1 JUNCTION BOX 6171819 10 21 12 MEL324O EL 213 TRUNK AND FUEL FILLER OPENER Wiring Diagram T amp FLID Wiring Diagram T amp FLID EL T amp FLID 01 FUSE I BLOCK REFER TO EL POWER J B 0168 FUEL ACTUATOR TRUNK LID FUEL LID TRUNK AND OPENER OPENER FUEL LID SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 1123456 GUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ M17 FUSE BLOCK 1 aw 15 JUNCTION BOX E 0145 57 58 59 60 616263 64 GY 12 1 Ela Ho 325 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DO TRUNK AND FUEL LID waww OP OFF ON when only pulled 43 B GROUND m uri POWER SOURCE FUSE TRUNK LID OPENER WHEN IWEENTRUNKUD OPENER AGTURTOR IS OPERATED USING
112. LH For stop and tail Rear side marker lamp LH Rear combination lamp stop and tail Body ground Rear side marker lamp RH Body ground Trunk room lamp switch Trunk lid opener actuator Rear combination lamp LH For turn Rear combination lamp RH For turn EL 494 Body ground View with trunk room rear trim removed 1 0138 MEL2240 BR 2 R P R 2 W 2 R 2 W 2 W 2 W 2 B 7 t HARNESS LAYOUT Room Lamp Harness Tweeter LH WA2 To Vanity mirror LH Illumination W A2 GY 6 Sunroof motor With sunroof Sunroof switch With sunroof Spot lamp Without sunroof Vanity mirror RH Illumination Interior lamp With sunroof Interior lamp Without sunroof Spot lamp With sunroof Auto anti dazzling inside mirror EL 495 Room Lamp Harness 1 0140 HARNESS LAYOUT Front Door Harness Front Door Harness NHELO0142 LH SIDE NHELO0142S03 Front door key cylinder switch LH Front door speaker LH Front power window main switch Front power window regulator LH Door mirror actuator LH Front step lamp LH Memory seat switch Front door lock actuator LH Front power window main switch Trunk and fuel lid opener switch MEL2260 EL 496 HARNESS LAYOUT Front Door Harness Cont d RH SIDE
113. LID OPENER WHEN TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR IS OPERATED USING 12V ACTUATOR KEYFOB ON OFF GROUND 1 REFER TO SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE IN SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT SEL580Y EL 302 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CONSULT II Inspection Procedure CONSULT II Inspection Procedure MULTI REMOTE ENT 22 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Connect CONSULT II and 5 1 1 1 CONVERTER to 1 NHEL0241 NHEL0241S01 the data link connector 71 MA SA A EM 3 Turn ignition switch ON 16 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I FE START NISSAN BASED VHCL AT SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG BR ST 5 Touch SMART ENTRANCE 6 Touch MULTI REMOTE ENT 4 RETAINED PWR HEAD 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST and WORK SUPPORT are available DX EL 303 CONSULT II Application Items REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM MULTI REMOTE ENT Data Monitor Monitored Item IGN ON SW ACC ON SW DOOR SW RR KEY ON SW DOOR SW DR DOOR SW AS LOCK SW DR AS UNLK SW DR AS KEY CYL LK SW LK BUTTON SIG UN BUTTON SIG TRUNK BTN SIG PANIC BTN UN BUTTON ON LK UN BTN ON Active Test Test Item INT IGN ILLUM HAZARD TRUNK OUTPUT HORN HEAD LAMP PW REMOTE DOWN SE
114. MEL2650 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM Wiring Diagram DTRL Cont d EL DTRL 02 e e 20A 15 REFER EL POWER GI 55 R B L R L R HEADLAMP LH RELAY LG RELAY OR P su OR A L SENSOR SENSOR SIGNAL POWER uY dE BT gt ELDTRL 04 Gn do REFER THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 55 5 4 E74 JE CD ED MEL2660 EL 57 HEADLAMP FOR CANADA DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram DTRL Cont d spna ON OR START START FUSE oe REFER TO EL POWER MD COMBINATION CHARGE rag 434 T T BR 15 6C el 2 DAYTIME LIGHT a LH LH RH CONTROL UNIT LIGHT LIGHT LH LIGHT LIGHT FUSE FUSE LIGHT MAIN EB 55 29 69 gt a gt NEXT B OR PAGE PRECEDING lt 4 pone prm E79 wa gt gt ge R L LG S HEAD LAMP BR 21 ALTERNATOR JOINT CONNECTOR 7 I WG rm omy I B B BY B By TO L l WIG EC LOAD E11 E22 E53 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 117 GD E83 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B i
115. NATS If necessary carry out C U INITIALIZATION with CONSULT II Do not erase the IVIS NATS SELF DIAGNOSIS by using CONSULT II Check the engine SELF DIAGNOSIS with CONSULT II by using the CONSULT II generic program card Engine diagnostic software included Repair engine control system Refer to EC section when selfdiagnostic results except NATS MALFUNCTION are detected When only NATS MALFUNCTION is detected erase the self diagnostic results and go to the next step Start the engine Does the engine start properly NO OK Erase the 1 15 NATS and engine SELF DIAGNOSIS by using the CONSULT II program card for IVIS NATS and generic program card Start the engine SEL024X EL 376 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5 Trouble Diagnoses SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 Self diagnosis related item NHELO0177S02 Displayed SELF DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE SYSTEM REFERENCE PART NO SYMPTOM RESULTS on CON DURE Malfunctioning part or OF ILLUSTRATION ON G SULT II screen Reference page mode NEXT PAGE ECM INT CIRC IMMU In rare case CHAIN OF ECM IMMU might stored during key registration procedure even if the system is 16 not malfunctioning Open circuit in battery voltage line of IMMU C1 G circuit Open circuit in ignition C2 line of IMMU circuit Open circuit in groun
116. OL HH eppnq yeq 1 95 oL pue dos 104 104 104 pue 4015 104 sseujeu qns HH epis BIA HH 1295 sseujeu qns HH 1698 pejeeu HH Josues sisouBeip Peq epis HH 1euo isuej eJd 295 HH 105495 1 1014 HH JOOP Apog 1508 J JOOAA 1 qO sea OL 28 01 H1 HH duie esueor 1 109 918 OL 100p Apog Gen 01 M 8L M M 49151 M G M G M M G M M C A CIA OL M M 92 AD 9 d8 9L M SsouJeu ON 2718 2218 9 m m ffs 9 11211211 m oo 2230 EL 493 Harness HARNESS LAYOUT e 8 E N Tail Harness Rear combination lamp
117. ON position with pushing board computer steering switch TRIP Then segment check will start 2 Segment check will end after 1 cycle of segment check is performed or any of following conditions exists e Ignition switch is returned to ACC or OFF position e Vehicle speed signal is input PRELIMINARY CHECK 1 0320501 NHEL0320S02 Does any digital display with ignition switch in ON No Check the following position 10 fuse No 30 located in the fuse block J B Yes e Harness for open or short between fuse and board computer Ground circuit for board computer Perform segment check Can the segment check be No Check the following performed Board computer steering switch e Ground circuit for board computer steering switch Yes e Harness for open or short between board computer and steering switch Are the memories of board computer kept when igni No Check the following tion switch is turned to OFF e g journey time 10A fuse No 12 located in the fuse block J B Harness for open or short between fuse and board Mes computer Do speedometer tachometer and fuel tank gauge No Yes Go to diagnostic procedures based on symptom 1 SEL831W 1 Era44 2 129 DIAGNOSES PROCEDURE NHEL0320S03 Outside air temperature is Ambient sensor Check ambient sensor Refer to Electrical Compo not displayed properly Ambient sensor circuit nents Inspection It may take a short time to on signal Check
118. OUT OUT DDL DDL RX TX E B BR Y P BR Y 13 12 5 e DATA LINK CONNECTOR 25 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ M17 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B W KL 123 345 Samad LIE mH 52 CR2 29 R10 v 6 7 Ww Ww MEL3500 EL 298 Wiring Diagram KEYLES REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FIG 2 1 0114502 EL KEYLES 02 ENTRANCE GI CONTROL UNIT COM MA EM LG EG FE DOOR LOCK AND DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK SU BR a D61 z RS FI BT M39 HA m mC B B B B B B e FEM 86 TE u u T REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ IDX MEL583P EL 299 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram KEYLES FIG 3 NHEL0114S05 EL KEYLES 03 ENTRANCE WITH REAR SUNSHADE 7 WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE DOOR SW AS DOOR SW DOOR SW DR RR R L DOOR WITCH PEN SWITCH RH 107 CLOSED B129 CLOSED CLOSED MEL371O EL 300 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram KEYLES FIG 4 NHEL0114S06 EL KEYLES 04 REFER TO EL POWER 10 10 PU G R JOINT PU 14 PU G R PU B17 G W EL HORN
119. PROCEDURE 5 Self diagnostic results ID DISCORD IMM ECM displayed 5011 1 screen CONFIRM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ID DISCORD 1 displayed on CONSULT II screen NHEL0177S10 SELF DIAGNOSIS DTC RESULTS TIME ID DISCORD IMM ECM SEL298W NOTE ID DISCORD IMMU ECM Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM Is CONSULT II screen displayed as above p GOTO 2 gt GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT II Perform initialization with CONSULT II Re register all IVIS NATS ignition key IDs For initialization refer to CONSULT II operation manual IVIS NVIS IMMU INITIALIZATION INITIALIZATION FAIL THEN IGN KEY SW OFF AND ON AFTER CONFIRMING SELF DIAG AND PASSWORD PERFORM C U INITIALIZATION AGAIN SEL297W NOTE If the initialization is not completed or fails CONSULT II shows above message on the screen Can the system be initialized p engine END System initialization had not been completed Ref part No F is malfunctioning Replace ECM Ref part No F Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to operation manual IVIS NVIS EL 385 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses 22 B 1 0177812 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGH
120. Perform initializa dure B automatic exiting and automatic set return functions do not operate SU I NG Can be cancellation performed during SYMPTOM8 automatic operation AS OK 2 2 Does memory indicator light up SYMPTOM 9 BT D OK SEL600W 1 After reconnecting battery cable perform initialization proce dure A or B If initialization has not been performed automatic drive positioner will not operate IDX PROCEDURE A 1 Insert key in the ignition key cylinder Ignition switch is in OFF position 2 Open close open driver side door Do not perform with the door switch operation 3 End PROCEDURE B 1 Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km h 16 MPH EL 229 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses PROCEDURE REFERENCE PAGE EL SYMPTOM No seat system functions operate __ seat system functions operate Some of the seat system functions 2 do not operate during automatic manual operation No functions operate during auto matic operation and some all func tions do not during manual opera 3 tion Some of the seat system functions 4 do not operate during automatic operation No automatic operation functions operate the memory 7 operation Oper ates during auto matic operation Automatic operation cannot be can celed 9 Memory indicator does not light up
121. Procedure ID Code Entry Procedure KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT II NOTE If a keyfob is lost the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use When the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known all keyfob ID codes should be erased After all ID codes are erased the ID codes of all remaining and or new keyfob must be re registered NHEL0117 NHEL0117S01 1 Turn ignition switch OFF Le 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to column the data link connector y s EC A y 92 AT 3 Turn ignition switch ON 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I SU BR BI ofo 5 Touch SMART ENTRANCE AIR 6 Touch MULTI REMOTE ENT x EL 319 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ID Code Entry Procedure Cont d 7 Touch WORK SUPPORT 8 The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up e REMO CONT ID CONFIR Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or not e REMO CONT ID REGIST Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code NOTE Register the ID code when keyfob or smart entrance control unit is replaced or when additional keyfob is required REMO CONT ID ERASUR Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code Refer to the 304 Work Support in CONSULT II Application Items for the following items
122. Resistance falls accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume EL 19 LG SU BR ST RS GROUND Ground Distribution Ground Distribution MAIN HARNESS Y NHEL0008 0008501 Power window relay Door mirror remote control switch TCS on off switch With TCS Cigarette lighter Power socket 78 Memory seat cancel switch Smart entrance control unit Terminal 64 Heated steering switch With heated steering Combination switch Heated steering switch With heated steering VDC off switch With VDC A T device Teminal No 2 A T device Teminal No 8 Ambient sensor Vanity mirror LH e lllumination Homelink universal transceiver Sunroof motor With sunroof R7 Spot lamp Without sunroof Vanity mirror RH llumination Spot lamp With sunroof Auto anti dazzling inside mirror compass Trunk and fuel lid opener switch Terminal No 2 Trunk and fuel lid opener switch Terminal No 4 Front door key cylinder switch LH Front door harness LH Front power window main switch Door mirror actuator LH 8 a 888 8 886 Memory seat switch Next page MEL230O EL 20 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont
123. SEL153WA NOTE Reminder mode setting cannot be changed without CONSULT II for MODES 3 4 5 6 However C and S MODES can be changed without CONSULT II RS Interior Lamp Operation When the following input signals are both supplied BT e door switch CLOSED when all the doors are closed e driver s door LOCKED remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and key hole illumination for 30 seconds with input of UNLOCK signal from keyfob For detailed description refer to INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Panic Alarm Operation When key switch is OFF when ignition key is not inserted key cylinder remote entry system turns on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal DX from keyfob For detailed description refer to VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM EL 326 The panic alarm button s pressing time on keyfob can be changed by CONSULT II EL 304 Trunk Lid Opener Operation Power is supplied at all times e through 15A fuse No 3 located in the fuse block J B e trunk lid opener actuator terminal 2 NHEL0194S0205 EL 295 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM System Description Conta When a TRUNK OPEN signal is sent with key OFF ignition key removed from key cylinder from keyfob grou
124. SUPPORT MNTR Receive diagnosis SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit diagnosis diagnosis ea STRG TCM ENGINE UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN PKIA8332E 7777 Malfunctioning part VDC TCS ABS Steering control unit angle sensor 8341 EL 463 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Case 5 Check VDC TCS ABS control unit circuit Refer to VDC TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Receive diagnosis SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit diagnosis diagnosis ENGINE 8333 7777 Malfunctioning part VDC TCS ABS Steering control unit angle sensor PKIA8342E Case 6 Check CAN communication circuit Refer to CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK EL 468 NHEL0331S0306 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Receive diagnosis SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit diagnosis diagnosis n CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN VDC TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT AND STEERING WHEEL ANGLE SENSOR NHEL0331S09 Turn ignition switch OFF Check following terminals and connector for damage bend and loose connection control unit side sensor side and harness side VDC TCS ABS control unit Steering wheel angle sensor Between VDC TCS ABS control unit and steering wheel angle sensor OK or NG EL 464 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN C
125. SW MOTOR MOTOR SW MOTOR MOTOR CONTROL SLIDING GND RR FR RECLINING RR FR UNIT LH FR LIFTING FR LIFTING PULSE RR LIFTINGRR LIFTING PULSE MOTOR MOTOR SW MOTOR MOTOR SW UP DOWN LIFTING UP DOWN RR LIFTING 2726 25124123 22 21 20 t9 18 17 65 GS THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL651K EL 225 LG AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER On Board Diagnosis On Board Diagnosis NHEL0276 Driver s door Front Memory set switch Memory switch 1 Memory switch 2 HOW TO PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS NHEL0276S01 Condition e gnition switch OFF e Selector lever range Turn ignition switch Within 5 seconds Push memory set switch and two memory switches at the same time for more than 2 seconds Self diagnosis should be performed Two indicator lamps should go on At the same time driver s seat move automatically As soon as the indicator lamps go on and off by turns start engine Within 15 seconds Drive the vehicle more than 7 km h 4 MPH and stop Do not stop engine If a circuit malfunctions a malfunction code should be indicated 1 Turn ignition switch OFF Touch front driver s side power seat switch DIAGNOSIS END 2 SEL596W 1 If no malfunction is indicated
126. SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR 2ND POSITION IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START WITH LIGHTING OFF HEADLAMP RH RELAY SWITCH 2ND HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL LESS THAN LG R HEADLAMP SWITCH OPERATE NOT OPERATE 64 B 122 xe 4 SG SEL545Y EL 45 FOR USA CONSULT II Inspection Procedure RC Steering column AU 7 SES 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to NHEL0256 1 0256501 the data link connector 122 3 Turn ignition switch 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG 5 Touch SMART 6 Touch HEAD LAMP INT LAMP BATTERY SAVER THEFT WAR ALM RETAINED PWR MULTI REMOTE ENT HEAD LAMP 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR TEST and WORK SUPPORT ACTIVE TEST EL 46 HEADLAMP FOR USA CONSULT II Application Items CONSULT II Application Items NHELO0317 LAMP Data Monitor NHEL0317S01 1 031750101 Monitored Description IGN ON SW Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch in ON position MA ACC ON SW Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch in ACC position AUTO LIGT SW Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch sig
127. SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal Possible cause Driving immediately after starting engine Opera Hen Continuous driving for long distances non stop Rough or violent driving Positional calibration precision Within 1 mm 0 04 in Posi tional calibra Position calibration direction proce dures Direction calibration adjustment The gyro angular velocity sensor needs about 15 seconds after the engine is started to precisely sense the angular velocity Directional sensing errors will occur if the vehicle is moved immediately after starting the engine The posi tion marker may indicate inaccurate position When the vehicle is driven continu ously without stopping over a long distance errors in directional sens ing may occur The position marker may indicate inaccurate position Wheel spinning peeling out or simi lar rough driving techniques can adversely affect sensing accuracy The position marker may indicate inaccurate position If current vehicle location is roughly set the system may be unable to locate the road that the vehicle is traveling on This is especially true in an area where there are many roads When calibrating the position check the vehicle direction If the vehicle direction is not correct subsequent precision of current location will be affected EL 436 Service procedure Wait a few moments between starting the engine and
128. System Description Cont d by the gyro angular velocity sensor and the GPS antenna GPS data Each of these functions has its advantage and disadvantages Depending upon conditions one function takes precedence over the other to accurately determine the direc tion of forward movement Gl Function type Advantage Disadvantage e Calculation errors may Gyro Angular Able to accurately detect I i accumulate over a long velocity sen minute changes in steering i Sn period of continuous sor angle and direction vehicle travel e Able to sense vehicle travel e Unable to detect direction GPS antenna in four general directions avec Tow LG GPS data North South East and West vehicle speeds Road Matching 1 029650102 matching allows the driver to compare the vehicle location data with the road map contained in the CD ROM drive SU Map matching Vehicle position is marked on the CD ROM map This permits the driver to accurately determine his her present position on the high way and to make appropriate course decisions BR When GPS data reception is poor during travel the vehicle posi 221111 is not amended At this time manual manipulation of the venicie traced route 11 21 position marker is required eT by sensor signal Display indication T RS M
129. The headlamps including parking license tail fog and illumination lamps are turned off after 5 minutes While the headlamp is turned ON by AUTO of light switch the 5 minute timer is activated when the ignition switch signal changes from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF and either one of LH or RH front door switch ON signal is input The auto light delay off timer is activated as the following e When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated the timer in operation is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontin ued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 5 minute timer is reset e When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset Exterior lamp battery saver control mode and auto light delay off timer period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II Interior Lamp Spot Lamp Vanity Mirror Illumination Te The lamps turn off automatically when the interior lamp spot lamp or and vanity mirror illumination are illumi nated with the ignition key in the OFF position if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the lamp switch is in the ON position for more than 3
130. When front LH door is DOOR SW DR open DOOR SW DR ON When driver s door is closed DOOR SW DR OFF Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 1 LG and ground Voltage V SEL319WA Smart entrance control unit connector Condition of driver s door CLOSED Approx 5 Condition of driver s door OPENED 0 SEL004Y OK or NG NG p 3 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH Check continuity between door switch connector B29 terminals 2 and 3 Front door switch LH Continuity Door switch is pushed ams Door switch is released Yes SEL325WB Check the following e Front LH door switch ground circuit and condition e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front LH door switch p front LH door switch EL 112 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer Cont d 4 CHECK FRONT RH DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check driver door switch signal DOOR SW AS in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA 2 MONITOR When front RH door is DOOR SW AS open DOOR SW AS ON When driver s door is closed DOOR SW AS OFF Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 2 R L and ground Voltage V SEL153Y Smart entrance contro
131. and unlock switch terminal 5 LH or 7 RH RS e from door lock and unlock switch terminal 8 LH or 11 RH e smart entrance control unit terminal 33 When the front driver side door is unlocked by the front door key cylinder switch the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal e through body grounds terminals M9 M25 and M87 to front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 2 from front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 1 to front power window main switch terminal 19 SG from front power window main switch terminal 8 to smart entrance control unit terminal 33 When a signal or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit ground is supplied e through smart entrance control unit terminal 31 interior lamp terminal 2 IDX With power and ground supplied the interior lamp illuminates SWITCH OPERATION When interior lamp switch is ON ground is supplied e through case grounds of interior lamp e to interior lamp And power is supplied e to interior lamp terminal 1 NHELO0165S02 EL 99 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS System Description Cont d e from smart entrance control unit terminal 50 When spot lamp LH and or RH is ON ground is supplied e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 e 10 spot lamp terminal 2 And power is supplied e to spot lamp terminal 1 e from smart entrance control unit terminal 50 When vanity mirror
132. connector Terminals 13 Seat control Continuity 41516 unit LH SEL609W 4 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground 24 C Seat control unit LH Terminals Continuity 17 Ground 28 Ground 29 Ground SEL610W OK or NG Replace reclining encoder EL 236 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 Lifting encoder front check 1 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER FRONT OUTPUT SIGNAL Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 19 and ground with oscilloscope when power seat lifting front is operated Seat control unit LH NHEL0277S07 HI Approx 5V LO Approx SEL611W Lifting encoder front is OK 2 LIFTING ENCODER FRONT INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground Seat control unit LH Battery voltage should exist SEL612W OK or NG Replace seat control unit LH EL 237 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses 3 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER FRONT OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector 2 Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector Terminals I Front lifting device LH Seat control unit LH connec
133. d Preceding page 221 xe R Gl Fuse block J amp M25 MA wes cn nd LG CON NECTOR CONNECT TO EG NUMBER Telephone Fuse block J B Terminal No 6K Blower motor relay gnition relay Combination flasher unit Illumination control switch Data link Terminal 4 Combination meter Terminal 30 SU indicator Turn signal indicator Combination meter Terminal No 59 ABS warning lamp Air bag warning lamp Board computer eT Fuel gauge Odo trip meter Speedometer Tachometer RS TCS off indicator With TCS VDC off indicator With VDC Water temp gauge Combinatioin meter Terminal 65 Meter illumination 0000000 88 e e Main sub harness 1 V Next page MEL2310 EL 21 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d NECTOR CONNECT TO NUMBER Navi control unit With navigation system Terminal No 3 Navi control unit With navigation system Terminal No 4 Rear sunshade switch Front monitor With navigation system Rear sunshade unit cry Sub harness 2 harness p door Front door 249 harness harness RH Door mirror actuator RH pez door Front door SU harness Cer aS harness RH Front p
134. does operate LH high beam does not operate but LH low beam operates LH low beam does not operate but LH high beam operates RH high beam does not operate but RH low beam operates 10A fuse Lighting switch Smart entrance control unit 20A fuse Headlamp LH relay Headlamp LH relay circuit Lighting switch circuit Smart entrance control unit 20A fuse Headlamp RH relay Headlamp RH relay circuit Lighting switch circuit Smart entrance control unit Bulb 15A fuse Headlamp LH relay Open in the LH high beams cir cuit Lighting switch Lighting switch ground circuit Headlamp relay LH Open in the LH low beam circuit LH low beam ground circuit Xenon bulb HID control unit Bulb 15A fuse Headlamp RH relay Open in the RH high beams circuit Lighting switch Lighting switch ground circuit EL 48 Check 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 49 of smart entrance control unit Check Lighting switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 Check 20A fuse No 54 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp LH relay Check headlamp LH relay Check harness between headlamp LH relay and smart entrance control unit Check harness between smart entrance control unit and lighting
135. e The tab locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab s Refer to the illustration below NHELO0003 0003501 r Refer to the next page for description of the slide locking type connector MA CAUTION Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector Example EM Connector housing Packing Water proof type For combination meter For relay SEL769DA EL 7 HARNESS CONNECTOR Description Cont d HARNESS CONNECTOR SLIDE LOCKING TYPE e A new style slide locking type connector is used on certain systems and components especially those related to OBD e The slide locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness disconnec tion e The slide locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider Refer to the illustra tion below CAUTION e Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector e Becareful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector Example Waterproof type 1 Firmly grasp shell 2 Push slider until 3 Disconnect harness connector housing connector pops or connector at A snaps apart Non waterproof type D Firmly grasp shell of 2 Pull back on the 3 Disconnect harness connector housing slider while pulling connector at apart male and famale halves of connector
136. fuse and fusible link box to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3 With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 1 2m or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit the warning chime will sound IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME With the key in the ignition switch the OFF position and the driver s door open the warning will sound Power is supplied e from key switch terminal 4 e smart entrance control unit terminal 25 Ground is supplied e front door switch driver side terminal 2 e to smart entrance control unit terminal 1 Front door switch driver side terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B12 without rear sun shade or B46 with rear sunshade LIGHT WARNING CHIME With ignition switch OFF driver s door open and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position warning chime will sound Power is supplied e from tail lamp relay terminal 2 e to smart entrance control unit terminal 19 and 57 Ground is supplied NHELO0053 EL 160 WARNING System Description e front door switch driver side terminal 2 e to smart entrance control unit terminal 1 Front door switch driver side termi
137. harness for open or short between ambient steady the indication after Vehicle speed sensor signal sensor and board computer ignition switch is turned to Verify more than 4V is present at terminal 58 of ON board computer when is operated Make sure journey distance trip is displayed prop erly If NG check journey distance trip display Range Cruising possible Average fuel consumption display Make sure fuel consumption is displayed properly distance is not displayed Fuel tank gauge signal circuit NG check fuel consumption display properly Make sure fuel gauge operates properly If NG check fuel gauge Refer to EL 144 BOARD COMPUTER Trouble Diagnoses Cont d Journey time hour meter 1 10A fuse 1 10A fuse No 12 located in the fuse block J B is not indicated properly Verify battery voltage is present at terminal 62 of combination meter G Average fuel consumption Fuel consumption signal Check harness for open or short between ECM termi is not displayed properly nals 20 34 and combination meter terminals 20 16 Average vehicle speed is Journey time hour meter display Make sure journey time is displayed properly If NG not indicated properly check journey time display Electrical Components Inspection 16 0321 AMBIENT SENSOR m The ambient sensor is attached to the radiator core support It detects ambient temperature and converts it into res
138. illumination LH and or RH is ON ground is supplied e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 e to vanity mirror illuminations LH and RH terminals 2 And power is supplied e 10 vanity mirror illuminations LH and RH terminals 1 e from smart entrance control unit terminal 50 rear door switch LH and or is ON door is opened the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal e through case ground of the rear door switch from the rear door switch terminal 1 to smart entrance control unit terminal 3 from smart entrance control unit terminal 32 to from step lamp LH and RH terminal 1 And power is supplied e to front step lamp LH and RH terminals 2 e from smart entrance control unit terminal 50 When front door switch LH and or RH is ON door is opened ground is supplied e E body grounds B7 and B12 without rear sunshade or B46 with rear sunshade and or B106 and 127 to the front door switch terminal 3 from the front door switch terminal 2 to smart entrance control unit terminal 1 and or 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 32 to front step lamp LH and RH terminals 1 And power is supplied e to front step lamp LH and RH terminals 2 e smart entrance control unit terminal 50 When trunk room lamp switch is ON trunk lid is opened ground is supplied e through body grounds T6 and T8 e trunk room lamp switch terminal 2 e from trunk room lamp switch terminal 1 e to trunk room
139. in wheel and tire diameter caused Speed Calibration by tire wear or low pressure Speed calibration immedi EL 417 SU ately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire chains in inclement weather BR This mode is for initializing the current location Use Initialize Location when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a 418 ST trailer etc RS HOW TO PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE 1 Start the engine 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display 3 Push both of and D N switches at the same time for more than five seconds HA SG 4 Select Self Diagnosis or Confirmation adjustment seit Diagnosis e For further procedure refer to the following pages which Select one of the following describe each application item of the self diagnosis mode Self Diagnosis X lt Confirmalion adjustment EL 405 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Self diagnosis Mode Cont d Self Diagnosis EI 1 Start the engine P COAT 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display 3 Push both MAP and D N switches at the same time for more than 5 seconds 4 Select Self Diagnosis 1 029950201 Confirmation adjustment 5 Self diagnosis will be performed 6 Diagnosis results will be displayed Diagnosis results are indi cated by display color
140. lt gt WARN 04 METER TO EL M33 lt TS gt wARN 06 M34 lt D EM UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT WITH ODO TRIP METER Le E lt TS gt WITH TCS WITH VDC WITH SUNSHADE M8 OR WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE AT 1 F49 7 5 21 ell P L SU OR G I FUEL LEVEL BR SENSOR UNIT AND FUEL FUEL LEVEL SWITCH LH SENSOR 5 165 ST B PRESSURE RS SWITCH e 15 09 B46 RS SG DX sls 713 29 x aee Ede B19 T3 gt A 515171819190 5 MEL297O EL 151 WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram WARN Cont d EL WARN 03 PRECEDING 418 WITH TCS WITH VD COMBINATION 5 WITH REAR SUNSADE Q9 WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE STEP LAMP OUT DOOR SW DOOR SW DOOR SW DR AS RR LG R W 1 02 w 16 LG P L 2 e FRONT FRONT anit Sie OPEN 89 OPEN B29 2 Ex R W R W L1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12113 14 15 16 17 18 22 2980 EL 152 WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram WARN Cont a PRECEDING Kl EL WARN 04 TO FOR CANADA EL WARN 02 lt U FORUSA COMBINATION x1 PUC MET ER M33 M34 68 00 LG T EC Cu pi E Po DR OR CORR PUN Pa
141. lt 7 P SES 2 EM SEF289X 3 Insert IVIS NATS program card into CONSULT II L Program NATS AEN02B CONSULT II 4 Turn ignition switch ON 5 Touch START 6 Select NATS 5 0 SELECT SYSTEM BR ST RS 7 Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service For further information see the CONSULT II Operation Manual IVIS NVIS Ss a CONSULT II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION 1 76 02 CONSULT II DIAGNOSTIC TEST COM IDX MODE p C U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following three components C U initialization and re registration of all IVIS NATS ignition keys are necessary IVIS NATS ignition key IMMU ECM SELF DIAG RESULTS Detected items screen terms are as shown in the chart 374l EL 373 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS CONSULT II Cont d NOTE e When any initialization is performed all ID previously reg istered will be erased and all IVIS NATS ignition keys must be registered again e The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key In this case the system will show DIFFERENCE OF KEY or LOCK as a self diagnostic result on the CONSULT II screen e n rare case CHAIN OF ECM IMMU might be stored as a self diagnostic result during key registration procedure even if the system is not malfuncti
142. maker and tail lamps are turned ON by 1ST or 2ND of light swith the 5 min utes timer is activated when the ignition switch is turned from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF Continuity between terminals 19 and 20 and between terminals 57 and 58 of smart entrance control unit will be disturbed after 5 minutes then the headlamps will be turned off Then the parking license side marker and tail lamps are turned off While the headlamp is turned ON by AUTO of lighting switch the 5 minute timer is activated when the igni tion switch signal changes from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF and either one of LH or RH front door switch ON signal is input The auto light delay off timer is activated as the following e When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated the timer in operation is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontin ued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 5 minute timer is reset e When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset Exterior lamp battery saver control mode and auto light delay off timer period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II When
143. of the RH turn signal lamps HAZARD LAMP OPERATION RS Power is supplied at all times to hazard switch terminal 3 through e 15A fuse No 5 located in the fuse block J B With the hazard switch in the position power is supplied e through terminal 1 of the hazard switch e combination flasher unit terminal 1 e through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit e to hazard switch terminal 4 Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the hazard switch to e turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 e combination meter terminal 25 e rear combination lamp LH terminal 1 IDX Power is supplied through terminal 6 of the hazard switch to e front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 e combination meter terminal 29 rear combination lamp RH terminal 1 EL 81 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS System Description Cont d Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds T6 and T8 Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 With power and ground supplied the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION Power is supplied at all times e to smart entran
144. one of the following a Select one of the following Display Auto Open D gt CLEAR MEMORY x delete all the stored places in Address Book Avoid Area and Previous Dest select Yes NAVIGATION SYSTEM m 5 Control Panel Mode ON OFF 0301512 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Touch Beep On Off Select or Off icon If you want the beep sound select you do not want the beep sound select Off Push PREVIOUS switch then the display will go back to the current location map CLEAR MEMORY MODE NHEL0301S13 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Select Clear Memory To delete all the stored places in Address Book Avoid Area and Previous Dest select Yes EL 425 MA LG G Guide Volume Setting Edit Address Book Guidance Volume NAVIGATION SYSTEM Guide Volume Setting DESCRIPTION Following voice guidance setting can be changed 2 3 4 2 3 4 NHEL0302 NHEL0302S01 Voice guidance activation deactivation Voice volume of the guidance ACTIVATION
145. open or short circuit LH or RH door switch ground circuit LH or RH door switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 Bulb Replacement CAUTION e After replacing a new xenon bulb be sure to make aiming adjustments e Hold only the plastic base when handling the bulb Never touch the glass envelope BR e not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long period of time Dust moisture smoke etc entering head lamp body may affect the performance of the headlamp Remove headlamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just before a replacement bulb is installed 1 Disconnect negative battery cable RIS 2 Disconnect headlamp connector 3 Remove headlamp assembly BT WARNING Never service a xenon headlamp without disconnecting nega tive battery cable and with wet hands SG XENON BULB LOW BEAM 1 Remove headlamp seal cover by turning it counterclockwise 2 Turn bulb socket counterclockwise with keep pushing then remove it EL 49 HEADLAMP FOR USA Bulb Replacement Cont d 3 Release retaining pin 4 Remove the xenon bulb 5 Install in the reverse order of removal CAUTION e When disposing of the xenon bulb do not break it always dispose of it as is e Make sure to install the bulb securely if the xenon bulb is Z Retaining pin improperly installed in its socket high tension current IN leaks occur Thi
146. returns to the original position SEL595W SG EL 219 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Schematic Schematic 0274 LINN 1081NOO SO1 S8v Wo3 8 HOLIMS 193 Y3MOd YOSNIS 2 HOLIMS H NOITISOS H1 03395 25 zs 139NVO HOLIMS BE gt 39130 30143A uz 2 lt 9 SNIL4I1 INOM4 3 51 0 BACKWARD FORWARD BACKWARD FORWARD 8 6 9c BESTS 0945 1041405 8313W H1 LINN 1V3S GE cc 9 LE 4 HOLIAS A35 1412492 H139I 3d SNIQIIS 1391 40 NO 13915 531 SL HOLIMS HOLIMS MEL383O EL 220 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Wiring Diagram AUT DP Wiring Diagram AUT DP NHEL0275 EL AUT DP 01 BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH START ON OR START o 40A REFER EL POWER t JIB MA W B R B Y R BR W G LG D m Y R gt W B R B PAGE REFER THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 19 G gt IDX FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN
147. supply and ground circuit Refer to POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 2 Can Diagnosis mode be activated Yes No Check meter gauge operation in Diagnosis mode Is any malfunction indicated in Diagnosis mode Replace unified meter Go to Symptom Replace unified meter control unit assembly Chart 73 control unit assembly SEL479Y 1 Meter Gauge Operation and Odo 2 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND 3 Symptom Chart EL 131 Trip Meter Segment Check in CIRCUIT CHECK Diagnosis Mode EL 130 METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses SYMPTOM CHART 1 0046511 One of speedometer 1 Sensor signal 1 Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter gauge tachometer fuel gauge Vehicle speed signal INSPECTION VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Refer to water temp gauge is mal Engine revolution signal functioning Fuel gauge INSPECTION ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL Water temp gauge Refer to 138 2 Unified meter control unit INSPECTION FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Refer to Multiple meter gauge are Unified meter control unit INSPECTION THERMAL TRANSMITTER Refer to malfunctioning except meter 2 Replace unified meter control unit assembly LG Before starting trouble diagnoses below perform PRELIMINARY CHECK RS EL 131 METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses POWER SUPPLY AND G
148. switch Check smart entrance control unit 364 Check 20A fuse No 55 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp RH relay Check headlamp RH relay Check harness between headlamp RH relay and smart entrance control unit Check harness between smart entrance control unit and lighting switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 Check bulb Check 15A fuse No 68 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of headlamp LH relay Check headlamp LH relay Check the following Harness between headlamp relay LH terminal 5 and LH headlamp for open circuit Harness between LH headlamp and lighting switch for open circuit Check lighting switch Check harness between lighting switch and ground Check headlamp relay LH 2 Check harness between headlamp relay LH terminal 7 and LH headlamp for open circuit Check harness between LH headlamp and ground Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new one If headlamps illuminate correctly replace the bulb Replace the HID control unit with other side control unit or new one If headlamps illuminate correctly replace the control unit Check bulb Check 15A fuse No 69 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of headlamp R
149. switch lock unlock Step lamp Ignition switch ON Door indicator Key system Headlamps Parking lamps License lamps Tail lamps Fog lamps Illumination lamps Ignition switch ON Front door switches Lighting switch Interior lamps Step lamp Spot lamp Vanity mirror illumination Ignition switch ON Front door switches Lighting switch Ignition switch ON Rear window defogger switch Rear window defogger relay Ignition switch ON Front door switches Sunroof motor Ignition switch ON i Front door switches Power window relay Ignition switch ON i i ing rel Heated steering switches Heated steering relay EL 358 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONSULT II CONSULT II DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION NHEL0247S01 Item CONSULT II Diagnosed system DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST WORK SUPPORT GI screen terms DOOR LOCK Power door lock door lock REAR DEFOGGER 258 75 7 js si KEY WARN ALM EM SEAT BELT A X Battery control for X interior lamp X THEFT WAR ALM Vehicle security system Vehicle security system system NHEL0247 gt RETAINED PWR Retained power control Retained power control control REMOTE Remote keyless entry X system X Applicable diagnostic item in each control system refer to the relevant pa
150. the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND after the parking license side marker and tail lamps are turned off by the battery saver control ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11 and e to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 Then the parking license side marker and tail lamps illuminate again EL 65 NHELO0207S01 NHEL0207S03 MA LG PARKING LICENSE LAMPS Schematic Schematic E TRUNK LID COMBINATION LAMP RH a 258 lt LICENSE LAMP RH 5 LICENSE LAMP LH 0 51 MARKER LAMP RH REAR COMBINATION LAMP RH REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP LH 0 REAR COMBINATION LAMP LH FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP RH PARKING LAMP RH PARKING LAMP LH FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP 0 H 8 VU o L2 I EE 200 o z 5 3562 eoo 5 xu 2 c Oo 2 0 ME uu 5 2 5 5 E Pu q ron 3 5 oj I 550 i Fe o 85 2 ES o X 5 e E zo NJ 5 EQ z 5 lt ax 172 EL 66 NHEL0208 MEL582P PARKING LICENSE LAMPS Wiring Diagram TAIL L Wiring Diagram TAIL L
151. the timer is discontin ued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 5 minute timer is reset e When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset Exterior lamp battery saver control mode and auto light delay off timer period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the battery saver control ground is supply e to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11 and then e to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from headlamp battery saver control unit terminals 21 and 59 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and EL 53 LG RS HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM System Description e through lighting switch terminal 12 Then headlamps illuminate again AUTO LIGHT OPERATION For auto light operation refer to HEADLAMP EL 40 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION With the engine running the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released power is supplied e through daytime light control unit terminal 7 to terminal 1 of RH headlamp through terminal 2
152. to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the operation of the compass 2 compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment have the compass checked at an autho rized dealer 3 The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill The compass returns to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabi lized 3 Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar mate rial dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing EL 146 Zone Variation Chart ATER NI M WAS NS i IN HA E Ay Us EQ 2 55 System Description is displayed in the compass window The compass needs to be calibrated Drive the vehicle in 3 circles at 5 MPH or less until the display reads a direction You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday routine The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete circles Inaccurate compass direction With the display turned on push the button for 3 seconds until the Zone selection comes up a number will be displayed in the mirror compass window Toggle until correct zone is found and release switch The display
153. unit terminals 43 and 64 LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH When lighting switch is 1ST or 2ND position ground is supplied e to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 and e through lighting switch and body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Tail lamp relay is then energized and illumination lamps illuminate The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for illumination The illumination control switch that controls the amount of current to the illumination system As the amount of current increases the illumination becomes brighter The ground for all of the components except for door mirror remote control switch clock and grove box lamp ashtray are controlled through terminals 2 and 3 of the illumination control switch and body grounds M9 M25 and M87 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL Illumination lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned ON or START from OFF or ACC Continuity between terminals 19 and 20 and between terminals 57 and 58 of smart entrance control unit will be disturbed after 45 seconds then the headlamps will be turned off Then illumination lamps are turned off Exterior lamp battery saver control mode be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II EL 47 When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND after illumination lamps are turned off by t
154. was not conducted due to NAVI control unit is malfunctioning Replace NAVI control uni no insertion of CD ROM CD ROM CD ROM 2 Confirm the disc is installed cor NAVI control unit judges that rectly not up side down DRIVER of NAVI is 2 inserted CD ROM is malfunctioning 2 Perform Check the abnormal See the 5 Map CD ROM or CD ROM driver of 2 vice is malfunctionin WIEN CO 22 Navigation diagnosis 9 to confirm whether cor lt rect CD ROM is inserted or not Check the disc surface Are there Inserted CD ROM can be any scratches abrasions or pits Vellow CD ROM is abnormal read the surface Please check the disc Map CD ROM or CD ROM driver of Replace the CD ROM the unit is malfunctioning Replace NAVI control unit Check GPS antenna feeder cable ST Connection to the follow connection at NAVI control unit ing unit is abnormal See GPS antenna connection error is Visually check GPS antenna the Service Manual for detected feeder cable If NG replace GPS further diagnosis antenna assembly Replace GPS antenna Connection between NAVI control unit and display unit should normal Therefore Display connection error will not occur when display can opened closed properly SG DX EL 407 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Confirmation Adjustment Mode E
155. x select one of the following SYSTEM SETTING Select one of the following NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS Select items to display on the map CASH MACHINE SYSTEM SETTING select one of the following sn pa NAVIGATION SYSTEM oy GL qe Select Heading up or North up icon To display North up select North up To display the car heading up select Heading Push MAP switch then the display will go back to the current location map NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS MODE NHEL0301S10 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Select Nearby Display Icons Select and touch an item on the list Push MAP switch then the display will go back to the current location map ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION MODE 1 0301511 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Select Adjust Current Location Select or to calibrate the heading direction Arrow marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key Select Set Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the arrow mark Display will show Heading direction has been calibrated and then go back to the current location map EL 424 SYSTEM SETTING Select
156. 0 Viva HOLIMS HOLIMS M HOLIMS M HOLIMS gt NOLIVOINOWWO2 3 1 IN IN 5004 14043 14043 uJ91sK s 20 Joop amod Ul9js s wass C AN 13M r C 1 pue LEY jeubis ol uj 1s s Qunos uod JOIYSA OF _ oe See 225 6 FOL L AV 1323 n 5 2 35 319IH3A 6S v9 SV t 9S SS 6 LYVWS OS 6 sduue Wood pue 101491U o 3519 3503 n LYVLS 49 NO 49 22V HOLIMS HOLIAS EL 297 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram KEYLES Wiring Diagram KEYLES m NHELO114 NHELO114S01 FIG 1 pieni sud ON OR START ACC OR ON e WITH SUNROOF FUSE REFER WITHOUT SUNROOF W B 40A i 10A J B EL POWER 11 IES al IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION T G PU CONTROL UNIT 1144 115 KEY RING BATTERY LIGHT SAVER LAMP OUT
157. 0 minutes After lamps are turned off by the battery saver system the lamps illuminate again when e door is locked or unlocked with keyfob door lock unlock switch or door key cylinder e Ignition switch is turned to ON e Door is opened or closed e Key is inserted into ignition key cylinder Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II Rear Window Defogger Door Mirror Defogger Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger turned in approximately 15 minutes after the win dow defogger switch is turned on Heated Steering Heated steering is turned off approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering switch is turned ON RETAINED POWER CONTROL When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position START position the following sys tems can be operated for 45 seconds by the RAP signal from the smart entrance control unit terminal 46 e Electric sunroof NHEL0124S05 EL 357 WA LG Description Cont d e Power window SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT II INPUT OUTPUT System Power door lock Remote keyless entry Warning chime Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger Vehicle securit
158. 01 o NHELO175 FUSE REFER TO BLOCK J B W L M19 W L JOINT SECURITY CONNECTOR INDICATOR IMLINE OR B W L i rr ee m eo 2 Fo 9 189 IGN GND2 GND1 SMART SECURITY FUSE ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT W L 11144 145 R Y OR T e B B B B B m m o ER REFER TO THE FOLLOWING KS Gy em 115 SUPER 817 15141 2 1 1516 171181512048 m mi MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ M17 M19 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B ELECTRICAL UNITS m 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 GY 5 57 58 59 60 61 62 63164_ MEL361O SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC 27 IGNITION SWITCH ON IGNITION KEY IS IN POSITION SECURITY INDICATOR GOES OFF ILLUMINATES B GROUND nv ov 49 POWER SOURCE FUSE B IGROUND gt SEL984X EL 372 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS CONSULT II im Data link connector CONSULT II NHELO176 TE CONSULT II INSPECTION PROCEDURE m AXI I ib 1 Turn ignition switch OFF a lt 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to Gil the data link 9
159. 0A fuse No 54 located in the fuse and fusible link box and to headlamp LH relay terminal 3 through 15A fuse No 68 located in the fuse and fusible link box and to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 6 through 20A fuse No 55 located in the fuse and fusible link box and to headlamp RH relay terminal 3 through 15A fuse No 69 located in the fuse and fusible link box and to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B Ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 Power Supply to Low Beam and High Beam When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position ground is supplied e to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 e through smart entrance control unit terminal 22 e from lighting switch terminal 12 and Headlamp LH relay E121 0 Driver side view with ONAT instrument panel removed lt SEL048Y NHEL0253S01 NHEL0253S0101 EL 38 HEADLAMP FOR USA System Description Cont d e
160. 1 SUPER 144 MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 GY 5 48 43144 146147 MEL355O EL 334 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram VEHSEC 4 NHEL0122S04 EL VEHSEC 04 REFER TO EL POWER LG HORN EG VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY 1 G W wi EL HORN AT G W JOINT 12 E81 15 7 7 pM G ALT rel 1 ENTRANCE OUT CONTROL Led i E40 SG EX Em REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER pores MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 245558 HS L L mioo W W B B CN GY W W MEL356O EL 335 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram VEHSEC 0122507 EL VEHSEC 05 lt U gt FOR USA REFER TO EL POWER lt C gt FOR CANADA 15A 20A 15A 20A 1 P QU B UR R W BR QU 2 OR lt C gt LW QU LY lt C gt On COO aa R L B OR P R OR 1 Ts ze eh LIGHT HEADLAMP HEADLAMP LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT CONTROL V V UNIT WO Cu 9 16 HIGH HIGH B Y 3 B Y LG Le TO x3m EL DTRL JOINT CONN
161. 1 or 2 is performed the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps for about 50 seconds 1 Engine hood trunk lid or any door is opened during armed phase 2 Disconnecting and connecting the battery connector before canceling armed phase POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times e through 10A fuse No 12 located in the fuse block J B e to security indicator lamp terminal 1 Power is supplied at all times e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B EL 325 1 019650102 019650103 0196502 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM System Description Cont d e to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B e to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 Ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors hood and trunk lid Pattern A NHEL S To activate the vehicle security system the smart entrance control unit must receive signals indicating the d
162. 1 0311501 e Do apply of 7 0 higher to the measurement terminals e Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7 0V or less NHELOS11 Precautions for Harness Repair CAN SYSTEM NHEL0312S01 e Solder the repaired parts and wrap with tape Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm 4 33 in 0312 Soldered and wound with tape EL 5 LG SU 02 25 SG IDX PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Harness Repair Cont d e Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts The spliced wire will become separated and the characteris tics of twisted line will be lost NG Bypass wire connection Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams refer to the following e Refer to Gl 11 HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS e Refer to 11 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis refer to the following e Refer to GI 35 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES e Refer to 24 HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle 0002 EL 6 HARNESS CONNECTOR Description Description HARNESS CONNECTOR TAB LOCKING TYPE e tab locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness disconnection
163. 17 _ _ W R CONTROL FUSE DOOR SW B B lt lo o E B B B BB B B B B L e e e SWITCH B B Re 157 546 x PRE M87 M25 2 SELECT SWITCH SWITCH B12 lt OR gt 8127 8106 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B MEL3220 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND CONDITION 1 LG JDRIVERDOORSWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 2 JPASSENGER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 27 jGNITIONSWITCH ON GNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION 43 GROUND r O S a MEI 49 POWERSOURCE FUSE j L 64 GROUND SEL986XB EL 208 RE Data link connector E cm LS Sene column 122 CONSULT II SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG RETAINED PWR MULTI REMOTE ENT HEAD LANP POWER SUNROOF CONSULT II Inspection Procedure CONSULT II Inspection Procedure RETAINED PWR 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to Gi the data link connector NHEL0223 NHEL0223S01 3 Turn ignition switch 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL LG 5 Touch SMART 6 Touc
164. 19 87 E89 B gt NEXT PAGE 88806 e JE R Y G R G G R Y TO TO 251 1 EL HSEAT 0251 2 EC O2H1B1 EC FUELB2 N REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 417 MD E87 E89 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B SW epp 7 ESE EE MEL257O EL 16 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING Wiring Diagram POWER EL POWER 06 PRECEDING 2 7 J B di 0 _ E89 16 R LG B G P B B W OR OR GY TO TO TO TO TO EL WIPER EL TURN EL DTRL EC FPUMP A PNPISW EL CORNER BR VDC ST EL BACK L EL AT IND EC MIL EL NAVI EC ASC BS RS EL AUT DP REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 417 419 E83 289 5 JUNCTION J B MEL2580 EL 17 Wiring Diagram POWER TO EL POWER 05 3 5 1 E93 41216 w TO EC F PUMP TO EC MAIN EC FUELB1 EC FUELB2 EC INJECT POWER SUPPLY ROUTING TO RS SRS TO AT SHIFT EL HSEAT EL 18 EL POWER 07 IGNITION SWITCH EL AUT DP REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B 2 1
165. 2V 58 SB TAILLAMP SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 18 OR 2ND POSITION 12V 0 64 GROUND SEL578Y 28 OR SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCHUNFASTENED FASTENED IGNITION SWITCH IS IN POSITION oV 12V ou EL 164 WARNING CONSULT II Inspection Procedure CONSULT II Inspection Procedure Data link connector NHEL0216 KEY WARN ALM LIGHT WARN ALM SEAT BELT Iosue i ALM NHELO0216S01 7 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 8 2 Connect 50114 and CONSULT II CONVERTER to S the data link connector MA ay N 3 Turn ignition switch 16 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I FE AT fronfe 5 Touch SMART ENTRANCE AX m su 2 ST 6 Touch KEY WARN ALM LIGHT WARN ALM or SEAT BELT 4 80 EL e DATAMONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the warn n siete ing chime DX DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST EL 165 CONSULT II Application Items WARNING CHIME KEY WARNING ALARM Data Monitor Monitored Item IGN ON SW KEY ON SW DOOR SW DR Active Test Test Item CHIME LIGHT WARN ALM Data Monitor Monitored LIGHT SW 1ST IGN ON SW DOOR SW DR Active Test Test Item CHIME SEAT BELT WARM ALM Data Monitor Monitored IGN ON SW SEAT BELT SW Active Test Test Item CHIME CONSULT II
166. 300S05 NHEL0300S0501 Use the Diagnose the Display mode to check the display color brightness and shading The NAVI control unit must be replaced if the color brightness and shading are abnormal Select one of the following Self Diagnosis 3 diustment 4 5 Confirmation Adjustment Select one of the following Diagnose the Display Diagnosis for Signals from the Car Navigation initialize Loc 6 Diagnose Display Select one of the following T Display Color Spectrum Bar How to Perform Self Diagnosis 1 NHEL0300S0502 Start the engine Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push both MAP and D N switches at the same time for more than 5 seconds Select Confirmation adjustment Select Diagnose the Display Select Display Color Spectrum Bar Display Gradation Bar Then color bar gray scale will be displayed Display colour spectrum bar n case of abnormal colour display Please refer to service manual for further diagnosis Display gradation In case of abnormal colour display Please refer lo service manual for furlher diagnosis SEL541X EL 414 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta LONGITUDE amp LATITUDE MODE NHEL0300S06 Description NHEL0300S0601 The Longitude amp Latit
167. 4 G W and ground SEL352W Smart entrance control unit connector Continuity DISCONNECT Rear window defogger switch is pushed Continuity should exist Rear window defogger switch is released GA Continuity should not exist SEL999X OK or NG Check the following Rear window defogger switch Refer to EL 192 Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear window defog ger switch Rear window defogger switch ground circuit EL 190 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Trouble Diagnoses 4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 G M145 terminal 49 R B and ground Smart entrance control Smart entrance control unit connector unit connector Terminals Ignition switch position Hs Ground Battery Battery Battery voltage voltage voltage Ground OV OV SEL001Y OK or NG gt GO TO 5 Check the following e 10A fuse 10 or No 13 located in the fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse 5 CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 43 B M145 terminal 64 B and ground Smart entrance control Smart entrance control A unit connector unit connector DISCONNECT Continuity should exist SEL002Y Yes
168. 5 6 DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT For USA For Canada MEL352O EL 330 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Schematic Cont d SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 1 WA COMMUNICATION UT LG LOCK INI UNLOCK FRONT FRONT T POWER CPU _____ Power _____ WINDOW WINDOW EG MAIN SWITCH DOORLOCKAND _ SWITCH DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK SWITCH FULL BETWEEN FULL N BETWEEN FULL FULL STROKE STROKE AND N STROKE AND STROKE su SU T BR ST RS RA SG To trunk room lamps JgggSs TRUNK HOOD REAR FRONT ROOM SWITCH DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR LAMP SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH LH RH LH RH MEL3530 EL 331 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram VEHSEC FIG 1 BATTERY SECURITY INDICATOR EL NATS c oR ANTI SECURITY INDICATOR OUT GND2 NHELO0122 Wiring Diagram VEHSEC EL VEHSEC 01 IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH ACC OR ON ON OR START FUSE BLOCK REFER TO J B EL POWER CONTROL UNIT 1143 4144 Y R E81 B2 E81 a B2 1 20131415 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 03
169. 684V System Description UTLI N 1 0296501 Navigation System Multi AV System relies upon three ing devices in order to determine vehicle location at regular time intervals 1 Vehicle speed sensor Determines the distance the vehicle has traveled 2 Gyro Angular velocity sensor Determines vehicle steering angle and directional change 3 GPS antenna GPS data Determines vehicle forward move ment and direction The data provided by the three sensing functions together with a comparison of the mapping information read from the CD ROM drive permit accurate determination of the vehicle s current location and subsequent course map matching The information appears on a liquid crystal display This comparison of GPS data vehicle position sensing and map matching permits precise determination of vehicle location NHEL0296 Position Sensor Operating Principles The sensor determines current vehicle location by calculating the previously sensed position the distance traveled from this position and the directional changes occurring during this travel 1 Distance traveled The distance traveled is calculated using signals received from the vehicle speed sensor The sensor automatically compen sates for the slightly reduced wheel and tire diameter resulting from tire wear 2 Forward movement Direction Changes in the direction of forward movement are calculated EL 390 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
170. ATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT 0 2 When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK KEY CYLLK SW ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK KEY CYL UN SW ON SEL342W Without CONSULT II 1 Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned LOCK or UNLOCK 2 Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after key is turned LOCK or UNLOCK V Neutral 15 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL397Y Refer to wiring diagram in 1 279 Door key cylinder switch is NG gt GO TO 2 EL 289 DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 2 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH 1 Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector 2 Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals DISCONNECT Door key cylinder switch D Door unlock switch terminal TS connector 2 Ground terminal 11 3 Door lock switch terminal Terminals Continuity a SEL034X OK or NG Check the following e Door key cylinder switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between front power window main switch and door key cyl inder switch If above systems are normal replace the front power win
171. CAUTION Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in P position When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Less than 1V HI BEAM position 3m When releasing parking brake with engine running and Approx half battery turning lighting switch to OFF daytime light operation voltage CAUTION Sr GEES A gt Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position RS 13 Lighting switch When turning lighting switch to HI Battery voltage 14 L W Hi beam WESS When turning lighting switch to FLASH TO PASS Battery voltage BT So 17 Parking brake When parking brake is released Battery voltage switch When parking brake is set Less than 1 5V SG Bulb Replacement 1 0266 Refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA 49 EL 63 HEADLAMP FOR CANADA DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Aiming Adjustment Aiming Adjustment Refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA EL 51 0267 EL 64 PARKING LICENSE LAMPS System Description System Description The parking license and tail lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into combi nation switch and smart entrance control unit The battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit Power is supplied at all times e to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3 e through 10A fuse
172. CE Refer to 1 2711 If NG go to the step b below Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance con trol unit is present at terminal 2 of power window relay Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off 1 When front door LH and RH is closed Check harness between smart entrance control unit and driver or passenger side door switch for short circuit Check driver or passenger side door switch ground circuit Check driver or passenger side door switch Check smart entrance control unit Check encoder and limit switch EL 274 LG RS SG Interruption detection function does 1 Encoder and limit switch 1 not operate properly NOTE 1 RAP signal s period can be changed by CONSULT II EL 272 DX EL 273 POWER WINDOW Trouble Diagnoses ENCODER AND LIMIT SWITCH CHECK CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM Check the following e Obstacles in window glass molding etc e Worn or deformed glass molding e Door sash tilted too far inward or outward e Door window regulator OK or NG Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism ER CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO LIMIT SWITCH Check voltage between front power window main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and ground Front power window main Front power window EN switch connector D10 switch RH conn
173. DEFOGGER 10 032 La 4 JOINT CONNECTOR 7 SU 662 m In D 8 8 B 8 B B B B L 5 L L o o JL a5 22 E53 25 SI REFER TO THE FOLLOWING M15 631 SUPER imm 011 552 MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 RS 17161 1G 5 1 2 3 4 516 71819 OD MEL118N SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC o ew unos DEFOSEER ore ON WHEN ONLY PUSHED e GNITION SWITCH ON IGNITION KEY IS IN ON POSITION ID EE E XS DEFOGGER ON IGNITION KEY IS IN ON POSITION 12V mln 49 POWER SOURCE FUSE 54 _IGROUND p dH SEL978X EL 185 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONSULT II Inspection Procedure Data link connector Steering column 7 s 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Connect CONSULT II and 5 1 1 1 CONVERTER to NHELO0218 NHEL0218S01 the data link connector 122 3 Turn ignition switch 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG 5 Touch SMART 6 Touch REAR DEFOGGER NENNEN SELECT DIAG MODE DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR and ACTI
174. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM Transmitter does not activate receiver Before conducting the procedure given below make sure that sys tem receiver garage door opener etc operates with original hand held transmitter If NG receiver or hand held transmitter is malfunctioning not vehicle related 1 PRELIMINARY CHECK 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Does red light LED of transmitter illuminate when any button is pressed ES 2 Red light LED 5 Driver s M sun viso Transmitter buttons _ 0128 1 0128501 SEL442U Yes or No 2 CHECK TRANSMITTER FUNCTION Check transmitter with Tool For details refer to Technical Service Bulletin OK or NG Receiver or handheld transmitter is malfunctioning not vehicle related Replace transmitter with sun visor assembly CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1 Disconnect transmitter connector 2 Turn ignition switch OFF 3 Check voltage between terminal 1 and body ground Within 10 minutes after turn ignition switch OFF Integrated homelink transmitter connector Battery voltage should exist SEL367W OK or NG Check fuse 10A and repair harness EL 368 HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Trouble Diagnoses 4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between terminal 2 and ground Integrated homelink transmitter connector Continuity should exist SEL368W OK or NG Replace tra
175. E BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC DRIVER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 12V OV EM gt PASSENGER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 5V 3 RW REAR DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 5V gt 0V 7 wm SENSOR IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT IS APPLIED TO AUTO LIGHT SENSOR 1 5 SIGNAL ON POSITION LIGHT IS NOT APPLIED TO AUTO LIGHT SENSOR LESSTHAN IV LG AUTOLIGHT SENSOR GND LIGHT SENSOR IGNITION SWITCH OFF ON 5V POWER 20 58 TAILLAMP SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR 2ND POSITION 12 12 IGNITION SWITCH ONORSTART MORE THAN 5 MINUTES FWITHINS MINGTES ov 53 WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES oV SWITCH 2ND ON OR START BE HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL EXCEPT PASS OR 2ND POSITION Sprit PASS OR 2ND POSITION HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL 10V 12V SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH l LIGHTING SWITCH EXCEPT AUTO gt LY HEADLANP S WIFI ON POSITION AUTO POSITION 12v OV 26 IGNITION SWITCH ACC POSITION 27 GNITIONSWITCH ON GNITION SWITCH IS IN ON POSITION 43 GROUND ee ee A 49 POMWERSOURCE FUSE O SU 58 SB SWITCH BILIGHTING
176. ECTOR 7 Pem B B Y E E11 SNE E REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER 2 21456 819 E38 MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 20 21 75 1 U U 585 E O 11111 560 B B cy MZ sp 20 Ea 229 6 BR BR BR BR MEL3570 EL 336 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram VEHSEC SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC 1 LG J DRIVER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 12V gt PASSENGER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED OPEN 5V OV DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN OV 6 YR _ HOOD SWITCH ON OPEN OFF CLOSED 12V IGNITION SWITCH OR START MORE THAN 5 MINUTES WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES al SWITCH 2ND ON OR START HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL 26 PU IGNITION SWITCH ACC ACC POSITION 27 0 GNITION SWITCH ON IGNITION KEY IS IN ON POSITION COMMUNICATION DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCHES NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK 33 L INTERFACE FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH NEUTRAL LOCK UNLOCK GOR SECURITY INDICATOR G
177. EL 8 STANDARDIZED RELAY Description Description NORMAL OPEN NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types normal open normal closed and mixed type relays GI Wira Does m flow EM z LC SW 1 BATTERY BATTERY Does not Does not flow r gt 1517 25 Flows AT BATTERY SW 1 BATTERY SW 1 BATTERY SEL881H TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS 009 SEL882H IDX EL 9 STANDARDIZED RELAY Description Cont d symbol Outer view Circuit x bi 5 Case color and connection The arrangement of terminal numbers on the actual relays may differ from those shown above SEL188W EL 10 0005 Schematlic POWER SUPPLY ROUTING Schematic For detailed ground distribution information refer to GROUND DISTRIBUTION EL 20 gt lt 86 lt 23 97 cA 07 60 5B 7 dQ Anv GNI 1V QNI 1V SIVN SvdNOO AOSNML 5 1 Tuta dQ Anv SYS 15 SQA 3NOHd 5 21 30045 S313 O1QNON 330 3NOHd MISSA MS dNd 1 1 Z81304 1 VON SIVN 181303 ALOW3Y Pan E E
178. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION E L S LG 5 CONTENTS System Descriptionl 99 Schematic 102 Wiring Diagram 1 _ 103 108 Wiring Diaaram D MY CONTENTS 5 C1 m N O m CONTENTS EL 4 PRECAUTIONS Supplemental Restraint System 515 AIR SEAT PRE TENSIONER Supplemental Restraint System SRS AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE TENSIONER ___ N The Supplemental Restraint System such as AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE TENSIONER used along with a seat belt helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment and may only deploy one front air bag depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted The 585 system composition which is available to INFINITI 135 is as follows The composition varies according to optional equipment e Fora frontal collision The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module located in the center of t
179. G lt SUPER Ege E ALIN 11213 e3 4 567 e 15140859 RIS OD iom erar ite 1 5161718 o MEL342O EL 268 POWER WINDOW Wiring Diagram WINDOW EL WINDOW 05 HS WITH HEATED SEAT WITHOUT HEATED SEAT 2 LL lt 2 WITH SUNSHADE WINDOW POWER MAIN WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE SWITCH LG SU BIR ST 000000006 3 4 5 1 m e ERR 96 9980 880080 88 8 6 D U REAR SWITCH RS r cO xll alg 8 A THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ BR A 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 2103 24 SG MEL3430 1 Lu IDX EL 269 POWER WINDOW Wiring Diagram WINDOW EL WINDOW 06 PRECEDING FRONT WITH HEATED SEAT WINDOW WITHOUT HEATED SEAT SWITCH Xe eS 1 gt REAR RH SWITCH 2 Lo 15 gt G W G 3 2 li li 16 GW G 4 4 ED lt gt G gt lt s TO EL WINDOW 01 gt cR WIL L G W G 8130 B146 101 oH lt G
180. G B R W TO EL ILL LG R W HAZARD SWITCH 455 mm Y ap TO EL ILL BR ST L RS B B COMBINATION SWITCH D dc B B B B NEXT PAGE e Le SG THE FOLLOWING SUPER amme MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 7 211 3 35136 37 38 39 40 41 E 817 20113 0 x 134 35 36 37 38 39 0 41 5 DX 168 J B 71615 9 MEL2770 EL 83 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram TURN D EL TURN 02 m G B G B 1 lt n Cy mam PRECEDING x mmm G B m e REAR REAR COMBINATION COMBINATION COMBINATION METER LAMP LH LAMP RH TURN TURN TURN SIGNAL SIGNAL SIGNAL 2 A B JOINT CONNECTOR 7 18 r1 7 m ee B B B ed Le 1 A E11 E22 E53 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ MEL278O SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC 243 5 4 GROUND LOCK OR UNLOCK IS OPERATED USING KEYFOB 1502 5010 uso 2 LOCK OR UNLOCK IS OPERATED USING KEYFOB UNT 49
181. H SUNROOF WITHOUT SUNROOF R G m B NEXT PAGE R G gt TRUNK ROOM e VANITY MIRROR RH ILLUMI NATION umga 112 s SISSE AD 21218182 G 89 R10 811 MEL289O EL 104 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Wiring Diagram INT L EL INT L 03 lt PRECEDING 1 Gl PAGE gt R G lt M38 Hes R G R G 061 R G LG R G eal EC IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION FE R Y SU BR ST RS SI KEYRING LIGHT SMART 97 UNIT 1143 1149 SG REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ MEL382O EL 105 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Wiring Diagram INT L SMART EL INT L 04 CONTROL UNIT COM 96 DOOR LOCK AND DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK SWITCH CPU SWITCH RH 255 GD UNLOCK 2 g 2 z 9 8 REFER THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ MEL2900 EL 106 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Wiring Diagram INT L SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR 2526127281293013113233 88 34 55 86 87 88390142 114946 al CXV ORO
182. H relay Check headlamp RH relay Check the following Harness between headlamp relay RH terminal 5 and RH headlamp for open circuit Harness between RH headlamp and lighting switch for open circuit Check lighting switch Check harness between lighting switch and ground HEADLAMP FOR USA Trouble Diagnoses RH low beam does not operate Headlamp relay RH Check headlamp relay RH but RH high beam operates Open in the RH low beam cir Check harness between headlamp relay RH termi cuit nal 7 and RH headlamp for open circuit Gl RH low beam ground circuit Check harness between RH headlamp and ground Xenon bulb Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new HID control unit one If headlamps illuminate correctly replace the bulb Replace the HID control unit with other side control unit or new one If headlamps illuminate correctly EM replace the control unit High beam indicator does not work 1 Bulb Check bulb in combination meter Open in high beam circuit Check the following LG Harness between headlamp RH relay and combina tion meter for an open circuit Harness between high beam indicator and lighting switch Exterior lamp battery saver control Door switch LH RH circuit Check the following does properly Smart entrance control unit Harness between smart entrance control unit and LH or RH door switch for
183. Harness Connector Location NHELO0041 View with glove box removed f SUN 2 08 SEL550Y System Description 0042 UNIFIED CONTROL METER e Speedometer meter tachometer fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally by control unit built in combination meter e Digital meter is adopted for odo trip meter The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected The record of the trip meter is erased when the battery cable is disconnected e meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode e Meter gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO TRIP METER NHEL0042S07 The display is changed by pushing the odo trip meter switch Push For less than 1 sec Push For less than 1 sec Push for reset Release For more than 1 sec Push for reset For more than 1 sec Push or release the odo trip meter switch SEL175W NOTE Turn ignition switch to the position to operate odo trip meter EL 124 METERS AND GAUGES System Description Cont d POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Power is supplied at all times e through 10A fuse No 12 located in the fuse block J B e to combination meter terminal 62 With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B e com
184. I 9 lt gt O 0 2 if AT oc 11 5 z oc m m 9 A A 0 gt O AX Vehicle security indicator does not illuminate for 30 seconds SU Al i m Al i m Keyfob gt 55 25 system cannot 79 1 Vehicle security Vehicle security O oc R o o 2 9 One of the door is X opened x oS Sr o gt E TT 3 2 iua headlamp X X X SES SG 5 gt B 5 5 Door outside key 4 98 IDX GE 58 5 X X gt o X Applicable 1 Make sure the system is in the armed phase Before trouble diagnoses above perform preliminary check Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of preliminary check EL 341 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Power Supply Circuit Check NHELO12350301 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminals 26 PU 27 G M145 terminal 49 R B and ground unit connector Terminals Ignition switch position 5 unit Gis hd y Battery Battery voltage voltage voltage Smart entrance control Smart entrance control Batt Ground iiid voltage Batter Batter Ground ud Md voltage vo
185. IMMU INITIALIZATION INITIALIZATION FAIL THEN IGN KEY SW OFF AND ON AFTER CONFIRMING SELF DIAG AND PASSWORD PERFORM C U INITIALIZATION AGAIN SEL297W NOTE If the initialization is not completed or fails CONSULT II shows the above message on the screen Can the system be initialized GO TO DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 to check CHAIN OF IMMU KEY refer to IVIS NATS IMMU How to Replace IVIS NATS IMMU If IVIS NATS is not installed correctly IVIS NATS system will not operate properly and SELF DIAG RESULTS on 5011 1 screen will show LOCK MODE or CHAIN OF IMMU KEY BR ST RS EL 389 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Precautions WARNING Precautions NHEL0295 Do not attempt to disassemble the monitor Parts of the monitor have high voltages that can result in severe and dangerous electric shock CAUTION e Do not reverse battery connections e Do not attach unauthorized parts e Protect the unit from severe impact NOTE Before beginninq repair determine whether or not the unit is defective Refer to This Condition Is Not Abnormal Vehicle speed GPS antenna sensor NAVI C U W built in CD ROM drive and oscillation gyro Display unit Current position 0 Previous forward direction of vehicle Change in current forward direction of vehicle Distance traveled from previous position SEL
186. ION SWITCH WITH REAR SUNSHADE I asd WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE REFER TO EL POWER MA 2 R B G PU EM OR BASE LG 1 164 43 SB SB LG R L OR SU BR LG R L OR LG R LG R RS PAGE 5 B B B B M25 M87 p l s REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 12 3 4 5 e 7 1121514151617 819 DX JUNCTION BOX J B MEL275O EL 77 FRONT LAMP Wiring Diagram F FOG Cont d EL F FOG 02 SU 2 BLOCK REFER TO FOR CANADA EL POWER x1 P QU RB lt C gt e COMBINATION SWITCH FRONT COMBINATION SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH JOINT CONNECTOR 7 1 11 22 E53 DUE THE FOLLOWING 1 1 1 e 8 M15 5 CH 184116 MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ GY B B L FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B 211 31 411218 33125431 62 o 2760 EL 78 FRONT 1 Wiring Diagram Cont d SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR 24 35 38 323899 HIE 43144145 46147 5 CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION LIGHTING SWITCH OFF OR AUTO 1ST OR
187. IRCUIT 1 Disconnect VDC TCS ABS control unit connector and harness connector B58 2 Check continuity between VDC TCS ABS control unit harness connector B57 terminals 61 L 63 R and harness con nector B58 terminals 9 L 20 R VDC TCS ABS Harness connector control unit connector TTT CIUNIT o CONNECTOR e 11 Continuity should exist 61 63 c SEL563Y OK or NG CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect steering wheel angle sensor connector M218 2 Check continuity between harness connector M227 terminals 9 L 20 R and steering wheel angle sensor harness connector M218 terminals 5 L 4 R Harness connector Steering wheel angle sensor connector mj maa sua 215111 Continuity should exist 4 5 SEL564Y OK or NG Connect all the connectors and diagnose again Refer to Work Flow EL 460 ECM CIRCUIT CHECK NHELO331S05 SG Turn ignition switch OFF Check following terminals and connector for damage bend and loose connection control module side and harness side ECM Harness connector F53 Harness connector M223 Harness connector M2 Harness connector B2 EL 465 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect ECM connector 2 Check resistance between ECM harness connector F48 te
188. In this case the motor will not operate manually O1 CO NHEL0273S03 OPERATED PORTION Allowable measurement Seat sliding Approx 2 5 sec Within 6 mm 0 24 in Seat reclining Same as above Change angle within 1 Absolving T u NHEL0273S0302 When moving selector lever back to position after having moved it to any position except fail safe operation will be canceled INITIALIZATION After reconnecting battery cable perform initialization procedure A or B If initialization has not been performed automatic drive positioner will not operate PROCEDURE A 1 Insert key in the ignition key cylinder Ignition switch is in OFF position 2 Open close open driver side door Do not perform with the door switch operation 3 End PROCEDURE B 1 Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km h 16 MPH 2 End EL 217 LG AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER System Description Cont d MEMORY AUTOMATIC SET NHELO273S05 Two drive positions can be retained in the memory Press memory switch to set driver s seat to preset posi tion PROCEDURE FOR STORING MEMORY Adjust the position of driver s seat with manual set operations Ignition switch Indicator LEDs 1 Indicator LED for which driver s seat positions are already retained in memory Touch set switch illuminates for 5 seconds 2 Indicator LED for wh
189. KING LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM NHELO253S06 The vehicle security system will flash the low beams if the system is triggered Refer to VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM XENON HEADLAMP Xenon type headlamp is adopted to the low beam headlamps Xenon bulbs do not use a filament Instead they produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a mixture of xenon an inert gas and certain other metal halides In addition to added lighting power electronic control of the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color Following are some of the many advantage of the xenon type headlamp e The light produced by the headlamps is white color approximating sunlight that is easy on the eyes e Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps affording increased area of illumination e The light features a high relative spectral distribution at wavelengths to the human eye is most sensitive which means that even in the rain more light is reflected back from the road surface toward the vehicle for added visibility e Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps reducing battery load 1 0253505 CONVENTIONAL HID control unit Transforms battery voltage into illumination Illuminating Area Example Unit m ft Structure of the new xenon headlamp Ix Lux HID High Intensity Disc
190. Km 4 X A A B46 B127 B106 M87 M25 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 1231415 6 7 8 9 1011 SUPER 5 MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ M17 FUSE BLOCK 2 7777 75 27 LA Le DNE 1 JUNCTION BOX J B 662 6364 GY W MMC MEL339O EL 265 WA LG SG POWER WINDOW Wiring Diagram WINDOW EL WINDOW 02 o wn um WA gt PAGE PING 4 lt n e lt gt gt WIL gt TO EL WINDOW 04 010 013 W REGULATOR LH REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ MEL3400 EL 266 POWER WINDOW Wiring Diagram WINDOW EL WINDOW 03 Y G V G Y G gt TO EL WINDOW 05 SWITCH BETWEEN FULL STROKE AND N im N 5 mms REFER TO THE FOLLOWING D1 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ EL 267 MEL341O WA LG RS POWER WINDOW Wiring Diagram WINDOW EL WINDOW 04 1 lt gt WINDOW 02 ew R lt W L PRECEDING PAGE ve 8 5 2 UJ Sinem ak da eu t Lue LER REFER TO THE FOLLOWIN
191. LT II screen is touched This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation The trunk is unlocked when ON on CONSULT II screen is touched This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations The alarm activate for 0 5 seconds after ON on CONSULT II screen is touched This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation The headlamp illuminates for 0 5 seconds after ON on CONSULT II screen is touched This test is able to check power window open operation The front power windows activate for 10 seconds after on CONSULT II screen is touched 1 024250103 Description It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode Keyfob ID code can be registered Keyfob ID code can be erased Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed with this mode Selects hazard and horn reminder mode among six steps EL 294 EL 304 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CONSULT II Application Items Conta Test Item Description AUTO LOCK SET Auto door lock mode can be selected among the following periods e MODE 1 5 2 OFF Mode MODE 1 min GI PANIC ALARM SET The panic alarm button s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods MODE 1 0 5 sec MODE 2 OFF Mode MODE 3 1 5 sec TRUNK OPENER The trunk lid opener button s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following peri MA ods MODE 1 0
192. NESS LAYOUT EL SECTION 098 EL 403 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram NAVI EL NAVI 05 M193 W 192 W 24 22120118 16 12 10 8 6 El B E E Ed Ea N MEL366O EL 404 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Self diagnosis Mode Self diagnosis Mode APPLICATION ITEMS Self Diagnosis Self diagnosis for Navigation Display and GPS Antenna 408 WA NHEL0299 Diagnose the Display Color and gray gradation of display can be checked in 414 this mode EM Several input signals to NAVI control unit can be moni Diagnosis for Signals from the Car EL 412 LG Check the map The version parts number of inserted CD ROM be 418 ROM version checked in this model Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory G Error history before turning ignition switch ON are displayed in this 409 mode Time and location when where the errors occurred are also displayed Display the Use the joystick to adjust position Lon Confirmation Longitude 8 Latitude and latitude will be displayed EL 415 adjustment Navigation Adjust the Angle Turning angle of the vehicle on the display can be 418 adjusted in this mode Under ordinary conditions the navigation system dis tance measuring function will automatically compensate for minute decreases
193. NEXT PAGE E 1 Gv m u 1415161 2850 EL 96 ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram ILL EL ILL 05 BATTERY FUSE 5 8085 BEFERTO 8 J B EL ILL 02 RB Y R LG CONTROL UNIT COMBINATION WITH ODO TRIP METER ILLUMINATION ODO TRIP METER ILLUMINATION PRECEDING lt L 5 REFER THE FOLLOWING bs e e o otesfet FUSE BLOCK BR BR JUNCTION BOX J B 56 57 158 59 0 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 ST RS U MEL2860 SG EL 97 ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram ILL SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND CONDITION 1 LG DRIVERDOORSWITCH X OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 2 HL PASSENGER DOOR SWITCHIOFF CLOSED ON OPEN 3 RW j REARDOORSWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 007 MO SENSOR IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT IS APPLIED TO AUTO LIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL ON POSITION LIGHT IS NOT APPLIED TO AUTO LIGHT SENSOR PB SENSOR GND AUTO LIGHT SENSOR SWITCH OFF HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL
194. NHELO0177S04 PART D Key ID chip PART E Security PART C2 indicator IGN BAT PART C1 PART C4 ECM IVIS NATS ignition key CONSULT II SELO87WD DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 SELF DIAGNOSIS 1 0177506 Self diagnostic results ECM INT CIRC IMMU displayed CONSULT II screen 1 Confirm SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS INT CIRC IMMU displayed on CONSULT II screen Ref part No B 2 Replace ECM Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to 5011 1 operation manual IVIS NVIS ECM INT CIRC IMMU EL 378 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Self diagnostic results CHAIN OF ECM IMMU displayed CONSULT II screen CONFIRM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS CHAIN OF ECM IMMU displayed CONSULT II screen NOTE In rare case CHAIN OF ECM IMMU might be stored during key registration procedure even if the system is not mal functioning NHEL0177S07 SELF DIAGNOSIS DTC RESULTS TIME Is CONSULT II screen displayed as above GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 SEL292W 22 CHECK SUPPLY IMMU 1 Disconnect IMMU connector 2 Check voltage between terminal 8 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT II or tester IMMU connector M42 26 DISCONNECT Battery voltage should exis
195. NICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Turn ignition ON 2 Check voltage between ECM terminal 116 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground DISCONNECT 25 IMMU connector M42 I Voltage 0V SEL306W Communication line is short circuited with battery voltage line or ignition switch ON line Repair harness or connectors Ref part No C4 EL 381 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5 Trouble Diagnoses CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Check continuity between ECM terminal 116 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground DISCONNECT t 4 HS Gr ort connector M43 19 Continuity should not exist OK or NG gt GO TO 8 Communication line is short circuited with ground line Repair harness or connectors Ref part No C4 SEL307W 8 SIGNAL FROM ECM TO IMMU CHECK 1 Check the signal between terminal 116 and ground with CONSULT II oscilloscope when ignition switch is turned 2 Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 750 msec just after ignition switch is turned ON Triggering Menu Stop Triggering Auto Trigger gt gt A 5 0 V DIv 10 mS DIv SEL730W IMMU is malfunctioning Replace IMMU Ref part No A Perform initialization with CONSULT II For the ope
196. NKWN ABS ___ UNKWN A T Symptoms Attach copy of Attach copy of Attach copy of ENGINE ABS A T SELF DIAG RESULTS SELF DIAG RESULTS SELF DIAG RESULTS Attach copy of Attach copy of Attach copy of ENGINE ABS A T CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR PKIA8323E EL 448 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses CHECK SHEET RESULTS EXAMPLE NHEL0326S03 NOTE If is displayed on INITIAL DIAG Initial diagnosis as DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for diagnosed control unit replace the control unit 1 1 032650301 Check ECM circuit Refer to ECM CIRCUIT CHECK 450 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Transmit FENGNE uwww PS E 8325 7777 Malfunctioning part ABS TCS 2 control unit SU 2 PKIA8335E 88 Case 2 Check ABS TCS control unit circuit Refer to ABS TCS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK 451 ST CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit Receive diagnosis diagnosis _ diagnosis ENGINE Na DONN UNKWN onw PKIA8326E SG 7777 Malfunctioning part PKIA8336E EL 449 SYSTEM MODEL
197. No 60 located in the fuse and fusible link box and e to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B When ignition switch is in ON or START position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH When lighting switch is in 1ST or 2ND position ground is supplied e to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 and e through lighting switch and body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking license side marker and tail lamps illuminate LIGHTING OPERATION BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM When lighting switch is in AUTO position ground is supplied e to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 and e to body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking license side marker and tail lamps illuminate EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL While parking license side
198. No D IMMU is malfunctioning Replace IMMU Ref part No A Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to CONSULT II operation manual IVIS NVIS EL 383 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 Self diagnostic results CHAIN OF IMMU KEY displayed on CONSULT II screen CONFIRM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS CHAIN OF IMMU KEY displayed on CONSULT II screen NHEL0177S09 SELF DIAGNOSIS DTC RESULTS TIME Is CONSULT II screen displayed as above p GOTO 2 p SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 CHAIN OF IMMU KEY SEL294W 2 IVIS NATS IGNITION KEY ID CHIP Start engine with another registered IVIS NATS ignition key Does the engine start Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning Replace the ignition key Ref part No E Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to CONSULT II Operation Manual IVIS NVIS Fa CHECK IMMU INSTALLATION Check IMMU installation Refer to How to Replace IMMU in EL 389 OK or NG IMMU is malfunctioning Replace IMMU Ref part No A Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to CONSULT II Operation Manual IVIS NVIS Reinstall IMMU correctly EL 384 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC
199. O 1ST OR 2ND POSITION 12V LIGHTING SWITCH EXCEPT PASS OR 2ND POSITION LG R SWITCH PASS OR 2ND POSITION HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL 10V 12V OPERATE NOT OPERATE 64 GROUND Oe IMIM NOTE For CONSULT II Inspection Procedure refer to HEADLAMP FOR 5 48 For CONSULT II Application Items refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA Trouble Diagnoses for exterior lamp battery saver control refer to HEADLAMP FOR USA EL 47 EL 90 SEL547Y ILLUMINATION System Description System Description NHELOUSS The illumination lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and smart entrance control unit The battery saver system is controlled by smart entrance control unit Power is supplied at all times e to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and e through 10A fuse No 60 located in the fuse and fusible link box and e to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B When ignition switch is in ON or START position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B and When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B Ground is supplied to smart entrance control
200. OCATION Passenger Compartment Cont d Antenna amp Rear sunshade unit BOSE speaker amp Fuel lid opener actuator P Trunk lid opener actuator VA Behind Trunk room side trim Lower side of the rear parcel Rear parcel shelf center on driver side lt 70 Rear sunshade unit Fuel lid opener Jos 2 gt 4 US Sm A Ti speaker amp SJ gt actuator EN gt je gt a MEL2480 EL 476 HARNESS LAYOUT How to Head Harness Layout How to Read Harness Layout NHELO131 Example GI 62 Et 6 ASCD ACTUATOR MA Connector color Cavity Connector number EM Grid reference LG The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings e Main Harness e Engine Room Harness Engine Compartment TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE 1 Find the desired connector number on the connector list 2 Find the grid reference AT 3 On the drawing find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row 4 Find the connector number in the crossing zone 5 Follow the line if used to the connector CONNECTOR SYMBOL Main symbols of Harness Layout indicated in the below U Connector type E e Cavity Less than 4 ER ROOM e ST e Cavity From 5 to 8 LD 7 gt lt RS
201. OES OFF ILLUMINATES 12 gt 0 4 SECURITY HORN VIEN PANIC ALARM IS OPERATED USING KEYFOB ON OFF 12V GROUND 49 POWER SOURCE FUSE d IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START MORE THAN 5 MINUTES WITH LIGHTING OFF WITHIN 5 MINUTES 59 RH RELAY SWITCH 2ND ON OR START SU HEAD LAMP ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL LESS THAN OPERATE NOT OPERATE 1 5 gt 12 64 GROUND Ren cD 23 1 REFER TO SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE IN SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT BR BT SEL553Y EL 337 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM CONSULT II Inspection Procedure Rp RR CONSULT II Inspection Procedure THEFT WAR ALM 22 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to NHEL0244 NHEL0244S01 the data link connector 122 3 Turn ignition switch 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG 5 Touch SMART 6 Touch THEFT WAR ALM INT LAMP BATTERY SAVER THEFT WAR ALM RETAINED PWR MULTI REMOTE ENT HEAD LAMP 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST and WORK SUPPORT are avaliable WORK SUPPORT EL 338 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM THEFT WAR ALM Data Monitor Monitored Item
202. OMER COMPLAINT The system might be no malfunctioing 1 Yes it necessary calibrate the No system Perform Self diagnosis 2 Yes Repair replace based on Does self diagnostic result exist SELF DIAGNOSIS No RESULTS 6 Confirm history of errors in ERROR HISTORY MODE 3 Yes Repair replace following Does self diagnostic result exist ERROR HISTORY TABLE 7 Check input signals to NAVI control unit in Diagnosis for signals from the car MODE 4 Are signals input properly Check signal circuit END SEL519X 1 4 EL 412 6 2 EL 405 5 EL 429 7 21 410 EL 428 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d DRIVING TEST n During the driving test diagnose the system by checking the dif ference of symptoms with each sensor ON or OFF Test Pattern 1 G 1 030350301 Test method in which current position adjustment is not made according to GPS data e Remove the GPS antenna connector from the NAVI control unit Drive the vehicle Before driving the vehicle perform Adjust Current Location Test Pattern 2 Test procedure in which map matching is not used e Before driving the vehicle perform Adjust Current Location MODE With the ignition switch OFF and the CD ROM removed from the NAVI control unit drive the vehicle After driving the vehicle reinstall the map CD ROM Compare the saved driving tracks for the vehicle s current loca tion w
203. ON Push VOICE switch The guide content does not corre The content of the voice guide may vary Operate vehicle following the traffic rules and spond to actual conditions depending on the type of junction regulation Route Search Information NHEL0304S0303 Symptom Possible cause Repair order Proceeding in desired direction However route search in desired direction does not function Unable to find appropriate route in the desired direction This is not abnormal EL 440 NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal Cont d Adjust position to wide road brown near des tination area In an area where traffic direction is displayed separately pay close attention to the direction of travel Set the destination area and the way point over the road 22 c Starting point and destination areas are very Move destination areas away from starting near point on the screen The recommended route is divided into indi vidual control segments When way point 1 is passed the data from the starting point to the No object route is searched near destination area No route is displayed Recommended route which has been passed disappears from the This is not abnormal display way point 1 is erased LG There may be special conditions for roads Search recommends roundabout near the starting point and destination area Slightly change starting point and destination route
204. ONTROL While the headlamp is turned ON by 2ND of light switch the 5 minute timer is activated when the ignition switch is turned from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF Continuity between terminals 21 and 22 and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will be disturbed after 5 minutes then the headlamps will be turned off While the headlamp is turned ON by AUTO of light switch the 5 minutes timer is activated when the igni tion switch signal changes from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF and either one of LH or RH front door switch ON signal is input The auto light delay off timer is activated as the following e When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated the timer in operation is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontin ued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 5 minute timer is reset e When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset Exterior lamp battery saver control mode and auto light delay off timer period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off b
205. OURCE FUSE POWER SOURCE jv ____ 2 DOOR LOCK ACTUATORS DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCH FREE LOCK OV 12V DRIVER DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCH FREE UNLOCK AR LOCK amp UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK 12V PASSENGER AND REAR E E NEG DOORS LOCK ACTUATOR DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK 12V 64 GROUND 1 REFER TO SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE IN SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT ST RS SG SEL579Y EL 281 POWER DOOR LOCK CONSULT II Inspection Procedure a Data link connector Steering column et 7 SES 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to NHEL0238 NHEL0238S01 the data link connector 122 3 Turn ignition switch 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG 5 Touch SMART 6 Touch DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK REAR DEFOGGER KEY WARN ALM LIGHT WARN ALM SEAT BELT ALM INT LAMP 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST and WORK SUPPORT are available EL 282 POWER DOOR CONSULT II Application Items DOOR LOCK Data Monitor Monitored Item KEY ON SW LOCK SW DR AS DOOR SW RR UNLK SW DR AS KEY CYL LK SW KEY CYL UN SW LK BUT
206. OW RETAINED PWR Data Monitor Monitored Item IGN ON SW DOOR SW DR DOOR SW AS Active Test Test Item RETAINED PWR Work Support Work RETAINED PWR SET CONSULT II Application Items NHEL0236 NHEL0236S01 1 023650101 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch RH NHEL0236S0102 Description This test is able to supply RAP signal power from smart entrance control unit to power window system and power sunroof system Those systems can be operated when turning on RETAINED PWR on CONSULT II screen even if the ignition switch is tuned OFF NOTE During this test CONSULT II can be operated with ignition switch in OFF position RETAINED PWR should be turned OFF on CONSULT II screen when ignition switch is ON Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation CON SULT II might be stuck if RETAINED PWR is turned or OFF on CONSULT II screen when ignition switch is OFF 1 023650103 Description RAP signal s power supply period can be changed by mode setting Selects RAP signal s power supply period between two steps e MODE 1 45 sec MODE 2 OFF MODE 3 2 min Trouble Diagnoses NHEL0105 None of the power windows can be 1 10A fuse 40A fusible link 1 Check 10A fuse No 10 located in fuse blo
207. PER NHEL0058 EL WIPER 01 IGNITION SWITCH Gl ON OR START BLOCK REFER TO EL POWER 20A J B LG VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPER VOLUME COMBINATION AUTO INT FRONT BR STOP VR OUT INT ATER VR ST JOINT RS g CONNECTOR 7 8 BT maa Je ITI m 2 L REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 18 15 JUNCTION BOX J B 17 13 15 MEL310O EL 177 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER Removal and Installation e Molding end Removal and Installation WIPER ARMS 0060501 1 Prior to wiper arm installation turn switch to wiper motor and then turn it OFF Auto Stop 2 Liftthe blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to clearance L amp L immediately before tightening nut 3 Eject washer fluid Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it OFF 4 Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance L amp L5 Clearance L 48 64 mm 1 89 2 52 in Clearance L5 40 56 mm 1 57 2 20 e lighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque Front wiper 21 26 N m 2 1 2 7 kg m 16 19 ft Ib 0060 Before reinstalling wiper arm clean up the pivot area as illustrated T
208. PUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door lock unlock switch LOCK SW DR AS UNLK SW DR AS DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR LOCK SWDR AS OFF UNLKSWDR AS X OFF When lock unlock switch is turned to LOCK LOCK SW DR AS ON When lock unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK UNLK SW DR AS ON SEL341W Without CONSULT II Remove key from ignition switch 1 Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK 3 Voltage 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL396Y Refer to wiring diagram in El 279 OK or NG p Door lock unlock switch is OK Check the following e Ground circuit for each front power window switch e Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart entrance control unit connector If above systems are normal replace the front power window switch EL 288 DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK NHEL0193S06 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL LOCK UNLOCK SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check front door key cylinder switch KEY CYL LK SW KEY CYL UN SW in D
209. RNATOR WE APPLIED SWITCH HA ede 4 1 28 90 THE FOLLOWING s SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ Ve IDX E1 E18 T1313 C51 T2 3123042 GY GY 4123 1 1121314 GY MEL3010 EL 155 WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram WARN Cont d EL WARN 07 gt TO EL WARN 01 OR METER 452 134 EL WARN 01 lt 6 BR W PU Y G R OFF LAMP VDC TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 718 9 101 12314 5 6 MEL302O SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA DC 1 SB DRIVER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN gt LG PASSENGER DOOR SWITCHIOFF CLOSED ON OPEN REAR DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN x STEP LAMP ANY DOOR SWITCH ON OPEN OFF CLOSED OV 12V SEL976XA EL 156 WARNING LAMPS Electrical Components Inspection oisconect Electrical Components Inspection WD 1 0051 FUEL WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK NHEL0051S01 Fuel level sensor unit and 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness 8 nector B19 3 Connect a resistor 800 between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector terminals 2 and 5 4 Turn ignition switch The fue
210. ROM provided by other turers cannot be used NHEL0296S0204 The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle steering angle The oscillator gyro periodically senses oscillatory variation at the oscillation terminals This variation is caused by changes in the vehicle angular velocity Voltage variations are by ceramic voltage sensors at the left and right sides of the terminals Vehicle angular velocity corresponds directly with these changes in voltage The is built into the navigation NAVI control unit BIRDVIEW The BIRDVIEW provides a detailed and easily seen display of road conditions covering the vehicle s immediate to distant area 1 029650205 393 EM LG 02 25 NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description Conta Open Distant gt front area front area Horizontal line Grid line intervals T Horizontal line 3 E EI SS RE ANE UD VE AS 4 TM T X Wq Distant Driver s front area Immediate front area Immediate Distant front front area Description 1 029650206 Display area Trapezoidal representation showing approximate distances Wn D and Wd Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six verti cal grid lines indicate display
211. ROUND CIRCUIT CHECK A Power Supply Circuit Check nod Ignition switch position o Battery Battery Battery 62 voltage voltage voltage voltage If NG check the following e 10 fuse No 12 located in fuse block J B e 10 fuse No 30 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between fuse and combination Combination meter connector M34 meter Ground Circuit Check DISCONNECT NHEL0046S0702 H S Terminals Continuity Combination meter connector 59 Ground Yes EL 132 METERS GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses INSPECTION VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL With VDC NHEL0046S03 NHEL0046S0301 i CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT 1 Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission 2 Check voltage between combination meter terminal 15 and ECM terminal 58 while quickly turning speed sensor pinion CONNECT CONNECT Vehicle speed sensor H S H S Combination meter connector 33 l lli Voltage Approx 0 5V Vehicle speed NOTE sensor pinion Vehicle speed sensor connector should remain connected SEL181W OK or NG Vehicle speed sensor is OK NG gt GO TO 2 200 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor terminals 1 and 2 Vehicle speed sensor Yn connector 54 42112 DISCONNECT OK or NG Check harness or connector between speedometer vehicle speed se
212. RROR HISTORY MODE Description NHELO0300S0101 In this mode error history of the system are displayed with the fol lowing data e How many times the error was detected e The last time data when the error was detected e The last place where the error was detected NOTE e number of errors be counted up to 50 times More than 51 times will be indicated as 50 times e Malfunction of the GPS board inside the NAVI control unit will result in the display of incorrect time data e When an error occurs an incorrect position marker appears on the display The accuracy of the display data position marker will be affected NHEL0300 NHEL0300S01 How to Perform Self Diagnosis 1 Start the engine dicii ud 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display 3 Push both MAP and D N switch at the same time for more than 5 seconds 4 Select Confirmation adjustment 1 030050102 Confirmalion adjustment 5 Select Navigation Confirmation Adjustment Select one of the following Diagnose the Display Diagnosis for Signals from the Car nitialize Loc 6 Select Error history 72 Navigation x Select one of the following EL 408 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Cont d 7 If trouble items are displayed with time count repair repl Hislory of Errors the system according to ERROR HISTORY TABLE x Displaying time and place of th
213. S Diagnoses Case 3 Check TCM circuit Refer to CIRCUIT CHECK EL 452 NHEL0326S0303 diagnosis diagnosis M VDC TCS ABS ENGINE UNKWN UNKWN UNKWN u PKIA8327E 7777 Malfunctioning part CAN H contro unit PKIA8337E Case 4 Check CAN communication circuit Refer to CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK EL 452 NHEL0326S0304 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit Receive diagnosis diagnosis diagnosis No 8328 CIRCUIT CHECK NHELO326S05 1 ignition switch Check following terminals and connector for damage bend and loose connection control module side and harness side ECM Harness connector F53 Harness connector M223 Harness connector M15 Harness connector E81 OK or NG EL 450 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses 2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect ECM connector 2 Check resistance between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 L and 113 R ECM connector ECM Approx 108 132 0 109 113 p p harness between ABS TCS control unit ABS TCS CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK 1 CONNECTOR 1 Turn ignition switch OFF SEL437Y
214. STEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d Possible cause Symptom Repair order LH low beam does not operate but LH high beam operates Headlamp relay LH Check headlamp relay LH Open in the LH low beam circuit 2 Check harness between headlamp relay LH terminal LH low beam ground circuit 7 and LH headlamp for open circuit bulb Check harness between headlamp and ground HID control unit Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new one If headlamps illuminate correctly replace the bulb Replace the control unit with other side control unit or new one If headlamps illuminate correctly EM replace the control unit RH high beam does not operate Bulb Check bulb but RH low beam operates 15A fuse Check 15A fuse No 69 located in fuse and fusible LG Headlamp RH relay link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at Headlamp RH relay circuit terminal 3 of headlamp RH relay Open in the RH high beams Check headlamp RH relay EG circuit Check harness between headlamp RH relay and Lighting switch daytime light control unit Lighting switch circuit Check harness between RH headlamp and lighting Daytime light control unit switch Check lighting switch Check the following AT Harness between daytime control unit and lighting switch Harness between lighting switch and ground Check daytime light control u
215. T Work Support Test Item REMO CONT ID CONFIR REMO CONT ID REGIST REMO CONT ID ERASUR MULTI ANSWER BACK SET CONSULT II Application Items NHEL0242 NHEL0242S01 NHEL0242S0101 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch in ON position Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch in ACC position Indicates ON OFF condition of rear door switch Indicates ON OFF condition of key switch Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH Indicates ON OFF condition of door switch RH Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from lock unlock switch LH and RH Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from lock unlock switch LH and RH Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from keyfob Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from keyfob Indicates ON OFF condition of trunk open signal from keyfob Indicates ON OFF condition of panic signal from keyfob Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock switch form keyfob Indicates ON OFF condition of lock unlock signal at the same time from keyfob NHEL0242S0102 Description This test is able to check interior lamp and ignition key hole illumination operation The interior lamp and ignition key hole illumination are turned on when ON on CONSULT II screen is touched This test is able to check hazard reminder operation The hazard lamp turns on when on CONSU
216. T y 02 Terminals Continuity NAVI control unit 3 Ground Yes NHEL0303S0402 Lie e 4 Ground Yes EL 430 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses VOICE GUIDE OPERATION CHECK 1 PRELIMINARY CHECK 1 Turn ignition switch to ACC position 2 Insert the music CD into the radio and CD player 3 Try to play the music CD Is the sound emitted from all speakers NG p Repair or replace audio system Refer to AUDIO in EL section of Service Manual Yes or No ERN CHECK NAVI OPERATION ON SIGNAL 1 Disconnect audio unit connector 2 Push VOICE button 3 check voltage between terminal 28 and ground AUDIO unit connector M68 y Voltage V Condition of VOICE button Push e Approx More than 0 10 Condition of VOICE button Do not push 0 SEL645X OK or NG NG p or replace harness or NAVI control unit 3 CHECK VOICE SIGNAL 1 Push VOICE button 2 Check voltage between NAVI control unit terminal 42 or 43 and ground Condition of VOICE button Push Approx 5 Condition of VOICE button Do not push 0 NAVI control unit connector p Voltage V L SEL646X OK or NG NG Repairor replace NAVI control unit EL 431 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 4 CHECK VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and AUDIO unit connector
217. T UP 1 CHECK FUSE Check 10A fuse No 12 located in the fuse block J B Is 10A fuse OK 2 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP Install 10A fuse Perform initialization with CONSULT II For initialization refer to CONSULT II Operation Manual IVIS NVIS Turn ignition switch OFF Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF Check the security indicator lamp lighting ecurity indicator lamp should be blinking NG p OK or NG CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect security indicator lamp connector 2 Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector terminal 1 and ground Security indicator lamp connector TS DISCONNECT Battery voltage should exist eo SEL653WA OK or NG NG Check harness for open or short between fuse and security indicator lamp 4 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR Check security Indicator Lamp Is security indicator lamp OK Replace security indicator lamp EL 386 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses 5 CHECK IMMU FUNCTION 1 Connect IMMU connector 2 Disconnect security indicator lamp connector 3 Check continuity between IMMU terminal 5 and ground IMMU connector M42 should exist intermittently E SEL300W Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and IMMU
218. TION e Odo trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode Meters gauges can checked in diagnosis mode HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE WA NHEL0151S02 1 Turn ignition switch to ON and change meter to 1 0151 2 Turn ignition switch to OFF Turn ignition switch to ON when pushing meter switch 4 Release odo trip meter switch 1 second after ignition switch 1 e turned ON 5 Push odo trip meter switch more than three times within 5 seconds EG 6 All odo trip meter segments should be turned If some segments are not turned meter control unit with SU odo trip meter should be replaced At this point the unified control meter is turned to diagnosis mode BR ST RS 7 Push meter switch Indication of each meter gauge should be as shown left during pushing odo trip meter switch if it is no malfunctioning BT NOTE It takes about a few seconds for indication of fuel gauge and water temperature gauge to become stable SG EL 129 METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses PRELIMINARY CHECK NHEL0046 0046504 CHECK IN Do meter warning lamps operate Can Diagnosis mode be activated Refer to Meter Gauge Opera tion and Odo Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode 1 Yes Check power
219. TO Gl 23 Headlamp switch ON position AUTO position 12V OV 25 BR Ignition key switch Insert Key inserted Key removed IGN key cylinder 12V 0V 26 1 Ignition switch ACC position 12V 27 G niton switch ON Ignition switch is in ON position 12V 28 Unfastened Fastened Ignition key is in posi OV 12V tion LG 30 Ignition keyhole illumination When doors are unlocked using keyfob OFF 12V gt Unlock 31 When doors are locked using keyfob Unlock lock OV 12V EC with lamp switch in DOOR position 32 Front step lamp Any door switch ON Open OFF Closed OV 12V Door lock amp unlock switches Neutral Lock Unlock 33 E Communication interface 366 AT Front door key cylinder switch LH Neutral Lock Unlock 37 Rear window defogger relay OFF ON Ignition key is ON position 12V 0V 38 Security indicator Goes off Illuminates 12V OV 40 BR Heated steering relay OFF ON Ignition key is in ON position 12 gt 0V SU 42 Vehicle Security horn Mist panic alarm is operated using keyfob ON 12V gt sem ____ ____ 46 ENG window relay Retained power operation is operated ON OFF 12V OV GT 47 LH turn signal lamp NOS or unlock is operated using keyfob 12V gt RS 48 GY R RH turn sign
220. TON SIG UN BUTTON SIG IGN ON SW DOOR SW DR DOOR SW AS Active Test Test Item ALL D LK MTR DR D UN MTR NON DR D UN Work Support Work ltem DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SET ANTI LOCK OUT SET CONSULT II Application Items NHEL0239 NHEL0239S01 NHEL0239S0101 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of key switch Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from lock unlock switch LH and RH Indicates ON OFF condition of door switch Rear Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from lock unlock switch LH and RH Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from key cylinder Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from key cylinder Indicates ON OFF condition of lock signal from remote controller Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from remote controller Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch RH NHEL0239S0102 Description This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation These actuators lock when CONSULT II screen is touched This test is able to check front door lock actuator LH unlock operation The actuator unlocks when on CONSULT II screen is touched This test is able to check door lock actuators except front door lock actuator LH unlock operation These actuators unlock when on CONSULT II screen is touched 1 023950103
221. TS G d CAN COMM CIRCUIT p n 2 the data of CAN DIAG SUPPORT for ENGINE ABS and A T displayed on CONSULT Example SELECT DIAG MODE CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR WORK SUPPORT SELF DIAG RESULTS INITIAL DIAG TRANSMIT DIAG DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR SPEC CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ACTIVE TEST Rx 3 Attach the printed sheet of SELF DIAG RESULTS and DIAG SUPPORT onto the check sheet Refer to CHECK SHEET EL 448 4 Based the DIAG SUPPORT results put v marks onto the items with UNKWN in the check sheet table Refer to CHECK SHEET El 248 RS If NG is displayed on INITIAL DIAG Initial diagnosis as CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for diagnosed control unit replace the control unit 5 According to the check sheet results example start inspection Refer to CHECK SHEET RESULTS gr EXAMPLE Eaa EL 447 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d CHECK SHEET NHEL0326S02 NOTE If NG is displayed on INITIAL DIAG Initial diagnosis as DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for the diagnosed control unit replace the control unit Check sheet table CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit diagnosis i i diagnosis ECM VDC TCS ABS ENGINE UNKWN U
222. TY indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds Unlock hood with hood opener within 30 seconds after door is locked SECURITY indicator lamp should turn off OK or NG Hood switch is OK and go to trunk room lamp switch check CHECK SWITCH FITTING CONDITION Adjust installation of hood switch or hood EE CHECK HOOD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check hood switch HOOD SWITCH in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR HOOD SWITCH When hood is open HOOD SWITCH ON When hood is closed HOOD SWITCH OFF SEL354W Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 6 Y R and ground Smart entrance control unit connector Voltage V Engine hood is open 0 Engine hood is closed Approx 12 SELO35YA Refer to wiring diagram in EL 332 Hood switch is OK and go to trunk room lamp switch check NG gt GOTO 4 EL 345 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses 4 CHECK HOOD SWITCH 1 Disconnect hood switch connector 2 Check continuity between hood switch terminals 1 and 2 Hood switch connector DISCONNECT LES Continuity Condition Pushed No Condition Released al Yes SEL240W OK or NG Check the following e Hood switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and hood switch Rep
223. U BR ST RS SG IDX 5 lt gt MOPUIM 19910 LS WO3 Lo REAR DOOR SWITCH o REAR DOOR SWITCH LH S o FRONT DOOR SWITCH RH o FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH S 5 HOLIMS HOLIMS NOI1VNIBN02 9 L 5222098602 2 19911 1031409 39NV3LN3 LYYNS 6 9 za ant 8503 18 r9 9 lt LC v S LYVLS 40 NO HOLIMS HOLIMS 5779 6 NO 10 DOV HOLIMS 2640 EL 55 HEADLAMP FOR CANADA DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram DTRL Wiring Diagram DTRL NHELO0264 IGNITION SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH ON START ACC OR ON WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE J B REFER TO EL POWER 21 PU R B G PU 171 Ps BAT FUSE SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 414 1140 CD DOOR SW AS T L T L DOOR SW SW1 RR DOOR SW DR GND1 GND2 COMBINATION SWITCH LIGHTING SWITCH OPEN CLOSED FRONT DOOR OPEN SWITCH RH JOINT CONNECTOR 7 rL REFER TO THE FOLLOWING M15 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B
224. VE TEST are available EL 186 REAR DEFOGGER Data Monitor Monitored Item IGN ON SW REAR DEF SW Active Test Test Item DEFOGGER REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONSULT II Application Items CONSULT II Application Items NHELO0219 1 0219501 1 021950101 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of rear window defogger switch NHEL0219S0102 Description This test is able to check rear window defogger operation Rear window defogger activates when CONSULT II screen is touched EL 187 SU 55 25 RS REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A SYMPTOM Rear window defogger does not activate or does not go off after activating 1 CHECK WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Select TEST in REAR DEFOGGER with CONSULT II REAR DEFOGGER OFF Rear window defogger and rear window defogger switch indicator should operate when the button on the CONSULT II screen is touched SEL353W Without CONSULT II 1 Turn ignition switch to ON position 2 Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 37 G R and ground Smart entrance control unit Connector Voltage V Rear window defogger switch is OFF
225. ach new keyfob Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed When more than four ID codes are entered the oldest ID code will be erased Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input the same ID code can be entered The code is counted as an additional code EL 322 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Keyfob Battery Replacement Keyfob Battery Replacement NHELO0118 NOTE Be careful not to touch the circuit board or battery terminal The keyfob is water resistant However if it does get wet immediately wipe it dry Battery Negative side 7 Battery negative side facing upward Insert the new battery Close the lid securely Push the keyfob button two or three times to check its operation EL 323 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location 1 0119 Smart entrance control unit E Trunk room lamp switch Vehicle security horn relay Horn relay Theft S A C 1 7 J 1 SAS S Rear door switch Front door key cylinder switch Front door switch Security indicator lamp horn relay 2 E63 MEC Vehicle security e Smart entrance l f control unit s door key cylinder switch Driver side view with lower instrument panel removed SEL552Y EL 324 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM System Description System Description
226. actually driving the vehicle Stop the vehicle Perform Speed Calibration EL 417 If the position marker does not move to the correct posi tion even after the vehicle has been driven approxi mately 10 km 6 miles per form Adjust Current Loca tion MODE Perform Adjust Current Location MODE within a precision standard of 1 mm 0 04 in on the dis play NOTE During calibration use the most detailed map possible Perform Adjust Current Location MODE refer to NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal Possible cause Vehicle running Indication Y intersection Spiral road Straight road Road shapes Winding road Grid like road shape ___ _ doo 4 Parallel roads Drive condition Service procedure In Y intersections with a very gradual change in course a directional sens ing may be inaccurate This may result in the position marker giving the wrong road indication On loop bridges and similar struc tures which result in a large and continuous turn turning angle may be sensed inaccurately As a result the position marker may separate from the route on the map In long distance driving on a straight road or road with very gradual curves map marking inaccuracies may occur In such cases the posi tion marker may stray from the route being traveled during subsequent turns due to inaccurate distance cal culation Directi
227. al 15 for the speedometer e to terminal 1 of the vehicle speed sensor with VDC e to terminal 22 of ABS TCS control unit with TCS The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed NHEL0042S08 NHEL0042S02 NHEL0042S03 NHEL0042S04 EL 125 MA LG METERS GAUGES Combination Meter Combination Meter NHEL0043S01 VDC org 9 G 9 USA SERVICE ABS 0 dtel 100km km h FOR CANADA 5657158159160161162163 64165166167168 45146 47148 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Brown T2Ji3JiaJi5 te i7 ralt 1112181415 6 8 7 8 91011 _ lt gt White Brown Brown Brown CRUISE SET Brown Brown 0 For USA Bulb socket color Bulb wattage Brown 1 4 W 15 With 5 Warning bulb socket color With VDC MEL2410 EL 126 000 O O O 31 o 62 o 66 o 53 o 29 o 25 o 26 o 20 o 21 58 o METERS AND GAUGES Schematic A T INDICATOR NTER FACE 0 2 2 Nj q FACE T a TACHOMETER UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT WATER TEMP With odo trip GAUGE ES meter __ I TL ________ FUEL GAUGE TT METER AND ODO TRIP METER ILLUMINATION
228. al Throttle Control Motor Front Automatic Speed Control Device uum ASC SW Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Automatic Speed Control Device 22202 SU FLS2 Fuel Level Sensor ASCBOF EC Automatic Speed Control Device FLS3 7 aR ASCD Brake Switch Off gnal 5 ASCIND EC Automatic Speed Control Device ic FUEL Pump Cantal 5 Indicator FTS A T Fluid Temperature Sensor ST AT IND A T Indicator FTTS Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor AUDIO Audio Fuel Injection System Function RS FUELB1 EC Bank 1 AUT DP Automatic Drive Positioner Lamp FUELB2 EC Fuel Injection System Function BT Bank 2 A T Fluid Temperature Sensor B COMP Board Computer PORN mor BRK SW Brake Switch BYPS V Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve Heated Steering CAN CAN Communication Line EN SAN COMMUNICAR IATS Intake Air Temperature Sensor D IGNSYS Ignition Signal DA nang ILL Illumination CHIME Warning Chime INJECT TE PGAR Interior Step Spot Mirror INT L EL CLOCK Clock and Trunk Room Lamps COMPAS Compass Intake Valve Timing Control Sole noid Valve Bank 1 EL 501 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES CELL CODES Code Wiring Diagram Name Code Wiring Diagram Name Intake Valve Timing Control Sole PNP SW Park Neutral Position Switch IVCB2 EC noid Valve Bank 2 POS EC Crankshaft Positi
229. al lamp SE or unlock is operated using keyfob 12V gt 50 ES Battery saver Interior lamp 2 12V OV HA 51 WR source PTC 12V 54 Door actuators Door lock amp unlock switch Free Lock OV gt 12V SG 55 Driver actuator Door lock amp unlock switch Free Unlock 12V 56 Passenger and rear doors amp unlock switch Free Unlock gt 12V lock actuator EL 365 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table Cont d Terminal vollage N Connections Operated condition Approximate val 0 color ues More than 5 minutes after ignition switch is 12V l turned to OFF Ignition switch ON or START position with lighting OFF position switch 1ST or Within 5 minutes 57 Y B lamp relay 2ND after ignition oV switch is turned to OFF position ON or START position OV Headlamps illuminate by auto light control Operate Less than 1V Not operate 12V 58 SB Tail lamp switch Lighting switch OFF or AUTO 1ST or 2ND 12 OV 59 Headlamp RH relay More than 5 minutes after ignition switch is 12V turned to OFF Ignition switch ON or position OFF position Within 5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF position ON or START position OV Headlamps illuminate by auto light control Less than 1V Operate
230. ally a temporary malfunction Perform self diagnosis to confirm whether the NAVI control unit is mal functioning or not If no failure is detected a momentary and or tempo rary malfunction may have been caused by strong electromagnetic wave interfer ence Perform self diagnosis to confirm GPS antenna connection If no failure is detected a momentary and or tempo rary malfunction may have been caused by a strong impact 1 Check power supply circuits for NAVI 430 2 Perform self diagnosis to confirm 405 3 If above diagnosis results are OK momentary and or temporary malfunc tion may have been caused by a strong impact Perform self diagnosis to confirm whether the NAVI control unit is mal functioning or not If no failure is detected a momentary and or tempo rary malfunction may have been caused by strong electromagnetic wave interfer ence NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Cont d Refer Detected items Description Diagnosis service procedure ence page Check that whether the disc can be Gl I inserted and ejected correctly If the Loading mechanism malfunction loading function does not correctly replace NAVI control unit is confirmed that the appropriate CD ROM reading error disc is positioned in the CD ROM perform self diagnosis to confirm EM whether the inserted disc is malfunction Ma
231. among eight modes e 1 45 lt 2 OFF MODE 3 30 4 60 sec 5 90 sec MODE 6 120 sec MODE 7 150 sec MODE 8 180 sec SG Trouble Diagnoses e The xenon headlamp has a high tension current generating area Be extremely careful when remov ing and installing Be certain to disconnect the battery negative cable prior to removing or install DX ing When the xenon headlamp is lit do not touch the harness covered with red or amber insulation bulb itself or the bulb socket with your bare hands Never service a xenon headlamp with wet hands When checking body side harness with a circuit tester be certain to disconnect the harness con nector from the xenon headlamp When the xenon headlamp is lit the xenon bulb must be installed in the headlamp housing Never turn on xenon headlamp if the bulb is out of the headlamp housing ILL DELAY SET EL 47 HEADLAMP FOR USA Trouble Diagnoses CAUTION Make sure to install the bulb securely if the xenon bulb is improperly installed in its socket high ten sion current leaks occur This may lead to a melted bulb and or bulb socket Possible cause Symptom Repair order Neither headlamp operates LH headlamp low and high beam does not operate but RH head lamp low and high beam does operate RH headlamp low and high beam does not operate but LH headlamp low and high beam
232. and street aT e When position is searched using Point of Interest POI the displayed position may differ from the actual position e Some data may not be available for new buildings and other structures in a map GPS ANTENNA NHEL0304S07 e Do not place metal objects above the GPS antenna mounted on the rear parcel shelf This will cause interference with signal reception e Do not place mobile telephones or vehicle radio transceivers in close proximity to the GPS antenna mounted on the rear parcel shelf This may cause interference with signal reception EL 441 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Program Loading Program Loading Power supply ON Insert CD ROM with designated program NHEL0305 Push for changing version Display of program content Program loading progress is shown on the bar graph at the center of the screen Map CD ROM i ti Position marker screen display Note Load the program only after the engine has been started SEL564X EL 442 CAN COMMUNICATION System Description System Description NHEL0322 CAN Controller Area Network is a serial communication line for real time application It is an on vehicle mul tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle and each control unit shares information and links with ar other control units during operation not i
233. ap matching permits the driver to make priority judgments about e Actual vehicle traced route possible appropriate roads other than the one currently being trav O Vehicle route indicated on map display eled BT Road If there is an error in the distance or direction of travel there will also be an error in the relative position of other routes When two routes are closely parallel to one another the indicated position for both routes will be nearly the same priority This is so that slight changes in the steering direction may cause the marker to indicate both routes alternately SG Newly constructed roads not appear on the CD ROM map In o Vehicle route indicated on map display this case map matching is not possible Changes in the course of Road data road will also prevent accurate map matching IDX 2 When driving road shown the CD ROM map the a tion marker used for matching may indicate different route Even after returning to a route shown on the map the position marker may jump to the position currently detected on CD ROM map EL 391 NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description GPS Global Positioning System GPS is the global positioning system developed and operated by the US Department of Defense GPS satellites NAVSTAR trans mit radio waves and orbit around the earth at an altitude of approxi mately 21
234. arking lamp Front side marker lamp Rear combination lamp Rear side marker lamp License lamp High mounted stop lamp Item Interior room lamp Spot lamp Vanity mirror lamp Trunk room lamp Step lamp Turn signal Stop Tail Back up Without rear air spoiler With rear air spoiler Interior Lamp EL 500 21 H3 21 5 3 8 21 21 5 3 8 21 NHEL0144S02 Wattage W 10 8 8 3 4 2 7 0145 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES CELL CODES Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for Code wiring Diagram Name Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical COOL F Cooling Fan Control index to find the location page number of each wiring diagram CORNER Cornering Lamp Wiring Diagram DEF 1STSIG A T 1ST Signal D LOCK Power Door Lock 2NDSIG 2ND Signal DTRL i System EM 3RDSIG A T 3RD Signal Engine Coolant Temperature 5 4THSIG A T 4TH Signal Sensor LG A C A HA Auto Air Conditioner Electronic Controlled Engine i EMNT EC Mount Accelerator Pedal Position Sen 51 sor Sensor 1 ENGSS Engine Speed Signal EG iti Electrical Throttle Control Func APPS2 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sen sor Sensor 2 tion iti 2 Electrical Throttle Control Motor APPS3 Position Sen ETC2 E EG Throttle Motor i i ectric
235. ation frequency that is greater or less than the set value GPS TCXO over GPS TCXO under GPS ROM malfunction Internal malfunction of GPS board RAM or ROM inside the NAVI unit GPS RAM malfunction Inside the control unit Malfunction of GPS board clock IC GPS malfunction inside the NAVI control unit GPS antenna disconnected Power supply voltage for GPS board Low voltage of GPS inside the NAVI control unit is low CD ROM driver malfunction inside the NAVI control unit CD ROM communication error EL 410 NHEL0300S02 Refer ence page Diagnosis service procedure Perform self diagnosis to confirm whether the NAVI control unit is mal functioning or not If no failure is detected a momentary and or tempo rary malfunction may have been caused by strong electromagnetic wave interfer ence Check vehicle speed sensor signal in Diagnosis for signals from the car mode If the input signal is not detected correctly check harness for open or short between combination meter and NAVI control unit Perform self diagnosis to confirm whether the NAVI control unit is mal functioning or not If no failure is detected a momentary and or tempo rary malfunction may have been caused by strong electromagnetic wave interfer ence A location error occurs Strong electro magnetic wave interference may have occurred The GPS antenna may be ina very hot or very cold environment This is uSu
236. ay Push both MAP and D N switches at the same time for more than 5 seconds 4 Select Confirmation adjustment NHEL0300S0302 Confirmation adjustment 5 Select Diagnosis for Signals from the Car Confirmation Adjustment Select one of the following Diagnose the Display Diagnosis for Signals from the Car Navigation Initialize Location 6 Then Diagnosis for Signals from the Car mode is performed EL 412 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta CHECK THE MAP CD ROM VERSION MODE Diagnosis How to Select of the following 1 Start the engine 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display 01 3 Push both MAP and switches at the same time for more than 5 seconds 4 Select Confirmation adjustment NHEL0300S04 NHEL0300S0401 Gonfirmation adjustment 5 Select Navigation 16 Confirmation Adjustment a select one of the following Diagnose the Display EG Diagnosis for Signals from the Car 6 Select Check map CD ROM version T Navigation x Select one of the following 7 version parts number of CD ROM loaded to the NAVI control unit will be displayed EL 413 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta DIAGNOSE THE DISPLAY MODE Description NHEL0
237. ay or may not operate vehicle security system horn and headlamps as required When the remote keyless entry system panic alarm is triggered ground is supplied intermittently NHELO0196S07 from smart entrance control unit terminal 42 to vehicle security horn relay 2 terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 and from smart entrance control unit terminal 59 to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal from keyfob EL 328 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM System Description Cont d NOTE LG SU RS 329 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Schematic Schematic 1 0121 FUSE BATTERY BW 49 To infiniti vehicle FUSE immobilizer system 38 IGNITION SWITCH 2 N 2 SWITCH VEHICLE SECURITY HORN 1 O 23 5 e VEHICLE SECURITY HORN O LJ O 2 lt mx FUSE RARE 5 HEADLAMP E RH z lt gt 72 headlamp 5 5 lt system eo 28 1 FUSE LH RELAY UE DEAN To headlamp 224 9 daytime light lt system 1 4 7
238. bination meter terminal 31 With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 30 located in the fuse block J B e to combination meter terminal 66 Ground is supplied e to combination meter terminal 59 e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature reading on the gauge is received engine coolant temperature signal from ECM ECM is detected by water temperature sensor The water temperature gauge is received by a signal e from ECM terminal 18 e 10 combination meter terminal 18 The needle on the gauge moves from C to H TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm The tachometer is regulated by a signal e from terminal 34 of the e to combination meter terminal 16 for the tachometer FUEL GAUGE The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied e 10 combination meter terminal 17 for the fuel gauge e from terminal 2 of the fuel level sensor unit e through terminal 5 of the fuel level sensor unit and e through body ground B7 and B12 without rear sunshade or B46 with rear sunshade SPEEDOMETER The combination meter provides a voltage signal to the vehicle speed sensor for the speedometer The voltage is supplied e from combination meter termin
239. blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position Therefore IVIS NATS warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti theft system Le e When IVIS NATS detects trouble the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the ON position e IVIS NATS trouble diagnoses system initialization and additional registration of other IVIS NATS igni tion key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT II hardware and CONSULT II IVIS NATS software Regarding the procedures of IVIS NATS initialization and IVIS NATS ignition key ID registration refer to CONSULT II operation manual IVIS NVIS e When servicing a malfunction of IVIS indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp registering another IVIS ignition key ID no it is necessary to re register original key identification Therefore be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner System Composition The immobilizer function of the IVIS NATS consists of the following 5 NATS ignition key e VIS NATS immobilizer control unit IMMU located in the ignition key cylinder e Engine control module e Security indicator Security ind IVIS NATS ignition key TET 2 0 SELO85WC EL 371 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Wiring Diagram NATS Wiring Diagram NATS IGNITION SWITCH EL NATS
240. calibration are not pos sible The position marker may indi cate inaccurate position in close proximity to the actual position Subsequently when the vehicle is driven on a road which is available as map data the position marker may still indicate an inaccurate posi tion Service procedure If the position marker does not move to the correct posi tion even after the vehicle has been driven approxi mately 10 km 6 miles per form Adjust Current Loca tion MODE EL 424 If necessary perform Speed Calibration vehicle is driven road whose course has been altered usually to improve the road or to oe When the map data shown on the eliminate some hazard Vehicle Use of tire chains Stormy weather display and the actual conditions are different Map matching will not be possible The position marker may indicate inaccurate position in close proximity to the actual position If the vehicle is driven on the indicated road further errors may occur Tire chains will affect distance sens ing The position marker may indi cate inaccurate position EL 435 If the position marker does not move to the correct posi tion even after the vehicle has been driven approxi mately 10 km 6 miles per form Speed Calibration After removing the tire chains sensing accuracy may recover by itself MA LG RS NAVIGATION
241. cates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH DOOR SW AS Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch RH LOCK SW DR AS Indicates ON OFF condition of front door lock switch UNLK SW DR AS Indicates ON OFF condition of front door lock switch KEY CYL LK SW Indicates ON OFF condition of front door key cylinder switch EL 109 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS CONSULT II Application Items Cont d Monitored Item KEY CYL UN SW LK BUTTON SIG UN BUTTON SIG Active Test Test Item BATTERY SAVER Work Support Work ROOM LAMP BAT SAV SET Description Indicates ON OFF condition of front door key cylinder switch Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from remote controller Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from remote controller 1 021450202 Description This test enables to check interior lamp front step lamps spot lamp vanity mirror illuminations and trunk room lamp operations When touch on CONSULT II screen e Interior lamp turns on when the switch is in ON Smart entrance control unit supplies power to interior lamp e Front step lamps turn on when any doors are open Smart entrance control unit supplies power to front step lamps e Spot lamp vanity mirror illuminations trunk room lamp turn on when the switch is in ON Smart entrance control unit supplies power to Spot lamp vanity mirror illuminations trunk room lamp 1
242. ce control unit controls retained power operation OPERATION The sunroof can be opened or closed and tilted up or down with the sunroof switch RETAINED POWER OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position power is supplied for 45 sec onds e to sunroof motor terminal 6 e smart entrance control unit terminal 46 When power is supplied the electrical sunroof can be operated The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT II EL 210 INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION The CPU of sunroof motor monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position full closed or other for sunroof by the signals from encoder and limit switch in sunroof motor When sunroof motor detects interruption during the following close operation e automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position e automatic close operation during retained power operation sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate about 150 mm 5 91 in NHEL0222S01 NHEL0222S03 EL 207 MA LG SUNROOF Wiring Diagram SROOF Wiring Diagram SROOF EL SROOF 01 IGNITION SWITCH e ON OR START WITH REAR SUNSHADE NHELO089 FUSE REFER TO EL POWER WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE 10 J B 1
243. ce control unit terminal 49 e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64 Power is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 47 and 48 when the multi remote control system is triggered Refer to REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM EI 293 When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob with all doors closed power is supplied e through smart entrance control unit terminal 47 to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 and to combination meter terminal 25 and to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 and through smart entrance control unit terminal 48 to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 and to combination meter terminal 29 and e torear combination lamp RH terminal 5 Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each rear combination lamp through body grounds T6 and T8 Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 M power and ground supplied the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning amps 1 0030503 EL 82 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram TURN Wiring Diagram TURN 0032 EL TURN 01 IGNITION SWITCH l REFER TO 5 FUSE EL POWER 10 BLOCK B R B OR L L
244. ch in the ON position ground is supplied e to fog lamp relay terminal 2 e through the fog lamp switch lighting switch and body grounds E11 E22 and E53 The fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied e from fog lamp relay terminal 5 e toterminal 1 of each fog lamp Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each fog lamp through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 With power and ground supplied the fog lamps illuminate EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL DEA Fog lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned OFF ACC OFF from ON or START between terminals 21 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will be disturbed after 5 minutes then the headlamps will be turned off Then fog lamps are turned to off Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II EL 47 When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after fog lamps are turned off by the battery saver control ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11 and then e to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 e through smart entrance control unit terminal 60 from lighting switch terminal 12 Then the fog lamps illuminate again 0164501 EL 76 FRONT Wiring Diagram F FOG Wiring Diagram F FOG NHEL0028 EL F FOG 01 IGNITION SWITCH IGNIT
245. check If the power door lock system does not operate manually check power door lock system Refer to 2 Replace keyfob Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure NOTE If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT II is OK keyfob is not malfunctioning EL 305 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d Reference Symptom Diagnoses service procedure page EL Hazard and horn reminder does not activate prop 1 Keyfob battery and function check erly when pressing lock or unlock button of key fob 2 Hazard reminder check 3 Horn reminder Horn chirp can be activated or deactivated First check the horn chirp setting Refer to System Description 4 Door switch check 810 5 keyfob to ID Code Entry Procedure NOTE If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT II is OK keyfob is not malfunctioning Interior lamp and key hole illumination operation 1 Interior lamp operation check activate 2 Key hole illumination operation check 3 Door switch check Panic alarm horn and headlamp does not acti 1 Keyfob battery and function check vate when panic alarm button is continuously pressed 2 Theft warning operation check Refer to PRELIMINARY 840 CHECK in VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM 3 Key switch insert check 2 4 Replace keyfob Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure NOTE If the
246. ck E90 circuit breaker J B 40A fusible link letter 1 located in fuse and Power window relay fusible link box E90 circuit breaker circuit Power window relay circuit Ground circuit Front power window main switch operated using any switch Check E90 circuit breaker Check power window relay Check the following Check harness between E90 circuit breaker and 40A fusible link letter 1 located in fuse and fusible link box b Check harness between E90 circuit breaker and front power window main switch 5 Check the following a Check harness between E90 circuit breaker and power window relay b Check harness between fuse and power window relay 6 Check the following a Check ground circuit of front power window main switch terminal 5 b Check power window relay ground cirucit 7 Check front power window main switch BWP EL 272 POWER WINDOW Possible cause Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Repair order Driver side power window cannot be operated but other windows can be operated One or more power windows except driver s side window cannot be operated Power windows except driver s side window cannot be operated using power window main switch but can be operated by power window switch Driver side power window auto matic operation does not function properly Retained power operation does not operate properly Driver sid
247. closed Ancien switch 15 position to full closed ee Front power position window switch RH 16 Other positions Approx 0 SEL726W OK or NG NG Replace power window regulator motor front driver side or passenger side 5 CHECK ENCODER Measure voltage between front power window main switch terminal 14 or front power window switch RH terminal 19 and ground with oscilloscope when power window is in automatic closing operation Power window Front power window switch connector 010 switch RH connector 033 Approx 5 LO Approx SEL727W OK or NG Replace power window main switch or front power window switch RH NG Replace power window regulator motor front driver side or passenger side EL 275 DOOR LOCK Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHEL0106 Smart entrance Fuse block J B control unit M143 HBBBBBBDBOU0 RR 7 L b TIN DS d m ONSE Driver side view with lower instrument panel removed lock actuator Door lock unlock switc SEL053YA System Description NHEL0107 OPERATION NHEL0107S04 e The lock unlock switches LH and RH on door trim can lock and unlock all doors e With the door key inserted in the key cylinder on fr
248. connector 1 0247503 1 Turn the ignition switch OFF LS column 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to the data link connector 2122 62 ZA lt Ae 55202 3 Turn ignition switch 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG 5 Touch SMART 6 Perform each diagnostic item to DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION Refer to s EL 360 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONSULT II Cont d NOTE WA LG SU RS EL 361 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Schematic Schematic NHELO0125 CIRCUIT LIC BE BREAKER BATTERY gt lt D 51 49 Sm KEY SWITCH 5 HEADLAMP E LH RELAY TAIL LAMP RELAY g 19 Z FRONT STEP 9 LAMP LH W O lt LJ lt 30 OPENER ACTUATOR FUSE OPEN 63 16 TRUNK AND FUEL LID OPENER SWITCH FUSE SWITCH gt REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY 27 40 HEATED STEERING RELAY To power window relay IGNITION SWITCH sunroof motor 46 Y gt 26 45 43 DATA 64 CONNECTOR LL MEL358O EL 362 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Schematic Cont d SMART CONTROL UNIT
249. curity lamp connector 2 Check voltage between indicator lamp terminal 1 and ground Security indicator lamp connector TS DISCONNECT d Battery voltage should exist Y R SEL653WA OK or NG Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and smart entrance control unit Check the following e 10A fuse No 12 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse EL 350 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK NHEL0123S07 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL LOCK UNLOCK SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check front door key cylinder switch KEY CYL LK SW KEY CYL UN SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT 0 2 When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK KEY CYLLK SW ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK KEY CYL UN SW ON SEL342W Without CONSULT II 1 Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK 2 Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after key is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK V Neutral 15 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL397Y R
250. d line of IMMU circuit AT PROCEDURE 2 Open circuit in commu nication line between C4 ECM CHAIN OF ECM IMMU Short circuit between IMMU and ECM com SU e Security indicator 22120 4 lighting up munication line and bat e Engine hard to start tery voltage line 3R Short circuit between IMMU and ECM com munication line and ST ground line ECM IMMU RS B 0 0 Unregistered key D DIFFERENCE OF KEY b 2o 8 3 BT IMMU A Malfunction of key ID CHAIN OF IMMU KEY PROCEDURE 4 chip IMMU A System initialization has ID DISCORD IMM PROCEDURE 5 not yet been com F ECM pleted ECM F LOCK MODE F LOCK MODE D DX Engine trouble data and e MIL staying ON DON T ERASE e Security indicator BEFORE CHECKING EL FLOW IVIS NATS trouble lighting up ENG DIAG data have been detected in ECM When IVIS NATS detects trouble the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the ON position EL 377 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5 Trouble Diagnoses Cont d SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 Non self diagnosis related item NHEL0177S03 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM Reference page Malfunctioning part or mode Security ind A PROCEDURE 6 Open circuit between Fuse and IMMU Security ind does not light up Continuation of initialization mode IMMU DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
251. d e to daytime light control unit terminal 2 e through 10A fuse No 21 located in the fuse block J B HEADLAMP OPERATION Power Supply to Low Beam and High Beam When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position ground is supplied EL 52 74 y 27 NY O gt Headlamp LH relay E120 E120 Driver side view Pa lower instrument panel removed lt SEL050Y NHEL0262S01 NHEL0262S0101 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM System Description Cont d to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 through smart entrance control unit terminal 22 from lighting switch terminal 12 and to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 59 through smart entrance control unit terminal 60 from lighting switch terminal 12 Headlamp relays LH and RH are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps LH and RH Low Beam Operation When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and LOW positions ground is supplied e toterminal 4 of the headlamp LH e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Ground is also supplied e to terminal 4 of the headlamp RH e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 With power and ground supplied the low beam headlamps illuminate 1 026250103 High Operation Flash to pass Operation When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and HIGH or PASS positions ground is sup
252. ddress Street The information can be searched from the address Point of Interest POI The information of favorite areas can be searched The destination from the intersection name can be Intersection retrieved The previous ten destinations stored in memory are Previous Dest displayed City The information can be searched from city name Map The information can be searched from the map EL 396 NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description Cont d Display with Pushed ROUTE Switch NHEL0296S0402 Wil am TERDAH M ER 2 ce LITE VITE Es 27 w Where Route Info Miur Edit R 10 SEL526X The function of each icon is as follows Icon Quick Stop Where am I Route Info Detour Edit Route Route Calc Description The selected facility is set as the destination or way point Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destina tion has been reached Next current and previous street names can be dis played The following items can be set e Complete Route e Turn List e Route Simulation Displayed only when the destination area has been set Based on the selected distance an alternative route is searched Displayed only when the recommended route not its reverse is followed Change the destination or add the transit points of the route set in the route guide Displayed only when the automatic
253. depth and direction Drawing line area shows open space depth and immediate front area Each area is to a scale of approximately 5 6 25 Pushing the ZOOM IN button during operation displays the scale change and the view point height on the left side of the screen The height of the view point increases or decreases when ZOOM OR WIDE is selected with the joystick EL 394 NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description MAP DISPLAY NHEL0296S03 SN 277 at 4 4 r Wi 100m 4 RA D II 1 SEL525X Function of each icon is follows 1 Azimuth indication 2 The of the arrow shows the current position The shaft of the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is travel SU ing 3 GPS reception signal indicates current reception conditions 4 Distance display shows the distance in a reduced scale IDX EL 395 NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description Cont d FUNCTION OF PANEL SWITCH Display with Pushed DEST Switch NHEL0296S04 NHEL0296S0401 DEST SETTING i Address Book Previous Dest Address Street Intersection Point of Interest POI City SEL637X The function of each icon is as follows Icon Description Address Book Favorite areas can be saved to memory A
254. dow main switch p door key cylinder switch EL 290 DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK c CHECK DOOR LOCK With CONSULT II 1 Select TEST in DOOR LOCK with CONSULT II 2 Select ALL D LK MTR and touch 3 Then select DR D UN MTR and touch ON 4 Select DR D UN and touch ON ACTIVE TEST ALL D LK MTR or DR D UN MTR OFF NON DR D UN OFF Door lock motor should operate SEL343W NOTE If CONSULT II is not available skip this procedure and go to the next step OK or NG NG gt GO TO 2 EL 291 DOOR LOCK Trouble Diagnoses CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT e Door lock actuator front LH Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 54 GY 55 W B and ground Smart entrance control unit connector TUNI m switch condition 9 Unlock SELO14Y e Door lock actuator front RH and rear Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 54 GY 56 G Y and ground v CONNECT HS Terminal No Door lock unlock Voltage V switch condition i 54 G d 54 Ground rox 12 Unlock Smart entrance control unit connector SEL015Y Refer to wiring diagram in EL 28d gt GO TO 3
255. dow switch and smart entrance control unit connector If above systems are normal replace the front power window switch EL 312 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CHECK 220 CHECK TRUNK 110 OPENER Check trunk lid opener operation with trunk lid opener switch NOTE First check trunk lid opener cancel lever position Does trunk lid open Check trunk lid opener actuator and the circuit 2 CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR OPERATION With CONSULT II 1 Select ACTIVE TEST in MULTI REMOTE ENT with CONSULT II 2 Select TRUNK OUTPUT and touch ACTIVE TEST TRUNK OUTPUT OFF Trunk lid opener should operate SEL345W NOTE If CONSULT II is not available skip this procedure and go to the next step OK or NG Trunk lid opener actuator circuit is OK NG Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk opener actuator CHECK TRUNK LID OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT Without CONSULT II 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 63 L Smart entrance DISCONNECT control unit connector HS SELO26Y Refer to wiring diagram in 300 Does trunk lid open p smart entrance control unit Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk lid opener actuat
256. e LH connector Terminals Sliding device LH Seat control unit LH 2 Seatcontrol Sliding device LH Continuity unit LH A encoder 3 4 5 SEL605W 4 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground Seat control unit LH Terminals Continuity 17 Ground 18 Ground 28 Ground SEL606W OK or NG EL 234 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses Cont d DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Reclining encoder check 1 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 29 and ground with oscilloscope when power seat reclining is operated amp Seat control unit LH NHEL0277S06 HI Approx 5V LO Approx SEL607W Reclining encoder is OK gt 2 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground 24 Seat control unit LH HHH Battery voltage should exist SEL608W OK or NG gt p Replace seat control unit LH EL 235 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses 3 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and reclining device LH connector 2 Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and reclining LH connector Seat control unit LH Reclining device LH
257. e When outside temperature is less than 3 C 37 F continuously display will blink as a warning In this case the display will change to the OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE mode even though the display is showing a different item See NOTE e The indicated temperature is not affected by engine heat It changes only when one of the following con dition exists a When vehicle speed is more than 20 km h 12 MPH b The ignition key has been turned to OFF position for more than 3 5 hours c When outside temperature is lower than indicated temperature Range Cruising possible distance indication e The range indication provides driver with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refuel ing The range is conducted by fuel tank gauge unit fuel remaining ECM pulse signal fuel consump tion and vehicle speed signal e Indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds e When fuel remaining is less than approx 10 8 11 3 8 US qt 9 1 2 Imp qt indication will blink as a warning If the fuel remaining less than approx 10 5 11 1 8 US qt 9 1 4 Imp qt indication will show n this case the display will change to the RANGE mode automatically even though the display is showing a different item See NOTE Average fuel consumption e Average fuel consumption indication is conducted by ECM pulse signal and vehicle speed signal after system is reset e Indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds e After reset op
258. e based on the signal from slack detection switch power is supplied again to motor after 1 sec after no slack is detected NHEL0279 EL 255 MA LG SU 02 25 RS SUNSHADE Wiring Diagram SHADE Wiring Diagram SHADE 0280 EL SHADE 01 F IGNITION SWITCH ACC OR ON USE S 10A BLOCK REFERTO EL POWER C J B E SLACK DETECTION UP DOWN LIMIT SWITCH UP SWITCH OTHER OTHER REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3850 EL 256 REAR SUNSHADE Wiring Diagram SHADE EL SHADE 02 lt PRECEDING SE EM LG TO EL ILL Rw SU BIR ST TO EL ILL any RS 3 Ris et 4 z Dv s 111141 111 MEL386O EL 257 Trouble Diagnoses G Rear sunshade unit connector Rear sunshade unit connector 6 _ 0 AE Rear sunshade unit connector oI REAR SUNSHADE Trouble Diagnoses POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK eae Check voltage between rear sunshade unit terminal 5 and ground NHEL0281 Ignition switch position Terminals 5 Gro
259. e last problem CPS antene verbinding taut MA 8 If necessary touch error item to display the time when the error LG was detected and the place where the error was detected The last time GPS antenne fail i happened was 00 00 00 00 00 9 After repairing the system erase the diagnosis memory d History of Errors NOTE OK to delete the history of errors When the NAVI control unit must be replaced do not erase the diagnosis memory for further inspection of malfunctions 1 Start the engine 2 Push both and D N switches at the same time for more BR than 5 seconds 3 Select Confirmation adjustment 4 Select Navigation ST 5 Select Error history 6 Select Delete 7 Select Yes HA SG EL 409 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta ERROR HISTORY TABLE Detected items Description Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal Connection problem of speed sensor Input malfunction of NAVI control unit and speed sensor GPS disconnected Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and GPS board GPS transmission cable malfunc tion GPS input line connection error The transmission circuit of the GPS board frequency synchronization oscilla tor inside the NAVI control unit is send ing an oscill
260. e power window regu lator circuit Driver side power window regu lator Front power window main switch Power window switches Power window regulators Power window main switch Power window circuit Power window main switch Front power window main switch Encoder and limit switch RAP signal circuit Driver or passenger side door switch circuit Smart entrance control unit Check harness between front power window main switch and driver side power window regulator for open or short circuit Check driver side power window regulator Check front power window main switch Check power window switch Check power window regulator Check power window main switch Check the following Check harness between the rear power window switch LH and RH terminal 5 and power window relay terminal 5 Check harnesses between power window main switch and power window switch for open short cir Check harnesses between power window switch and power window regulator for open short circuit Check front power window main switch Check front power window main switch Check encoder and limit switch EL 274 Check RAP signal With CONSULT II Check RAP signal with CONSULT II Use WORK SUPPORT mode RETAINED PWR in SMART ENTRANCE Refer to EL 271l Check RAP signal with CONSULT II Use ACTIVE TEST mode RETAINED PWR in SMART ENTRAN
261. e speed pulse This pulse is dependent upon tire size If tire chains are used on the vehicle accuracy will be affected pulse rate will be too fast or too slow The same is true if the system installed to your vehicle is removed and installed on another vehicle Drive the vehicle at a speed higher than 30 km h 19 MPH for approximately 30 minutes Automatic read justment should occur If it does not remains too fast or too slow distance calibration is required Or drive the vehicle for a short distance Perform SPEED CALIBRATION EL 417 After removing the tire chains sensing accuracy may recover by itself Bad map data or system defect same error consistently occurs in the same area ROUTE SEARCH ROUTE GUIDE present location or the destination location is displayed the avoid area it is not possible to search routes e avoid area is set to wide range area it may not be possible to find appropriate routes or search for alternate routes e The automatic re route calculates a return to the original route Because of this it may not be possible to search appropriate new routes If you deviate from the original route and wish to select an appropriate new route touch Route Calculation e The automatic re route function may sometimes require considerable time e Displayed route number and directional information at a highway junction may differ from the information posted on the actual road signs
262. eck the following e 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch SEL549Y p Replace key switch EL 115 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 10 CHECK DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door lock unlock switch LOCK SW DR AS UNLK SW DR AS DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR LOCK SW DR AS OFF UNLK SW DR AS OFF When lock unlock switch is turned to LOCK LOCK SW DR AS ON When lock unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK UNLK SW DR AS ON SEL341W gt Without CONSULT II Remove key from ignition switch Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK 3 Voltage 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL396Y p 11 Check the following e Ground circuit for each front power window switch e Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart entrance control uni
263. ector 2 Check continuity between trunk room lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 Y DISCONNECT Trunk room lamp switch connector Continuity Condition Closed 211 Condition Open Yes SEL242W OK or NG Check the following e Trunk room lamp switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and trunk room lamp switch Replace trunk room lamp switch EL 348 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK CHECK INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION With CONSULT II 1 Select ACTIVE TEST in THEFT WAR ALM with CONSULT II 2 Select THEFT IND and touch ACTIVE TEST THEFT IND OFF NHEL0123S05 Security indicator lamp should illuminate SEL356W Without CONSULT II 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 38 G OR and ground Smart entrance control unit connector 38 DISCONNECT Battery voltage should exist 52 SEL037Y Refer to wiring diagram in EI 332 Security indicator lamp is OK NG p 2 2 CHECK INDICATOR LAMP NG p indicator lamp EL 349 SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INDICATOR 1 Disconnect se
264. ector D33 CONNECT 259 11111115 116 5 NOTE Check voltage when front power window regulator LH or RH harness connector is disconnected SEL725W OK or NG NG Replace power window main switch or front power window switch RH CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION Check voltage between front power window main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and ground during power window closing operation Front power window Front power window switch 210 switch 033 Terminal Voltage DCV 25 Front power Approx 15 mm 0 59 in 6 P I window main below the full closed switch 15 position to full closed Front power position window switch RH 16 Other positions Approx 0 Approx 5 SEL726W OK or NG NG gt GO TO 4 EL 274 POWER WINDOW Trouble Diagnoses 4 RESET LIMIT SWITCH Reset limit switch Refer to Br23 Front Door Glass Limit Switch Reset Then check voltage between front power win dow main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and ground during power window closing operation at least ten times 44 Front power window Front power window switch connector 210 switch connector 033 Terminal No Voltage DCV Front power Approx 15 mm 0 59 in 6 window main below the full
265. ed with smart entrance control unit The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the e power door lock auto door lock trunk lid opener interior lamp panic alarm hazard and horn reminder e power window opener OPERATED PROCEDURE Power Door Lock Operation NHELO194S0201 Smart entrance control unit receives a LOCK signal from keyfob Smart entrance control unit locks all doors with input of LOCK signal from keyfob When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once driver s door will be unlocked Then if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds all other door will be unlocked Select unlock mode be changed by CONSULT II Auto Door Lock Operation E Auto lock function signal is sent for operation when any of the following signals are not sent within 5 minutes after the unlock signal is sent from the keyfob e when door switch is turned ON for open e when the ignition switch is turned ON e when the lock signal is sent from the keyfob Auto door lock mode can be changed by CONSULT II EL 304 Hazard and Horn Reminder Power is supplied at all times to vehicle security horn relay 1 terminals 1 and 3 and to vehicle security horn relay 2 terminal 1 through 10A fuse No 61 located in the fusible link and fuse box and to horn relay terminal 2 e through 10A fuse No 57 located in the fusible link and fuse box When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob wit
266. een VDC TCS ABS control unit and steering angle sensor Refer to CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN VDC TCS ABS CONTROL UNIT AND STEERING ANGLE SENSOR EL 464 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Receive diagnosis ABS ENGINE 71794 101 wr N uw um I PKIA8329E 7777 Malfunctioning part E VDC TCS ABS control unit sensor PKIA8338E Case 2 Check ECM circuit Refer to ECM CIRCUIT CHECK 465 NHEL0331S0302 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Receive diagnosis SELECT SYSTEM screen Initial Transmit diagnosis diagnosis ECM VDC TCS STRG TCM ABS NG ENGINE UN voe UNKWN UNKWN N UNKWN uN UNKWN PKIA8330E 7777 Malfunctioning part CAN H VDC TCS ABS Steering control unit angle sensor TCM EL 462 8339 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Case 3 Check TCM circuit Refer to CIRCUIT CHECK 1 466 NHEL0331S0303 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Receive diagnosis Initial Transmit diagnosis diagnosis d ud STRG SELECT SYSTEM screen UNKWN PKIA8331E 2272 Malfunctioning part G VDC TCS ABS Steering ECM control unit angle sensor 2 PKIA8340E Case 4 SU Check steering angle sensor circuit Refer to STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK EL 467 CAN DIAG
267. efer to wiring diagram in 334 Door key cylinder switch is OK NG gt GO TO 2 EL 351 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH 1 Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector 2 Check continuity between door key cylinder switch connector terminals DISCONNECT Door key cylinder switch D Door unlock switch terminal TS connector 2 Ground terminal 11 3 Door lock switch terminal Terminals Continuity a SEL034X OK or NG Check the following e Door key cylinder switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door key cylinder switch gt door key cylinder switch EL 352 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK CHECK DOOR LOCK UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door lock unlock switch LOCK SW DR AS UNLK SW DR AS DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR LOCK SW DR AS OFF UNLK SWDR AS OFF When lock unlock switch is turned to LOCK LOCK SW DR AS ON When lock unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK UNLK SW DR AS ON SEL341W Without CONSULT II Remove key from ignition switch Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscil
268. entrance control unit terminal 49 and e to key switch terminal 3 HA e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B When the key switch is ON ignition key is inserted in key cylinder power is supplied e through key switch terminal 4 e to smart entrance control unit terminal 25 When the front door switch LH is ON door is OPEN ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 1 e through front door switch LH terminal 2 DX e to front door switch LH terminal 3 through body grounds B7 and B12 without rear sunshade or B46 with rear sunshade When the front door switch RH is ON door is OPEN ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 2 e through front door switch RH terminal 2 and to front door switch RH terminal 3 e through body grounds B127 and B106 When the rear door switches are ON door is OPEN ground is supplied EL 293 NHEL0194S01 BT REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM System Description Cont d e to smart entrance control unit terminal 3 e through rear door switches terminal 1 e torear door switchs case grounds When door lock unlock switch of front power window main switch is LOCK UNLOCK ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 33 e through front power window main switch terminals 8 and 5 and e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 Keyfob signal is inputted to smart entrance control unit The antenna of the system is combin
269. epeuey 104 1401 108498 jusiquy pog Ma HY duue pe H HH soyiew epis Apog JO BU1 1 V HH jeuBis 14044 ST c a c A9 9 9 M 9 M 8 AD 9 AD WIAD c a c a RS Suonoes pue 23 u 5 318n0HL JO AYOM JO 9seo ui s10 129uuoo s u1 12euuoosip N23 24 esneo os op ane 4 jeje siol93uuo5S5 BU YOO pue oj 9405 984 x H3 va GB zv 1v 23 129 vd 04 ui LO O O O 298 m C OO QI CQ OQ lt lt m m lt lt c lt 278 lt m m 98888888808 lt c 10 ouJ Buijooo U31IAS 1 YSEM JOJOW J9UuS M 14014 Ue 108498 911558919 HI ejoJ 2 1
270. er ignition key was turned to the OFF position Vehicle is transported on car ferry car train or by some other means Operate vehicle for short time under GPS receiving conditions The display does not change to night time mode even though the light switch has been turned ON Lights have been turned on In DISPLAY CHANGE mode night time mode on display has been switched to day time mode and still is Turn lights on again Set the display to night time mode Refer to 1 4231 Map does not scroll even though the position of your vehicle is changed Present area does not appear on the display Press the MAP switch Vehicle position marker does not appear Present area does not appear on the display Press the MAP switch The map surface precision display GPS satellite marker still remains gray Vehicle is parked inside a building or in the shadow of a large building This intercepts the GPS signal Move the vehicle to a more open position GPS signal is not received because objects are placed on the rear parcel shelf Remove objects from the rear parcel shelf GPS satellite position is bad Wait until GPS satellite position improves Vehicle position precision is bad The map surface precision display GPS satellite marker still remains gray Refer to The map surface precision display GPS satellite marker still remains gray item Symptoms Vehicle speed and elapsed distance is calculated from the vehicl
271. eration the display shows until the vehicle is driven 500 m 1 600 ft and 30 seconds has passed Average vehicle speed e Average vehicle speed indication is conducted by running distance and running time e Indication will be refreshed every 30 seconds e After reset operation the displays shows for 30 seconds Journey time e Journey time indication is conducted by integration of ignition ON time HOW TO CHANGE RESET INDICATION e Indication can be changed by in following order by pushing board computer steering switch TRIP OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE RANGE AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED JOURNEY TIME e Continuous pushing the switch more than 0 8 second can reset the indication of journey time hour meter average vehicle speed and average fuel consumption NOTE e After the display changes automatically the indication can be changed to the last mode by push ing the board computer steering switch In this case the cursor will blink as a warning NHEL0318S01 EL 140 BOARD COMPUTER System Description Cont d e When the OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE warning and the RANGE warning match warning condi tions at the same time the display automatically indicates the OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE WA LG EL 141 Wiring Diagram B COMP Wiring Diagram B COMP T EL B
272. erminal 5 1 0191501 1 019150101 e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 ST WINDOW UP When the front LH switch in the front power window main switch is pressed in the up position power is sup as plied e to front power window regulator LH terminal 1 e through front power window main switch terminal 2 aT Ground is supplied e to front power window regulator LH terminal 3 e through front power window main switch terminal 3 Then the motor raises the window until the switch is released WINDOW DOWN se When the LH switch in the front power window main switch is pressed in the down position power is supplied e to front power window regulator LH terminal e through front power window main switch terminal 3 Ground is supplied e to front power window regulator LH terminal 1 IDX through front power window main switch terminal 2 Then the motor lowers the window until the switch is released Front Door RH Ground is supplied e to front power window main switch terminal 5 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 WINDOW UP When the front RH switch in the front power window switch is pressed in the UP position power is supplied EL 261 NHEL0191S0102 POWER WINDOW System Description Cont d e to front power window regulator RH terminal 1 e through front power window switch RH terminal 5 Ground is supplied e to front power window regulator RH termina
273. erminals 5 and 6 Unit Resistance value Q 109 113 108 132 EL 457 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHEL0328 View with lower instrument View with driver seat removed center panel 001 VDC TCS ABS control unit 2 Passenger side view with lower instrument panel removed gt Se 1 1 Transmission control module System Description NHEL0329 CAN Controller Area Network is a serial communication line for real time application It is an on vehicle mul tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation not independent In CAN communication control units are connected with 2 communication lines CAN H line CAN L line allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir ing Each control unit transmits receives data but selectively reads required data only EL 458 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Wiring Diagram CAN Wiring Diagram CAN NHEL0330 EL CAN 02 DATA LINE WA L O Do LG 1
274. ess Cont d NOTE LG SU RS EL 483 HARNESS LAYOUT Engine Hoom Harness NHELO0134 Engine Room Harness es x x x x 6 01 129 0151 pue 4 9 41 51 pue 4 Apog pog e 25 IV pue 23 SASONDVIG ATGNOYL JO 01 2 eseo ay ui 2 12euuoosip jou sepoo N23 eui esneo os op 4 sjojoeuuoo y YOO pue joeuuoo 9118 eg x MEL2150 EL 484 HARNESS LAYOUT Engine Room Harness Cont d LG 104 0 WSN 104 n IN23 Cn HH 10440 epoiq 623 10889 4 2 eg V AO vO 163 01 ssousey 1914 15 2028 1010 191J81 S 1023 Ela OL 0068 4 woo Sav 8 6919 sgy g g HI 405 5 14014 913
275. g Diagram TAIL L EL TAIL L 03 PRECEDING nad PAGE R L R L NEXT PAGE R L MA LG SU BIR ST RS c mm 52 516171519173 MEL2710 EL 69 PARKING LICENSE LAMPS Wiring Diagram TAIL L EL TAIL L 04 PRECEDING R sa PAGE R L 1 L 824 Bes TO R G gt ELSTOPIL LICENSE LAMP RH COMBINATION LAMP RH MEL272O EL 70 PARKING LICENSE LAMPS Wiring Diagram TAIL L Conta SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR 19 50 5152 53 54 55 56 1189 57158 59 60 61 62 63 64 cv EREE m E _ SMART CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE BETWEEN EACH TERMINAL AND GROUND CONDITION OFF CLOSED ON OPEN 2 HL PASSENGER DOOR SWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN HW REARDOORSWITCH OFF CLOSED ON OPEN IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT IS APPLIED TO AUTO LIGHT SENSOR SIGNAL ON POSITION LIGHT IS NOT APPLIED TO AUTO LIGHT SENSORLLESS THAN 1V 8 PB AUTOLIGHT SENSOR GND 21221 LIGHT SENSOR IGNITION SWITCH OFF ON 5V POWER ON OR START WITH LIGHTING OFF TAIL LAMP RELAY Out put SWITCH 1ST OR 2ND HEADLAMPS ILLUMINATE BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL
276. ges each system DIAGNOSTIC ITEM DESCRIPTION SU NHEL0247S02 MODE Description DATA MONITOR Input output data in the smart entrance control unit can be BR read ACTIVE TEST Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT II drives some sys ST tems apart from the smart entrance control unit WORK SUPPORT for DOOR LOCK Select unlock mode ON OFF setting be changed e Key reminder door mode ON OFF setting can be changed RS WORK SUPPORT for INT LAMP Interior lamp timer mode ON OFF setting can be changed WORK SUPPORT for BATTERY SAVER Interior lamp battery saver period can be changed ST WORK SUPPORT for THEFT WAR ALM e he recorded trigger signal when vehicle security system was activated can be checked e Security alarm ON OFF setting can be changed WORK SUPPORT for RETAINED PWR SET RAP signal s power supply period can be changed SG WORK SUPPORT for MULTI REMOTE ENT e ID code of keyfob can be registered and erased e Keyless answer back mode can be changed e Pressing time of panic alarm trunk lid opener and door unlock for power window down operation buttons on keyfob can be changed e Auto lock operation starting time can be changed IDX WORK SUPPORT for HEAD LAMP Auto light sensitivity can be changed e Exterior lamp battery saver control ON OFF setting can be changed Auto light delay off time can be changed EL 359 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CONSULT II CONSULT II INSPECTION PROCEDURE Data link
277. h EG KEY CYL LK SW Indicates ON OFF condition of front door key cylinder switch KEY CYL UN SW Indicates ON OFF condition of front door key cylinder switch FE LK BUTTON SIG Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from remote controller UN BUTTON SIG Indicates ON OFF condition of unlock signal from remote controller Active Test NHEL0214S0102 NY Test Description INT LAMP This test enables to check interior lamp operation SU When ON on CONSULT II screen is touched e Interior lamp turns on when the switch is at DOOR Smart entrance control unit supplies power and ground to interior lamp BR IGN ILLUM This test enables to check ignition key hole illumination operation The illumination turns on when ON on CONSULT II screen is touched STEP LAMP This test enables to check step lamp operation ST The illumination turns on when CONSULT II screen is touched Work Support i NHEL0214S0103 Work Item Description BT ROOM LAMP TIMER SET Interior lamp timer mode can be changed by mode setting Selects ON OFF of the room lamp illumination at the time the driver door is unlocked HA BATTERY SAVER Data Monitor 1 0214502 021450201 SG Monitored Description IGN ON SW Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch DOOR SW RR Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch KEY ON SW Indicates ON OFF condition of key switch DOOR SW DR Indi
278. h RETAINED PWR 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST and WORK SUPPORT are available EL 209 CONSULT II Application Items POWER SUNROOF RETAINED PWR Data Monitor Monitored Item IGN ON SW DOOR SW DR DOOR SW AS Active Test Test Item RETAINED PWR Work Support Work RETAINED PWR SET Symptom Power sunroof cannot be operated using any switch Power sunroof cannot be operated using one of the sunroof switches CONSULT II Application Items 0224 1 0224501 1 022450101 Description Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch RH NHEL0224S0102 Description This test is able to supply RAP signal power from smart entrance control unit to power window system power sunroof system Those systems can be operated when turning on RETAINED PWR on CONSULT II screen even if the ignition switch is tuned OFF NOTE During this test CONSULT II can be operated with ignition switch OFF position RETAINED PWR should be turned or OFF on CONSULT II screen when ignition switch is ON Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power operation CONSULT II might be stuck if RETAINED PWR is turned ON or OFF on CONSULT II screen when ignition switch is OFF 1 022450103 Descri
279. h 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B e to CD auto changer terminal 1 with CD auto changer e 10 audio unit terminal 10 Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit Ground is supplied e to speaker amp terminal 40 and e woofer terminal 47 e through body grounds B106 and B127 e to CD auto changer terminal 7 with CD auto changer e through body grounds B7 and B12 without rear sunshade or B46 with rear sunshade When the audio unit POWER button is pressed power is supplied to BOSE speaker amp terminal 25 and woofer terminal 45 from audio unit terminal 12 CD audio signals are supplied with CD auto changer e through CD auto changer terminals 16 6 15 and 5 e to terminals 41 42 43 44 of the audio unit Audio signals are supplied through audio unit terminals 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 and 16 to speaker amp terminals 20 33 22 35 21 34 23 and 36 through audio unit terminal 12 to speaker amp terminal 25 and to woofer terminal 45 Audio signals are amplified by the speaker amp The amplified audio signals are supplied e through speaker amp terminals 30 31 28 29 18 17 41 and 42 to terminals 1 and 2 of the front door speaker LH and RH to terminals 1 and 2 of the tweeter LH and RH to terminals 1 and 2 of the rear speaker LH and RH through speaker amp terminal 24 and 37 to terminals 43 and 44 of the woofer NHELO0079 EL 194 AUDIO Schematlic Schematic NHEL0167
280. h all doors closed ground is supplied e to vehicle security horn relay 2 terminal 2 e through smart entrance control unit terminal 42 Vehicle security horn relay 2 is then energized to horn relay terminal 1 and to vehicle security horn relay 1 terminal 2 through vehicle security horn relay 2 terminals 5 and 3 and through body ground E11 E22 and E53 to smart entrance control unit terminals 47 and 48 from hazard warning lamp system Vehicle security horn relay 1 and horn relay are now energized and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as a reminder The hazard and horn reminder has six steps NHELO0194S02 1 019450202 EL 294 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM System Description Cont d Operating function of hazard and horn reminder Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp T Hazard warning lamp lt ound flash flash T x w j EM os j LG How to change hazard and horn reminder mode E With CONSULT II Hazard and horn reminder can be changed by CONSULT II EL 304 Without CONSULT II FE When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the keyfob for more than 2 seconds at the same time the hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as follows S Hazard warning lamp flashes three times C mode S mode Horn chirp mode Non horn chirp mode Hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds once
281. harge SEL956V EL 40 HEADLAMP FOR USA Schematic Schematic NHEL0254 LG SU BR ST COMBINATION 5 45 1231 OJ RS 3004 3009 HM HI HOLIMS HOLIMS ev v9 6v 3503 1041400 1 5 SG 14053 24 3513 2 14 15 49 NO HOLIMS H1 HOLIMS 9 1NOM3 HOSN3S 1 OLAV 3513 M NO 10 DOV HOLIAS MEL260O EL 41 HEADLAMP FOR USA Wiring Diagram H LAMP Wiring Diagram H LAMP EL H LAMP 01 IGNITION SWITCH ACC OR ON WITH REAR SUNSHADE FUSE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE NHEL0255 IGNITION SWITCH BATTERY ON OR START DB HEFER TO EL POWER PU R B G R B CONTROL UNIT M143 M144 M145 SW T L SW1 T L DOOR AS COMBINATION SWITCH LIGHTING WITCH E155 JOINT CONNECTOR 7 n 131 In 52 tes 1 11 1 ITI ITI REFER TO THE FOLLOWING M15 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ 1 BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B MEL261O HEADLAMP USA
282. he battery saver control ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11 and e to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 Then illumination lamps illuminate again NHELO0035S01 EL 91 LG SU 02 25 RS Schematic ILLUMINATION TS With TCS VD With VDC BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH ACC or ON I o zu lt 2 Ez zo 5 With rear sunshade With navigation system HS With heated steering FUSE FUSE n FUSE FUSE 2 FUSE Schematic ILLUMINATION 52 b a e 240 ez 52 5 o2 228 983 896 A C AUTO ILLUMINATION VOC OFF SWITCH ILLUMINATION 7 0 o 0 9 HEATED STEERING SWITCH ILLUMINATION Q9 9 9 5 ON OFF SWITCH ILLUMINATION 5 9 TH HAZARD SWITCH ILLUMINATION A T DEVICE ILLUMINATION 9 DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH ILLUMINATION AUDIO UNIT ILLUMINATION GLOVE BOX LAMP CLOCK ILLUMINATION REAR SUNSHADE SWITCH ILLUMINATION SH 9 SH X O NAVI CONTROL UNIT ILLUMINATION 0 0 ILLUMINATION CONTROL ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION 0 4 h 28
283. he route being Go to WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION 428 traveled d Check reverse signal input to NAVI control unit correctly by DIAGNOSIS FOR ELA THE SIGNALS FROM THE CAR MODE movement SU 1 Is there anything obstructing the GPS antenna on the rear parcel finisher u Radio wave of GPS cannot GPS antenna located under the rear parcel finisher be received GPS marker on the display does not 2 Check GPS radio wave receive condition in GPS INFORMATION EL 421 BIR become green color 9 3 Check GPS antenna in Self Diagnosis EL 406 Heading direction of position 1 Perform ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION MODE EL 4241 ST marker does not match vehicle direction 2 Go to FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION E 422 as Stored location in the address book and other Stored location in the address book and other memory functions may be lost if the memory functions are lost battery is disconnected or becomes discharged If this should occur charge or BT when battery is disconnected replace the battery as necessary and re enter the information or becomes discharged Map appears grey and can The current location in the memory is out of the map data area EL 418 RA not be scrolled Perform INITIALIZE LOCATION MODE SG EL 427 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION NHEL0303S02 CHECK IN LISTEN TO CUST
284. he steer ing wheel front passenger air bag module located on the instrument panel on passenger side seat belt pre tensioners a diagnosis sensor unit crash zone sensor warning lamp wiring harness and spiral cable e Fora side collision The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module located in the outer side of front seat satellite sensor diagnosis sensor unit one of components of air bags for a frontal collision wiring harness warning lamp one of components of air bags for a frontal collision Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual WARNING e To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation all maintenance should be per formed by an authorized INFINITI dealer e Improper maintenance including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS can lead to per sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module see the RS section e Do use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and or orange harness connec tor and by yellow harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis CAN SYSTEM
285. hen traveling on the same road based on sensing results by the GPS antenna and gyro angular velocity sensor Slow locational correction using map matching e The matching function requires verification of local data make the map matching function some distance needs to be driven e The map matching function may not provide accurate performance an area where there are numerous parallel roads Until the system judges the road characteristics an incorrect position may be shown EL 438 NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal GPS signal reception conditions are good However the position mark does not return to its proper position e The system senses the vehicle location with an error of approximately 100 m 328 ft Due to the limita tion of precision the position marker may be inaccurate even if the GPS signal reception condition is good e The navigation system uses GPS data to determine vehicle location GPS data is compared with other locational sensing data during the map matching process The system decides which data is more pre cise and uses that data e When vehicle is stationary GPS data cannot be used to make system corrections Area designations on the map display and the BIRDVIEW display differ To prevent the display from becoming congested alphanumeric information is abridged No problem Correct position of your vehicle is not displayed Vehicle position changed aft
286. his will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose ness 1 0060502 17754 BRE NS 3 9 5 0 0 39 0 52 34 45 in Ib gt EL 178 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER Removal and Installation Cont d Removal 1 Remove 4 bolts that secure wiper motor 2 Detach wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint 1 006050201 3 Remove linkage careful not to break ball joint rubber boot Installation 1 006050202 e Grease ball joint portion before installation 1 Installation is the reverse order of removal E Secreta Washer Nozzle Adjustment 16 e Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure at left Adjustable range 10 Nozzle hote bore diameter AT 0 8 mm 0 031 in Unit mm in 5 80 The diameters of these circles less than 80 3 15 in Washer Tube Layout Washer nozzle NHEL0062 Washer tube Washer tank Y EL 179 HORN Wiring Diagram HORN Wiring Diagram HORN EL HORN 01 NHEL0071 REFER EL POWER 10 G B G R JOINT CONNECTOR 10 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY 1 HORN RELAY EL VEHSEC TO COMBINATION SPIRAL SWITCH HORN SWITCH M216 HORN SWITCH HORN HIGH REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ Me
287. ich driver s seat positions are not entered in memory illuminates for 0 5 seconds Within 5 seconds Indicator LEDs Press memory switch for which driv er s seat positions are to be entered 1 To modify driver s seat positions press memory switch in memory for more than 0 5 sec Indicator LED will then go out for 0 5 seconds and then illuminate for 5 seconds onds 2 driver s seat positions can be memorized 2 To enter driver s seat positions in blank memory indicator LED illuminates for 5 seconds after memory switch is pressed END OF MEMORY SETTING SEL592W NOTE e When memory switch for which driver s seat positions are already retained in memory is pressed new seat positions will be retained in memory in place of the previously set positions e Drive position is erased from the memory when battery cable is disconnected more than 30 seconds After connecting battery cable perform initialization procedures SELECTING THE MEMORIZED POSITION PROCEDURE A PROCEDURE B Turn ignition switch and press desired memory switch Open driver s door and withdraw key from ignition key cylinder for more than 0 3 seconds Indicator LED illuminates Then press desired memory switch for more than 0 3 seconds Indicator LED illuminates See NOTE 2 See NOTE 1 388 Within 1 minute Insert key into ignition key cylinder Memory indicator illuminates See NOTE 3 The driver s seat will m
288. imately 3 to 13 seconds This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier INT SW combined with wiper switch HA When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position ground is supplied to wiper amplifier The desired interval time is input to wiper amplifier INT VR from wiper volume switch combined with wiper SC switch Then intermittent ground is supplied to wiper motor terminal 3 from terminal 14 of wiper switch through wiper amplifier OUTPUT The wiper motor operates at low speed at the desired interval IDX WASHER OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied through 20A fuse No 25 located in the fuse block J B to washer motor terminal 1 When the lever is pulled to the WASH position ground is supplied to washer motor terminal 2 and from terminal 18 of the wiper switch 1 0057502 EL 175 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER System Description e through terminal 17 of the wiper switch and e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 With power and ground supplied the washer motor operates When the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more the wiper motor operates at low speed for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the same manner as the intermittent operation EL 176 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER Wiring Diagram WIPER Wiring Diagram WI
289. ing Diagram D LOCK NHEL0109 FIG 1 NHEL0109S01 WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE FUS E REFER TO EL POWER OCK SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Gia 14 1 1 1 B B B B B B B B 1 A B127 B106 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 11112 13 14 15 MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK 1 JUNCTION BOX A I MEL346O POWER DOOR LOCK Wiring Diagram D LOCK Cont d FIG 2 NHEL0109S02 SMART EL D CLOCK 02 ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Gl 8 031 LG fpr mesh DOOR LOCK AND DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK SWITCH EG UNLOCK BETWEEN SU FULL STROKE AND N SG REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 031 MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ LLIESD oleae erea 51517181990 MEL347O EL 279 POWER DOOR LOCK Wiring Diagram D LOCK FIG 3 NHEL0109S03 EL D LOCK 03 SMART ENTRANCE WITH KEYLESS DOOR DOOR DOOR CONTROL UNIT UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK WITHOUT KEYLESS lt HS gt WITH HEATED SEAT WITHOUT HEATED SEAT OUT DR OUT ALL OUT AS RR W B GY G Y 1 7 23 13 000006
290. ion switch OFF Vehicle movement is not sensed Current location calculations do not occur and current location data does not appear on the display screen Use GPS to accurately determine actual vehicle position The system can be returned to normal operation when the GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good Position marker jumps In circumstances such as those described below the position marker may jump as a result of automatic cur rent location corrections made by the system During map matching e During map matching the position marker may jump from one spot to another In this case it may be cor rected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist GPS location correcting e Vehicle current location is sensed using the GPS data Positional calibration is performed The position marker continues to be in the wrong position It may jump about from one area of the screen to another In this case it may be corrected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist Position marker indicates that the vehicle is in the middle of an ocean or large river The navigation system does not distinguish between land and water surfaces In some cases a position marker error may cause the display to show the vehicle above a water surface Position of position marker varies when the vehicle is repeatedly operated on the same road Driving lane and steering wheel movement results in a variety of different positions of the position mark w
291. ircuit Smart entrance control unit Exterior lamp battery saver control 1 Door switch LH or RH circuit does not operate properly 2 Smart entrance control unit EL 72 Repair order Check 10A fuse No 60 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 1 and 3 of tail lamp relay Check tail lamp relay Check harness between smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 and tail lamp relay terminal 2 Check harness between tail lamp relay terminal 5 and ground Check lighting switch Check harness between lighting switch terminal 11 and smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 Check harness between lighting switch terminal 5 and ground Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 Check the following Harness between smart entrance control unit and LH or RH door switch for open or short circuit LH or RH door switch ground circuit LH or RH door switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 STOP 1 Wiring Diagram STOP L Wiring Diagram STOP L NHEL0025 EL STOP L 01 BATTERY WITHOUT REAR AIR SPOILER GI E BLOCK SH WITH REAR SUNSHADE REFER TO EL POWER WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE LG R G pa m R G i o R G gt TO EL TAIL L ma 5
292. is able to check vehicle security alarm operation The alarm will be activated for 0 5 seconds after ON on CONSULT II screen is touched This test is able to check vehicle security alarm headlamp operation The headlamp illumi nates for 0 5 seconds after ON on CONSULT II screen is touched 1 024550103 Description The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of theft waning alarm The trigger data can be erased by touching CLEAR on CONSULT II screen This mode is able to confirm and change security alarm ON OFF setting EL 339 WA LG RS VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses PRELIMINARY CHECK The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED in the following flow chart 0123 System phase START Note Before starting operation check open front windows DISARMED Pattern A Turn ignition switch OFF Close all doors hood and trunk lid pie Go to DIAGNOSTIC SECURITY indicator la II blink ry 2 6 seconds indicator lamp wi ink every econ PROCEDURE 6 Pattern B Trouble diagnosis Turn ignition switch OFF and pull out key from key cylinder Open of IVIS 5 7 any door SECURITY indicator lamp will blink every 2 6 seconds
293. istance value which is then input to A C auto amp and board computer After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector measure resistance between terminals 1 2 using the table below Resistance 15 5 12 73 10 14 9 92 5 23 7 80 0 32 6 19 SU 5 41 4 95 10 50 3 99 BR 15 59 3 24 20 68 2 65 ST 25 77 2 19 30 86 1 81 RS 35 95 1 51 40 104 1 27 BY 45 113 1 07 G EL 145 System Description Display COMPASS System Description This unit displays earth magnetism and heading direction of vehicle DIRECTION DISPLAY m Push the switch when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position The direction will be displayed Pushing the COMP switch a second time will turn off the display 1 If the display reads calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at less than 5 MPH 2 To adjust for Compass Variance a Press the COMP button for more than 3 seconds The cur rent zone number will appear in the display b Find your current location and variance zone number on the zone map c Press the COMP button until the new zone number appears in the display After you stop pressing the button in the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds NOTE 1 Do not install the ski rack antenna etc which are attached
294. itch RH SELO24Y Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminals 1 LG 2 R L or 3 R W and gro und Smart entrance control unit connector Terminals Condi val V ondition oltage Front door switch LH Front door door switches SEL021YC Refer to wiring diagram in EL 333 Door switch is OK and go to hood switch check NG p EL 343 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses 3 CHECK DOOR SWITCH 1 Disconnect door switch connector 2 Check continuity between door switch terminals Door switch connector 29 TS Front LH Front RH 129 DISCONNECT gt Door switch connector Rear LH 10 Front door switches Open Rear door switches ind SEL192W OK or NG Check the following e Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch Replace door switch EL 344 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Hood Switch Check 1012350402 1 PRELIMINARY CHECK Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder SECURITY indicator lamp should blink every 2 6 seconds Close all doors hood and trunk lid Lock doors with keyfob from inside the vehicle SECURI
295. ith roads on the map 030350302 LG Example 2 NHEL0303S0303 lt The position marker consistently indicates the wrong position when driving in the same area Determine if this is the result of the map matching function or the GPS gt Perform test pattern 1 To verify the accuracy of the road configuration shown on the display SU Perform test patterns 1 and 2 e Compare the map and the saved driving tracks The precision of the saved driving tracks is within several hundred meters BR To make distance calibration and adjustments Perform test patterns 1 and 2 eT e Make adjustments by driving the vehicle over a known course highway or other road where distances are clearly marked Calibrate the distance against the known distance Use the AS formula below Calibration value Screen display distance Actual distance EL 429 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK FOR NAVI CONTROL UNIT NAVI control unit Power Supply Circuit Check NHEL0303S0401 Terminal Ignition switch If NG check the following e 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B 15A fuse No 56 located in the fuse block J B Harness for open or short between fuse and NAVI control unit O Ground Circuit Check DISCONNEC
296. ity horn relay 2 and fuse 6 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN RELAY 2 1 Disconnect vehicle security horn relay 2 harness connector 2 Check voltage between vehicle security horn relay 2 harness connector E63 terminals 5 G and 3 B Vehicle security horn relay 2 TS DISCONNECT Battery voltage should exist SELO32Y Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and vehicle secu rity horn relay 2 Check the following e Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay 2 and fuse e Harness for open or short between horn relay and vehicle security horn relay 2 e Harness for open or short between vehicle security horn relay 2 and body grounds EL 316 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Diagnoses INTERIOR LAMP OPERATION CHECK NHEL0195S10 1 CHECK INTERIOR LAMP Check if the interior lamp switch is in the ON position and the lamp illuminates Does interior lamp illuminate Check the following e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior lamp e Interior lamp 2 CHECK INTERIOR LAMP OPERATION With CONSULT II 1 Select ACTIVE TEST in MULTI REMOTE ENT with CONSULT II 2 Select INT IGN ILLUM and touch ON ACTIVE TEST IN T IGN ILLUM Interior lamp should illuminate SEL349W Without CONSULT II Push unlock button of keyfob with all doors closed and driver s door locked and check voltage betwee
297. k switch is turned to LOCK LOCK SW DR AS ON When lock unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK UNLK SW DR AS ON SEL341W gt Without CONSULT II Remove key from ignition switch Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after door lock unlock switch is turned LOCK or UNLOCK 3 Voltage 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL396Y p 5 Check the following e Ground circuit for each front power window switch e Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart entrance control unit connector If above systems are normal replace the front power window switch EL 121 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 5 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL LOCK UNLOCK SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check front door key cylinder switch KEY CYL LK SW KEY CYL UN SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT DATA When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK KEY CYL LK SW ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK KEY CYL UN SW ON SEL342W Witho
298. l e through front power window switch RH terminal 4 Then the motor raises the window until the switch is released WINDOW DOWN When the RH switch in the front power window switch is pressed in the DOWN position power is supplied e to front power window regulator RH terminal e through front power window switch RH terminal 4 Ground is supplied e to front power window regulator RH terminal 1 e through front power window switch RH terminal 5 Then the motor lowers the window until the switch is released Rear Door REAR DOOR MAIN SWITCH OPERATION Rear Door LH Power is supplied e through front power window main switch terminal 13 12 e to rear power window switch LH terminal 3 4 The subsequent operation is the same as front power window switch RH operation REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OPERATION Power is supplied e through rear power window switch LH terminal 1 2 e to rear power window regulator LH terminal 1 2 Ground is supplied e to rear power window regulator LH terminal 2 1 e through rear power window switch LH terminal 2 1 e to rear power window switch LH terminal 4 3 e through front power window main switch terminal 12 13 Then the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released Rear Door RH Power is supplied e through front power window main switch terminal 9 10 e to rear power window switch RH terminal 3 4 e through rear power window switch RH terminal 1
299. l 49 of smart entrance control unit Check Lighting switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 Check 20A fuse No 54 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp LH relay Check headlamp LH relay Check harness between headlamp LH relay and smart entrance control unit Check harness between smart entrance control unit and lighting switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 Check 20A fuse No 55 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 1 and 6 of headlamp RH relay Check headlamp RH relay Check harness between headlamp RH relay and smart entrance control unit Check harness between smart entrance control unit and lighting switch Check smart entrance control unit EL 364 Check bulb Check 15A fuse No 68 located in fuse and fusible link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of headlamp LH relay Check headlamp LH relay Check harness between headlamp LH relay and daytime light control unit Check harness between LH headlamp and lighting switch Check lighting switch Check the following Harness between daytime light control unit and light ing switch Harness between lighting switch and ground Check daytime light control unit HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SY
300. l unit connector Condition of front RH door CLOSED Approx 5 Condition of front RH door OPENED 0 SEL152Y OK or NG NG p 5 5 CHECK FRONT RH DOOR SWITCH Check continuity between door switch connector B129 terminals 2 and 3 Front door switch RH Continuity Door switch is pushed ams Door switch is released Yes SEL325WC Check the following e Front RH door switch ground circuit and condition e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front RH door switch Replace front RH door switch EL 113 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 6 CHECK REAR LH AND RH DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door switches DOOR SW RR in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA I MONITOR When rear door LH and or RH is DOOR SW RR open DOOR SW RR ON When driver s door is closed DOOR SW RR OFF Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminals 3 R W and ground SEL154Y Smart entrance control unit connector Voltage V Condition of rear LH and or RH door CLOSED Approx 5 CA Condition of rear LH and or RH door OPENED 0 SEL155Y OK or NG NG gt GO TO 7 CHECK REAR LH AND RH DOOR SWITCHES 1 Disconnect door switch harness connector 2 Check c
301. l 30 of the A C auto amp The rear window defogger has an independent ground With power and ground supplied the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window SG When the system is activated the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger switch EL 183 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Wiring Diagram DEF Wiring Diagram DEF BATTERY EL DEF 01 IGNITION SWITCH ON 5 REFER TO EL POWER WITH DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE 27 57 SMART i KONG NEXT PAGE OUT ju REAR WINDOW AY DEFOGGER ON DEFOGGER SWITCH B m B62 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING 112 13 114151617 SUPER 8 9 1011 1213 1415 16 MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK 11213 41516 7 8 9 10 11 11213141 51611718 JUNCTION BOX J B p 19120 21 57 15815960161162168164 GY THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3130 EL 184 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Wiring Diagram DEF m EL DEF 02 PRECEDING PAGE a DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER E69 Ceo 16 E M39 EC UB UB M4 Dei E 7 ya DOOR MIRROR DOOR MIRROR AT ACTUATOR LH ACTUATOR RH WITH DOOR WITH DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER MIRROR
302. l unit that activates the high beam headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated The daytime lights will illuminate once the parking brake is released Thereafter the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake is applied system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit Power is supplied at all times e to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 6 through 20A fuse No 54 located in the fuse and fusible link box and to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 6 through 20A fuse No 55 located in the fuse and fusible link box and to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B Ground is supplied e to daytime light control unit terminal 16 and e to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position power is also supplied e to daytime light control unit terminal 3 e through 10A fuse No 28 located in the fuse block J B and e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B When the ignition switch is in the START position power is supplie
303. l warning lamp should come on EM 80 Q resistor NOTE ECM might store the 1st trip DTC P0180 and the 1st DTC P0464 during this inspection LG If the DTC is stored in memory erase the DTC after necting fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector Refer to EC 89 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION RELATED DIAG NOSTIC INFORMATION OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK ess Ohmmeter Oil pressure T kPa kg cm2 psi Continuity SU Engine running 0 1 0 2 1 3 BR Engine not running b Yes SI Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch and body ground m DIODE CHECK e Check continuity using ohmmeter Diode is functioning properly if test results as shown in the figure at left e Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector instead of on the combination meter assembly Refer to WARNING LAMP wiring diagrams NOTE SG Specification may vary depending on the type of tester Before performing this inspection be sure to refer to the instruction manual for the tester to be used NHEL0051S03 Ohmmeter EL 157 A T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram AT IND Wiring Diagram AT IND NHEL0159 IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START 5 EL POWER LL s OR di NEXT PAGE R Ed Ic OR OR
304. lace hood switch EL 346 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Trunk Room Lamp Switch Check NHEL0123S0403 1 PRELIMINARY CHECK Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder SECURITY indicator lamp should blink every 2 6 seconds Close all doors hood and trunk lid Lock doors with keyfob from inside the vehicle SECURITY indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds Open trunk lid with trunk lid opener switch on driver side door trim within 30 seconds after door is locked SECURITY indicator lamp should turn off OK or NG Trunk room lamp switch is OK LEER CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check trunk room lamp switch TRUNK SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA I MONITOR When trunk lid is open TRUNK SW ON When trunk lid is closed TRUNK SW OFF SEL355W Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 13 PU Y and ground Smart entrance control unit connector Voltage V Trunk lid is open Approx 0 Trunk lid is closed Approx 12 SELO36Y Refer to wiring diagram in 1 332 Trunk room lamp switch is NG p GOTO 3 EL 347 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 3 CHECK TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH 1 Disconnect trunk room lamp switch conn
305. lamp terminal 1 And power is supplied e to trunk room lamp terminal 2 e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B With power and ground supplied interior lamps turn ON INTERIOR LAMP TIMER OPERATION When interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when e unlock signal is supplied from driver s door lock and unlock switch while all doors are closed and key is out of ignition key cylinder e unlock signal is supplied from keyfob or door key cylinder while driver s door is locked and all doors closed e key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed EL 100 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS System Description Conta e driver s door is opened and then closed while key is out of the iginition key cylinder However if the driv er s door is closed with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder after the driver s door is opened with the key removed the timer is operated The timer is canceled when e driver s door is locked e driver s door is opened or e ignition switch is turned ON When driver s door is locked interior room lamp timer is canceled as described before However ignition key hole illumination remains on for about 30 seconds after driver s door has been locked ON OFF CONTROL 1 0165504 When driver side door front passenger doo
306. lectric throttle control actuator ground NUMBER pm MEL236O EL 26 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d GI MA NECTOR CONNECT TO LG NUMBER gt iti il No 2 a SU a CON BR Engine ground NECTOR CONNECT TO NUMBER Toje TCM Transmission control module TCM Transmission control module Terminal No 48 Camshaft position sensor Phase bank 2 control 7 Camshaft position sensor Phase bank 1 MEL237O EL 27 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d BODY HARNESS View with center pillar lower garnish LH removed zi GD CON Body ground oN Seat control unit LH sub harness NECTOR NUMBER 0008504 With sunshade Without rear sunshade With heated seat Without heated seat 9888 Seat control unit Terminal 16 il Power seat switch LH With automatic drive positioner High mounted stop lamp Without rear air spoiler Without rear sunshade High mounted stop lamp Without rear air spoiler With rear sunshade Front door switch LH Seat belt buckle switch LH Front seat cushion Front seat back SE SUIS lis auto changer heater LH sub harness heater LH sub harness Rear door harness LH Rear do
307. lfunctioning of error correction Erroneous data is read from the CD ing or not for CD ROM ROM The errors cannot be corrected LG CD ROM focus CD ROM data reading beam is out of Rough road driving might create CD __ focus skipping like music CD audio unit Perform self diagnosis to confirm CD ROM malfunction whether the inserted disc is malfunction ing or not loader However be read RS EL 411 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta DIAGNOSIS FOR SIGNALS FROM THE CAR __ Description NHEL0300S0301 In Diagnosis for Signals from the mode following input sig nals to the NAVI control unit can be checked on the display Indication Vehicle condition ON Vehicle speed is greater than 0 km h 0 MPH Vehicle Speed OFF Vehicle speed is 0 km h 0 MPH Lighting switch is in 1st or 2nd position m OFF Lighting switch is in OFF position Ignition switch is in ON position i OFF Ignition switch is in position Selector shift lever is in Reverse position Selector shift lever is in other than Reverse OFF 2 position When ignition switch is in ACC position indication will be changed to How to Perform Self Diagnosis 1 Start the engine SCIO OTRO 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the displ
308. lo scope when door lock unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after door lock unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK 3 Voltage 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL396Y Refer to wiring diagram in El 3341 OK or NG Door lock unlock switch is OK Check the following e Ground circuit for front power window switch e Harness for open or short between front power window switch and smart entrance control unit If above systems are normal replace front power window switch EL 353 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN AND HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION WITH CONSULT II With CONSULT II 1 Select ACTIVE TEST in THEFT WAR ALM with CONSULT II 2 Select HORN and touch NHEL0123S09 ACTIVE TEST Vehicle security horn alarm should operate SEL041Y 3 Select HEADLAMP and touch ON ACTIVE TEST HEAD LAMP OFF Vehicle security headlamp alarm should operate SELO42Y NOTE If CONSULT II is not available skip this procedure and go to the nest step OK or NG Vehicle security horn and headlamp alarm operation are OK EL 354 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses
309. lock operation of all windows except for driver s door window When the lock switch is pressed to lock position ground of the front and rear power window switches in the front power window main switch is disconnected This prevents the power window motors from operating RETAINED POWER OPERATION When ignition switch is turned to OFF position START position power is supplied 45 onds to power window relay terminal 2 e smart entrance control unit terminal 46 Ground is always supplied e to power window relay terminal 1 e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 When power and ground are supplied the power window relay continues to be energized and the power win dow can be operated The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened signal s period can be changed by CONSULT II Refer to EL 2721 INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION Power window main switch monitors the power window regulator motor operation the power window position full closed or other for driver s and passenger s side power window by the signals from encoder and limit switch in front power window regulator driver s and passenger s side When power window main switch detects interruption during the following close operation in the driver s side door e automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position e automatic close operation during
310. lt 4 9 5 ground ground 2120 EL 480 HARNESS LAYOUT Main Harness Cont d o 9 8 E 8 pue 99 u 5 5 JTSNOYL JO HOA 91 2 BulyJOM JO ou ui s10129uuoo 159uuoosip og Ssepoo qno1 onsouDeip y os op edas 5 y pue j19euuoo o ans eg e epora uollisod 5 uonisod iol03uuo3 0 00 uoissiusueJ 1 088 19 008 JOMOg z g HH jees pejeeu H1 uouws yees 2 LZIN yun 9L M OLM 298 oipny 198 due O V 02 GSW 898 za JOOP 1981 JOOP SOL 40 SOL 9 1 1OSu S SIAL 2 8 88291 onm
311. ltage Ground Circuit Check 1 012350302 1 Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector 2 Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 43 B M145 terminal 64 B and ground SEL582Y Smart entrance control Smart entrance control unit connector p unit connector DISCONNECT Terminals Continuity 43 Ground 64 Ground SEL034Y EL 342 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses DOOR HOOD AND TRUNK ROOM LAMP SWITCH CHECK Door Switch Check NHEL0123S04 NHEL0123S0401 PRELIMINARY CHECK Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder SECURITY indicator lamp should blink every 2 6 seconds Close all doors hood and trunk lid Lock doors with keyfob from inside the vehicle SECURITY indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds Unlock any door with the door lock knob and open the door within 30 seconds after door is locked SECURITY indicator lamp should turn off OK or NG Door switch is OK and go to hood switch check 1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check door switches DOOR SW RR DOOR SW DR and DOOR SW AS in DATA MONITOR mode with CON SU 1 1 DATA Monitor item Condition Condition DOOBSUDR DOOR SW RR Rear doors switch DOOR SW AS DOOR SW DR Door switch LH P DOOR SW AS Door sw
312. m SEAT T EL SEAT 01 BATTERY REFER TO EL POWER 40A CIRCUIT BREAKER IG W R 4 EL AUT DP w R W R Ga W R le Y POWER SEAT SWITCH RH 543 BACKWARD FORWARD RECLINING SLIDING SWITCH SWITCH FORWARD RECLINING MOTOR gt pu lt P o REFER THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3300 EL 250 5 Wiring Diagram HSEAT Wiring Diagram HSEAT NHEL0093 EL HSEAT 01 WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START FUS L E 10 BLOCK REFER TO EL POWER TE MA LG INDICATOR INDICATOR LAMP LAMP GY R GY GY B B 8561 r1 B561 8571 1 W R R B Y R R B 5 D 4 R B B B R B 1 R B rol e IG 8105 FRONT SEAT CUSHION FRONT SEAT BACK FRONT SEAT CUSHION FRONT SEAT BACK HEATER LH HEATER LH I HEATER RH HEATER RH REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B ____ 1 2 3 4 832 818 61718 Ton THIS IS SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOU T EL SECTION MEL331O EL 251 5 Wiring Diagram HSEAT
313. mission control module 7 gt SUN M 2 SEL434YA System Description 1285 CAN Controller Area Network is serial communication line for real time application It is an on vehicle mul tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation not independent CAN communication control units are connected with 2 communication lines CAN H line CAN L line allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir ing Each control unit transmits receives data but selectively reads required data only EL 445 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Wiring Diagram CAN Wiring Diagram CAN EL CAN 01 DATA LINE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ ELECTRICAL UNITS 12345 f 6 7 8 9 t0 MEL368O EL 446 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses NHEL0326 WORK FLOW NHEL0326S01 1 Print all the data of SELF DIAG RESULTS for ENGINE ABS and A T displayed on CONSULT II Example SELECT DIAG MODE SELF DIAG RESUL
314. more than four ID codes are entered the oldest ID code will be erased Do you want to enter any additional remote controller ID codes ADDITIONAL ID CODE ENTRY IDX Unlock the door then lock again with lock unlock switch LH in power window main switch Open driver side door END After entering ID code check operation of multi remote control system SEL170Y EL 321 ID Code Entry Procedure REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM NOTE If a keyfob 15 lost the ID code of the lost keyfob must be to prevent unauthorized use A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT II However when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known all keyfob ID codes should be erased After all ID codes are erased the ID codes of all remaining and or new keyfob must be re registered To erase all ID codes in memory register one ID code keyfob four times After all ID codes are erased the ID codes of all remaining and or new keyfob must be re registered When registering an additional keyfob the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased If four ID codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered only the oldest code is erased If less than four ID codes are stored in memory when an additional ID code is registered the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfob repeat the procedure Additional ID code entry for e
315. motor EM Retained power operation does not 1 RAP signal circuit Check RAP signal operate properly Driver or passenger side door With CONSULT II switch circuit Check RAP signal with CONSULT II Use ACTIVE LG Smart entrance control unit TEST mode RETAINED PWP in SMART ENTRANCE Refer to 209 If NG go to the step b below EG Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance control unit is present at terminal 6 of sunroof motor Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off When door LH and is closed Check harness between smart entrance control unit and driver or passenger side door switch AT Check driver or passenger side door switch Check smart entrance control unit RS EL 211 DOOR MIRROR Wiring Diagram MIRROR Wiring Diagram MIRROR 0090 EL MIRROR 01 ACC OR ON BLOCK REFER EL POWER TO PU R W gt MIRROR SWITCH lt gt PU W L B Y B PU W L B m e PUW L R I PU W L B M4 DOOR B MIRROR a ACTUATOR lt gt lt gt RIGHT LEFT UP DOWN RIGHT LEFT UP DOWN WARD WARD WARD WARD WARD WARD WARD WARD REFER TO THE FOLLOWING ET repere 11422 5 TJC C32 ejstem 81 037 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B MEL3230 EL 212 AUTO ANTI DAZZLING
316. mp relay terminals 1 and 3 e through 10A fuse No 60 located in the fuse and fusible link box and e to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B When ignition switch is in ON or START position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH When lighting switch is 1ST or 2ND position ground is supplied e to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 and e through lighting switch and body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Tail lamp relay is then energized The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for the cornering lamps to operate With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied to cornering lamp relay terminal 5 e through 10A fuse No 26 located in the fuse block J B Power is supplied to cornering lamp relay terminal 1 e through tail lamp relay terminal 5 when the lighting switch in the 1st or 2ND position Ground is supplied to cornering lamp relay terminal 2 through body grounds
317. n smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 31 R and ground Smart entrance control unit connector 1 A ae Voltage V Unlock button is pushed 0 For approx 30 seconds Unlock button is not pushed Battery voltage SELO29Y Refer to wiring diagram in Check harness open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior lamp EL 317 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION OPERATION CHECK NHEL0195S13 CHECK KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION OPERATION With CONSULT II 1 Select ACTIVE TEST IN MULTI REMOTE ENT with CONSULT II 2 Select INT IGN ILLUM and touch ON ACTIVE TEST IN T IGN ILLUM Key hole illuminate should illuminate SEL350W Without CONSULT II Push unlock button of keyfob with all doors closed and driver s door locked and check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 30 R Y and ground Smart entrance control unit connector A E H S Voltage V a Unlock button is pushed 0 For approx 30 seconds Unlock button is not pushed in Battery voltage SELO30Y Refer to wiring diagram in J OK or NG p System is OK Check the following e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key hole illumina tion e Key hole illumination EL 318 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ID Code Entry
318. nal AUTO position ON Other than AUTO position OFF Displays Illumination outside of the vehicle close to 5V when light close to OV when dark as AUTO LIGT SENS judged from the optical sensor signal LG Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal LART ee te 1ST or 2ND position ON Other than 1ST and 2ND position OFF EC LIGHT SW 2ND 7777 DOOR SW DR Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH DOOR SW AS Indicates ON OFF condition of door switch RH DOOR SW RR Indicates ON OFF condition of rear door switch al Active Test AX Test Description TAIL LAMP Tail lamp relay can be operated by on off operation of the tail lamp SU HEAD LAMP Headlamp relay can be operated by on off operation of the headlamp AUTO LIGHT Night time dimming signal can be operated by on off operation Work Support NHEL0317S0103 Sr Work Description Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes RS AUTO nae SET MODE 1 Normal MODE 2 Sensitive MODE 3 Desensitized MODE 4 Insensitive Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode Selects exterior lamp BT BATTERY SAVER SET battery saver control mode between two modes e MODE 1 ON MODE 2 OFF Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode Selects auto light delay off timer period
319. nal 1 and ground Refer to wiring diagram in El 221 Ignition switch position Terminals 1 Ground Battery voltage If NG check the following e Circuit breaker e Harness for open or short between circuit breaker and seat control unit LH Ground Circuit Check DISCONNECT NHEL0277S0402 GA Check continuity between seat control unit LH terminal 33 and ground O Refer to wiring diagram in EL 2211 Terminals Continuity 33 Ground Yes EL 232 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Sliding encoder check 1 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 18 and ground with CONSULT II or oscilloscope when power seat slide is operated CONNECT 22 HS Seat control unit LH NHEL0277S05 HI Approx 5V LO Approx SEL603W Sliding encoder is OK GO TO 2 20 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground Seat control unit LH gt gt Battery voltage should exist SEL604W OK or NG Replace seat control unit LH EL 233 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 3 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and sliding device LH connector 2 Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and sliding devic
320. nal 3 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B12 without rear sun shade or 46 with rear sunshade SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME With ignition switch turned ON and seat belt unfastened seat belt switch ON warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds Ground is supplied e seat belt switch terminal 1 e to smart entrance control unit terminal 28 Seat belt switch terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B12 without rear sunshade or B46 with rear sunshade EL 161 Gl LG WARNING CHIME Wiring Diagram CHIME Wiring Diagram CHIME NHELO0054 EL CHIME 01 o REFER TO 10A 10A B 29 Lek G 1 JOINT CONNECTOR 14 TO EL TAIL L EL ILL SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT 0142 844 886 REFER TO THE FOLLOWING ee ee SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION SMJ D 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B 281 69 m m L MEL3080 EL 162 WARNING Wiring Diagram CHIME EL CHIME 02 1149 0144 1145 5 WITH SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE LG LG OR SB Eu 0700 E LG OR SB LIGHTING SWITCH SU
321. nals and connector for damage bend and loose connection control module side control unit side and harness side TCM ECM NHEL0326S08 ABS TCS control unit Between ECM and TCM OK or NG No gt EL 452 1 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector F53 2 Check continuity between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 L and 113 R AEQ ECM connector __ Continuity should not exist 109 113 NG gt Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F53 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 L 113 R and ground ECM connector 0 Continuity should not exist 109 113 gt Repair harness between and harness connector F53 EL 453 SEL431Y SEL432Y CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 4 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect TCM connector 2 Check continuity between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 L and 6 R 24 TCM connector TCM _ o coNNECTOR Continuity should not exist 5 6 NG p Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53 SEL440Y 5 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 L 6 R
322. nd is supplied e to trunk lid opener actuator terminal 1 e through smart entrance control unit terminal 63 Then power and ground are supplied trunk lid opener actuator opens trunk lid The trunk lid opener button s pressing time on keyfob can be changed by 5011 1 EL 304 Power Window Opener Operation The front power windows open when the unlock button on keyfob is activated and kept pressed for more than 3 seconds with the ignition key OFF The windows keep opening if the unlock button is continuously pressed The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out e When the unlock button is kept pressed more than 15 seconds e When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated e When the unlock button is released The unlock button s pressing time can be changed by 5011 1 EL 304 Door Lock Unlock and front power window down signal is supplied e through smart entrance control unit terminal 33 e to front power window main switch terminal 8 and e to front power window switch RH terminal 11 EL 296 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Schematlic Schematic NHELO171 mn 25 25 97 QD GE 80 7 s SS HY HOLIMS HOLIMS NIVA MOQNIM LNOSJ MOQNIM amp H3MOd LNOYS HOLIMS 3201 900
323. ndependent In CAN communication control units are connected with 2 communication lines CAN H line CAN L line allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir ing Each control unit transmits receives data but selectively reads required data only 5 MODELS System Diagram NHEL0322S02 NHEL0322S0201 LG G ABS TCS control unit SEL449Y AT Input Output Signal Chart T Transmit R Receive Accelerator pedal position signal R SU Output shaft revolution signal R T TCS self diagnostic signal T BR ABS self diagnostic signal T ST FOR VDC MODELS System Diagram NHEL0322S0202 NHEL0322S03 NHEL0322S0301 VDC TCS ABS Steering wheel control unit angle sensor Input output Signal Chart T Transmit R Receive DX Output shaft revolution signal 1 VDC TCS self diagnostic signal 11 T ABS selt diagnostie signal Engine speed signal n COMMUNICATION System Description Signals ECM Steering wheel angle VDC TCS ABS con TCM sensor trol unit EL 444 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location View with lower instrument center panel removed NHEL0323 Passenger side view with lower instrument panel removed ABS TCS control unit E162 2 x TCM Trans
324. ng area may involve frequent turns and up and or down operation Directional Loca sensing errors may occur leading to tion subsequent route and position mis takes If the position marker does not move to the correct posi tion even after the vehicle has been driven approxi mately 10 km 6 miles per form Store place If required also perform Turntable When the ignition switch is OFF the Adjust Current Location usual situation when the vehicle is MODE EL 424 on a turntable the navigation sys Turntable tem receives no data from the gyro angular velocity sensor When the turntable rotates no directional change is sensed During subse quent vehicle operation directional SEL710V and route errors may occur d Position marker displays a completely different location In circumstances such as those described below GPS signal reception conditions may result in an erroneous position of the position marker Perform Adjust Current Location MODE e When GPS satellite signal reception conditions are poor the position of position marker may be ous If correction is not made immediately the position marker error will be compounded and a completely different location will be indicated In an area where GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good the system can be returned to normal operation e The vehicle is driven aboard a car ferry or is towed for some distance with the ignit
325. ng device LH Seat control unit LH connector 8519 Seat control Rear lifting device LH Continuity T E TT TIT unit LH Lifing encoder rear 28 SEL617W 4 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER REAR SHORT CIRCUIT Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground G Seat control unit LH Terminals Continuity 17 Ground 28 Ground 30 Ground SEL618W OK or NG Replace lifting encoder rear EL 240 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 Sliding motor check LEE CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO SLIDING MOTOR Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 3 or 10 and ground CONNECT amp E Condition Seat control unit LH of sliding switch NHEL0277S09 Terminals Voltage V t SEL619W OK or NG Replace seat control unit LH CHECK SLIDING MOTOR 1 Disconnect sliding device LH connector 2 Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation T Sliding device LH TS 2 Terminals DISCONNECT 1 2 2 1 Operation Forward Backward SEL620W OK or NG Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and sliding motor p Replace sliding motor EL 241 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 Reclining motor check CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO RECLINING MOTOR Check voltage between seat control
326. ng switch and e to combination switch heated steering switch terminal 2 e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 When the heated steering switch is turned ON ground is supplied e through terminal 1 of heated steering switch e to smart entrance control unit terminal 4 Terminal 40 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the heated steering relay terminal 2 With power and ground supplied the heated steering relay is energized Power is supplied e through terminal 5 of heated steering relay to heated steering switch terminal 4 and to combination switch heated steering switch terminal 1 through terminal 3 of combination switch heated steering switch to the heated steering thermostat Ground is supplied for heated steering e through heated steering EL 35 LG SG HEATED STEERING System Description Cont d e to combination switch heated steering switch terminal 4 With power and ground supplied the heated steering heats When the system is activated the heated steering indicator lamp illuminates in the heated steering switch EL 36 HEATED STEERING Wiring Diagram H STRG Wiring Diagram H STRG NHEL0316 Gl 10A REFER TO EL POWER W EM BAT HEATED LG FUSE STEERING H STRG H STRG 14231 SW OUTPUT 08 EG SWITCH
327. nge with rpm SEL364W OK or NG Engine revolution signal is OK NG for open or short between ECM and combination meter EL 135 METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses INSPECTION FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT 1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminal 5 and ground amp Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector NHEL0046S08 Continuity should exist 5 i m NG harness or connector SEL182W OK or NG 2 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Refer to FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK EL 139 OK or NG Replace fuel level sensor unit CHECK HARNESS OPEN OR SHORT 1 Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector 2 Check continuity between combination meter terminal 17 and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminal 2 Continuity should exist 3 Check continuity between combination meter terminal 17 and ground Continuity should not exist level sensor unit and Combination meter y pump connector 819 connector DISCONNECT SEL183W Fuel level sensor unit is OK NG Repair harness or connector EL 136 METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses INSPECTION THERMAL TRANSMITTER p CHECK
328. nit RH low does not Headlamp relay RH Check headlamp relay RH but RH high beam operates Open in the RH low beam cir 2 Check harness between headlamp relay RH termi SU cuit nal 7 and RH headlamp for open circuit RH low beam ground circuit Check harness between RH headlamp and ground Xenon bulb Replace the xenon bulb with other side bulb or new BR HID control unit one headlamps illuminate correctly replace the bulb Replace the HID control unit with other side control ST unit or new one If headlamps illuminate correctly replace the control unit High beam indicator does not work 1 Bulb Check bulb in combination meter RS Open in high beam circuit Check the following Harness between daytime light control unit and com bination meter for an open circuit BT Harness between high beam indicator and lighting switch Exterior lamp battery saver control Door switch LH or RH circuit Check the following does properly Smart entrance control unit Harness between smart entrance control unit and LH or RH door switch for open or short circuit LH or RH door switch ground circuit SG Daytime light control does not operate properly Bulb Fuse check Parking brake switch Parking brake switch circuit Daytime control unit EL 61 LH or RH door switch Check smart entrance control unit 21 364 1 Check bulb Check the foll
329. nit LH Approx 5V should exist SEL633W Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and combination meter DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 13 Seat memory switch check 1 0277516 1 CHECK MEMORY SWITCH 1 Disconnect seat memory switch connector 2 Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals DISCONNECT TS Seat memory switch Switch Memory 1 BP Memory 2 OK or NG SEL634W Check the following e Ground circuit for seat memory switch e Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and seat memory switch Replace seat memory switch EL 248 DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 14 Memory indicator check LEE CHECK INDICATOR LAMP Check indicator lamp illumination OK or NG Replace seat memory switch indicator lamp 10277517 2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INDICATOR LAMP 1 Disconnect seat memory switch connector 2 Check voltage between seat memory switch terminal 5 and ground Seat memory switch Battery voltage should exist SEL635W OK or NG harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and seat memory switch Check the following e 10A fuse No 12 located in the fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between fuse and indicator lamp EL 249 POWER SEAT Wiring Diagram SEAT Wiring Diagra
330. nsmitter with sun visor assembly NG p Repair harness EL 369 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHELO172 Security indicator lamp Fuse block J B 5 222 12222222221 e View with steering wheel and steering column removed IVIS NATS IMMU SELO54X NOTE If customer reports a No Start condition request ALL KEYS to be brought to an INFINITI dealer in case of an IVIS NATS malfunction EL 370 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS System Description System Description IVIS Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System 5 has the following immobilizer functions e Since only IVIS NATS ignition keys whose ID nos have been registered into the and IMMU of IVIS NATS allow the engine to run operation of a stolen vehicle without a IVIS NATS registered key is pre vented by IVIS NATS That is to say IVIS NATS will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of IVIS NATS e All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs except for card plate key have been IVIS NATS registered If requested by the vehicle owner a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the IVIS NATS com NHELO0173 ponents e security indicator
331. nsor and ECM NG p vehicle speed sensor Resistance Approx 250 SEL645W EL 133 METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses With TCS 1 004650302 CHECK ABS CONTROL SIGNAL With CONSULT II 1 Lift up drive wheels 2 Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km h 12 MPH 3 Check signal between combination meter terminal 15 and ground when rotating wheels with engine at idle Use SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE in SUB with CONSULT II Auto Trigger 10 0V Div 50 mS Div SEL938W Without CONSULT II 1 Lift up drive wheels 2 Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km h 12 MPH 3 Check voltage between combination meter terminal 15 and ground when rotating wheels with engine at idle combination meter harness connector Voltage Approx 0 5V SEL939W p 5 control unit is OK Check the following e Harness for open or short between ABS TCS control unit and combination meter e ABS TCS control unit Refer to BR 62 Wheel Sensor or Rotor EL 134 METERS AND GAUGES Trouble Diagnoses INSPECTION ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL 1 0046502 1 CHECK ECM OUTPUT 1 Start engine 2 Check voltage between combination meter terminals 16 and ground at idle and 2 000 rpm Combination meter connector Higher rpm Higher voltage Lower rpm Lower voltage Voltage should cha
332. ntrance control unit connector CONNECT Voltage V Condition of lighting switch 1ST or 2ND Approx 12 6 Condition of lighting switch OFF 0 SEL992X OK or NG gt Lighting switch is OK Check the following e 10A fuse No 60 located in the fuse and fusible link box e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and tail lamp relay EL 169 WARNING Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 KEY SWITCH INSERT SIGNAL CHECK CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check key switch KEY ON SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA When key is inserted KEY ON SW ignition key cylinder KEY ON SW ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder KEY ONSW OFF Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 25 B R and ground Voltage V Condition of key switch Key is inserted 12 12V Condition of key switch Key is removed OV 0 NHEL0055S04 SEL315W Smart entrance control unit connector SEL011Y OK or NG NG gt GO TO 2 CHECK KEY SWITCH INSERT Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4 Key switch connector T DISCONNECT Continu ity Condition of key switch Key is inserted Yes Condition of key
333. o 1 located in fuse block J B Turn ignition switch ON and verify that battery posi sound from speakers Audio unit tive voltage is present at terminal 10 of audio unit MA Check audio unit case ground Remove audio unit for repair Audio unit presets are lost 1 15A fuse Check 15A fuse No 56 located in fuse and fusible EM when ignition switch is Audio unit link box and verify that battery positive voltage is turned OFF present at terminal 6 of audio unit Remove audio unit for repair LG Audio unit controls are 15A fuse Check 15A fuse No 56 located in fuse and fusible operational but no sound Amp ON OFF signal circuit link box Verify battery positive voltage is present at EC is heard from any speaker 3 Speaker amp ground terminal 27 of speaker amp Check harness continuity between audio unit terminal 12 and speaker amp terminal 25 Check harness continuity between speaker amp ter minal 40 and ground Individual speaker is noisy 1 Each speaker Check speaker inoperative Output circuit to each speaker Check the output circuits to each speaker between audio unit and speaker amp between speaker amp and each speaker Woofer does not operate Power supply to woofer Check 15 fuse No 67 located in fuse block J B Amp ON OFF signal circuit Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal Speaker amp ground 48 of woofer SU O
334. oes not operate 2 Grounds E11 E22 and E53 Check grounds E11 E22 and E53 3 Front signal lamp circuit Check the wire between combination switch and front turn signal lamp Rear turn signal lamp LH or RH 1 Bulb Check bulb SU does not operate 2 Grounds T6 and T8 Check grounds T6 and T8 3 Rear turn signal lamp circuit Check the wire between combination switch and rear turn signal lamp RH turn indicators 1 Ground 1 Check grounds M9 M25 and M87 operate ST LH or RH turn indicator does not 1 Bulb Check bulb in combination meter operate 2 Turn indicator circuit Check the wire between hazard switch and combina tion meter BS HA SG Electrical Components Inspection UNIT CHECK DX 1 0034501 e Before checking ensure that bulbs meet specifications e Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher unit as shown Combination flasher unit is properly function ing if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit 1423 a Battery EL 85 CORNERING LAMP System Description System Description The lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and smart entrance control unit The battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit Power is supplied at all times e to tail la
335. of RH headlamp to daytime light control unit terminal 9 through daytime light control unit terminal 6 to terminal 1 of LH headlamp Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of LH headlamp e through daytime light control unit terminals 10 and 16 e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series they operate at half illumination O P E RATIO N NHEL0262S05 After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the OFF 1ST position the headlamp high beam matically turns on Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as conventional light sys tems 1 0262503 With engine stopped With engine running w s Lighting switch Honen x x oleae o o x Headlamp Be e Gerace ana tal lamp HIGH position LOW position FLASH TO 55 position Lamp dims Added functions When starting the engine with the parking brake released the daytime light will come ON When starting the engine with the parking brake pulled the daytime light won t come ON gt O gt x O O O P x O O Z gt EL 54 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM Schematlic Schematic NHEL0263 WA LG S
336. on OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times e to headlamp LH relay terminal 3 through 15A fuse No 68 located in the fuse and fusible link box without xenon headlamp or to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 6 through 20A fuse No 54 located in the fuse and fusible link box with xenon headlamp and to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B and to front fog lamp relay terminal 3 through 15A fuse No 6 located in the fuse and fusible link box When ignition switch is in ON or START position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position power is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 e through 10A fuse No 1 located in the fuse block J B Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 When lighting switch is in 2ND position ground is supplied e to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 e through smart entrance control unit terminal 22 and e through lighting switch and body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Headlamp LH relay is then energized FOG LAMP OPERATION The lamp switch is built into the combination switch The lighting switch must in the 2ND position and LOW B position for fog lamp operation With the fog lamp swit
337. on x Select one of the following SU 5 5 5 RS 7 Select or to adjust the distance change coefficient e make the distance change coefficient smaller touch e make the distance change coefficient larger touch BY 8 Select Set HA SG EL 417 Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta V D Self Diagnosis one of the following __ Self Diagnosis Confirmation adjustment Confirmation Adjustment a Select one of the following Diagnose the Display Diagnosis for Signals from the Car nitialize Loc tion NAVIGATION SYSTEM INITIALIZE LOCATION MODE This procedure is for initializing the current location Perform Ini tialize Location when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a trailer etc Map with grey background appears and the vehicle location can not be adjusted by scrolling the display when the vehicle location in the memory is out of the area of the inserted map data Perform Initialize Location when this occurs NOTE e Only initialize the system when the NAVI control unit is replaced If the system is initialized in other cases it may cause inaccurate positioning of the position marker for a while e Initialize the system outside for receiving the radio wave from the GPS satellite How to Perform 1 030050901 1 Switch the navigation system mode to self diagnosi
338. on Sensor KEYLES Remote Keyless Entry System CKPS POS KS Knock Sensor POWER Power Supply Routing LOAD Electrical Load Signal PRE SE Em System Pressure LPSV Line Pressure Solenoid Valve Power Steering Oil Pressure Sen MAFS Mass Air Flow Sensor PS SEN Sof Supply and Ground REMOTE Audio Remote Control Switch ircui RP SEN Refrigerant Pressure Sensor MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit SEAT Power Seat METER EL Speedometer Tachometer SEN PW Sensor Power Supply Temp and Fuel Gauges SHADE Rear Sunshade MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp SHIFT Shift Lock System MIRROR Power Door Mirror SROOF Sunroof IVIS Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer NATS Syst ho NATS SRS Supplemental Restraint System NAVI Navigation System 22 Start Signa NONDTC Non detectable Items SSV A shift Solenoid Valve A Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater SSV B Shift Solenoid Valve B O2H1B1 EC 1 1 START Starting System O2H1B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater STOP L Stop Lamp Bank 2 TAIL L Parking License and Tail Lamps O2H2B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 1 TCCSIG A T TCC Signal Lock Up O2H2B2 Pip Sensor 2 Heater TCS BR Control System TCV Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid O2S1B1 1 Valve Trunk Lid and Fuel Filler Lid T amp FLID EL O2S1B2 Oxygen Sensor 1 Bank TPS Throttle Position Sensor Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank O2S2B1 EC i
339. onal sensing precision errors may occur when traveling on wind ing roads During map matching the position marker may stray to an adjacent road having a similar shape Subsequent position marker error may occur Directional sensing and distance sensing precision errors may occur because of many roads having a similar shape in the immediate area During map matching the position marker may stray to an adjacent road having a similar shape Subse quent position marker error may When driving on a parallel road map matching errors may occur Subsequent position marker error may also occur EL 437 If the position marker does not move to the correct posi tion even after the vehicle has been driven approxi mately 10 km 6 miles per form Store place If required also perform Adjust Current Location MODE 21 424 LG RS SG NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal Cont d Possible cause T Drive condition Service procedure Vehicle running Indication Parking lot or similar area When the vehicle is driven in a park ing lot or similar area such as in an area not normally marked as a road on map during map matching the system may select nearby roads This error may continue after the vehicle exits the parking area and begins to run on ordinary roads Vehicle operation in a parki
340. oning HOW TO READ SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS NHELO0176S03 Result display screen When no malfunction is detected Result display screen When malfunction is detected SELF DIAG RESULTS DTC RESULTS TIME NO DTC IS DETECTED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED Detected items NATS program card screen terms ECM INT CIRC IMMU CHAIN OF ECM IMMU DIFFERENCE OF KEY CHAIN OF IMMU KEY ID DISCORD IMM ECM SELF DIAG RESULTS DTC RESULTS TIME Detected items CHAIN OF ECM IMMU 0 4 Time data This indicates how many times the vehicle was DIFFERENCE OF KEY driven after the last detection of malfunction If the malfunction is If Scroll Down is detected currently the indicated there are time data will be 0 four or more malfunctions Scroll down When touched ERASE PRINT amp 4 e e When touched the results stored the results in the engine are printed out control module ECM are erased SEL364X IVIS NATS SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART P No Code Malfunction is detected when Self diag nostic result of ENGINE Reference page 5 MAL The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU com FUNCTION munication line is detected EL 378 P1613 Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU In rare case CHAIN OF ECM IMMU might be stored EL 37d during key registration procedure even if the system is no
341. only during specified scratched operation If map CD surface is damaged replace the CD Area place names are not displayed If area place names do not appear on the map display these names may not be available Use the BIRD VIEW flat surface map display function Display output may differ Note the items related to BIRDVIEW below e Priority is given to the display of place names in the direction of vehicle travel e Extended display of vehicle travel distance for both surfaces and steering angle flat directional changes This phenomenon disappears after the display image has been replaced by another one e The names of route and area might vary between the immediate front area and distance front area e Alphanumeric display characters are limited to maintain display simplicity and clarity Display details may differ with time and place e Identical place and road names may appear on the display at more than one location EL 433 LG RS NAVIGATION SYSTEM This Condition Is Not Abnormal Cont d EXAMPLE OF CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION MARKER ERROR p The navigation system reads the vehicle distance and steering angle data Because the vehicle is moving there will be an error in the current position indication After the error appears drive the vehicle for a short distance Stop the vehicle If the position marker does not return to its original position
342. ont LH turning it to LOCK will lock all doors turning it to UNLOCK once unlocks the corresponding door turning it to UNLOCK again within 5 seconds after the first unlock operation unlocks all of the other doors 4 from door key cylinder switch Select unlock mode can be changed by CONSULT II e the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and one or more of the doors are open setting the lock unlock switch to LOCK locks the doors once but then immediately unlocks them Key reminder door mode can be changed by CONSULT II EL 276 DOOR LOCK Schematlic Schematic NHEL0108 WA 12412 3 YOLVNLOV 3201 4000 3201300 3201 4734 INOMJ 1NOMJ 36113 37891505 LG U BR ST RS SG 1 HOLIMS M3ONIAD AJM y UO HY md HY po aes Seba 4000 340815 N 330415 v 5 1034 HOLIAS HOLIMS MOQONIM 93 LNOJ HOLIMS 3201 4008 LNO J HOLIMS 4907 4000 NOILVOINNWWOO 71091409 3ONVHIN3 SS S 6v MEL345O EL 277 POWER DOOR LOCK Wiring Diagram D LOCK Wir
343. ontinuity between door switch terminal 1 and ground Rear door switch ce u Continuity 1 Door switch is pushed P No DISCONNECT Door switch is released Yes SEL156Y Check the following e Rear LH and or RH door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear LH and or RH door switch Replace rear LH and or RH door switch EL 114 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer Cont d 8 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check key switch KEY ON SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II When key is inserted to KEY ON SW i ignition key cylinder KEY ON SW When key is removed from ignition key cylinder KEY ONSW OFF SEL315W Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 25 B R and ground Smart entrance control unit connector Voltage V Condition of key switch Key is inserted 12 12V 3 Condition of key switch Key is removed OV 0 SEL011Y OK or NG NG p 9 CHECK KEY SWITCH INSERT Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4 Key switch connector Continuity p Condition of key switch Key is inserted Yes Condition of key switch Key is inserted No Ch
344. oors hood and trunk lid are closed When a door is open smart entrance control unit terminal 1 2 or 3 receives a ground signal from each door switch When the hood is open smart entrance control unit terminal 6 receives a ground signal e from terminal 1 of the hood switch e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 When the trunk lid is open smart entrance control unit terminal 13 receives a ground signal e from terminal 1 of the trunk room lamp switch e through body grounds T6 and T8 When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob and none of the described conditions exist the vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode Pattern B NHEL0196S0302 To activate the vehicle security system the smart entrance control unit must receive signal indicating any door including hood and trunk lid is opened When the front doors are locked with key lock unlock switch or keyfob and then all doors are closed the vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ACTIVATION Pattern A NHELO01965S0401 With all doors including hood and trunk lid close if the key is used to lock doors front power window main switch terminal 6 receives a ground signal e from terminal 3 of the key cylinder switch LH e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 If this signal or lock signal from keyfob is received by the smart entrance control unit the vehicle security s
345. or EL 313 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d HAZARD REMINDER CHECK NHEL0195S08 CHECK HAZARD INDICATOR Check if hazard indicator flashes with hazard switch Does hazard indicator operate Yes 0 2 p Check hazard indicator circuit CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT II With CONSULT II 1 Select ACTIVE TEST in MULTI REMOTE ENT with CONSULT II 2 Select HAZARD and touch ON ACTIVE TEST HAZARD OFF Hazard indicator should illuminate SEL347W NOTE If CONSULT II is not available skip this procedure and go to the next step OK or NG Hazard reminder operation is OK p Replace smart entrance control unit 3 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT II Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 47 G B or 48 G Y and ground Smart entrance control unit connector Condition of lock or unlock button Voltage V Approx 0 12 Do not push SEL581Y Refer to wiring diagram in 300 NG Replace smart entrance control unit EL 314 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Diagnoses HORN REMINDER CHECK NHEL0195S09 Check if horn sounds with horn switch Does horn operate Yes 2 p Check horn circuit
346. or harness LH 8 088 View with seat back Side finisher LH removed 2 OMA NYA 173 NUMBER Main Engine control harness harness CON NECTOR NUMBER Body ground This sub harness is not shown in Harness Layout EL section EL 28 Gesa rromtsoatecknester 0 sub harness sub harness B581 Front seatback heater LH Rear seat cushion Rear seat back Rear seatback heater LH Rear power window switch LH Rear heated seat switch LH With heated seat CONNECT TO MEL2380 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d CON NECTOR CONNECT TO NUMBER Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump Terminal No 3 VDC TCS ABS control unit With VDC Terminal No 28 LG VDC TCS ABS control unit With VDC Terminal No 29 Seat control unit LH 33 ground NUMBER Shield wire Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Terminal No 44 SU CONNECT TO This sub harness is not shown in Harness Layout EL section MEL2390 EL 29 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d BODY NO 2 HARNESS 1 0008505 CHS With heated seat Hs Without heated seat gee Body ground side finisher RH removed N NUMBER CONNECT TO License lamp RH License lamp LH
347. ove to the memorized position During adjustments indicator LED flashes then illuminates for 5 seconds after adjustment SEL593W EL 218 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER System Description Cont d NOTE 1 Do not keep cancel switch pressed as it will not operate 2 Automatic exiting setting will be performed 3 The driver s seat position see the following Table operates in the order of priority GI The order of priority Operated portion 1 Seat sliding MA 2 Seat reclining 3 Seat front lifting EM 4 Seat rear lifting AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING Exiting positions Driver s seat Slides about 40 mm 1 57 in rear from normal sitting position Remove ignition key from ignition key Open driver s door while ignition key Turn ignition switch from ON to cylinder is inserted Ignition switch is in OFF with driver s door opened position 1 0273506 The seat will slide SEL594W SU AUTOMATIC SET RETURN With driver s seat set to the exiting position operating one of the following procedures moves it to the posi tion previously retained in memory Insert igniton key Close driver s door while ignition key Turn ignition switch from OFF to ST is inserted Ignition switch is in OFF ON or ACC position 55 25 0 65 RS seconds BY Driver s seat
348. ower window switch RH MEL2320 EL 22 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d ENGINE ROOM HARNESS NHELO0008S02 Gl WA T ABS TCS control unit With TCS Terminal No 16 ABS TCS control unit With TCS Terminal No 19 FE a Combination switch Front wiper switch Fuse and fusible link box SU BR SI RS ic Combination switch Lighting switch Terminal No 5 MEL2330 EL 23 GROUND Ground Distribution JAN Preceding page a ground NUMBER jesse 00000 E eb EP Ie oheen Door mirror defogger relay With door mirror defogger Combination switch Lighting switch Terminal No 8 MEL234O EL 24 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d LG Engine ground e XG SN BES Sy 3572 55 ro Em 2 0 SU RS BY NECTOR CONNECT TO NUMBER diagnosis sensor unit SG MEL2350 EL 25 GROUND Ground Distribution Cont d ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS NHELO008S03 NUMBER Heated oxygen sensor 2 Bank 1 Heated oxygen sensor 2 Bank 2 Shield wire Knock sensor Data link connector Terminal No 5 Shield wire E
349. owing 10A fuse No 28 located in fuse block J B Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of daytime light control unit 10A fuse No 21 located in fuse block J B Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 2 of daytime light control unit Check parking brake switch Check harness between parking brake switch and daytime light control unit Check daytime light control unit EL 62 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM Diagnoses DAYTIME CONTROL UNIT RZ 656 14516 E57 1001316 ED tn NI 2117 17 7 SEL576Y DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Terminal Wire T Voltage Item Condition No color Approximate values 1 Alternator When turning ignition switch to Less than 1V When engine is running Battery voltage D GA When turning ignition switch to OFF Less than 1V 2 BR W Start signal 9 When turning ignition switch to ST Battery voltage EQ When turning ignition switch to from ST Less than 1V 6 When turning ignition switch to OFF Less than 1V ri 3 G Power source When turning ignition switch to Battery voltage 02 When turning ignition switch to ST Battery voltage B When turning ignition switch to OFF Less than 1V 4 Powe
350. peed Control Device ASCD System ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC DESCRIPTION CONTROL SYSTEM EL 260 POWER WINDOW System Description System Description NHELO191 Power is supplied at all times e from 40A fusible link letter I located in the fuse and fusible link box e to circuit breaker terminal 1 e through circuit breaker terminal 2 e window relay terminal 3 MA e to front power window main switch terminal 4 and e to front power window switch RH terminal 6 With ignition switch in ON or START position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 10 located the fuse block J B e rear power window switch LH and RH terminal 7 ue e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 Ground is supplied to power window relay terminal 1 e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 Ground is supplied to power window switch LH terminal 8 e through body grounds B7 and B46 with rear sunshade B12 without rear sunshade Ground is supplied to power window switch terminal 8 e through body grounds B106 and 127 The power window relay is energized and power is supplied e through power window relay terminal 5 e to front power window main switch terminal 11 AX e to front power window switch RH terminal 13 e rear power window switch LH and RH terminals 5 MANUAL OPERATION Front Door LH Ground is supplied e to front power window main switch t
351. per wire ANTENNA Using a jumper wire clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body e f reception improves check antenna ground at body surface e reception does not improve check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit 1 0221501 1 0221502 EL 202 AUDIO Wiring Diagram REMOTE Wiring Diagram REMOTE EL REMOTE 01 NHEL0306 BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH ACC OR ON FUSE 15A 10A J B Y G EL POWER E PU LG GND 27 R L Y BR W G W EL B COMP SU R G W 5 BR COMBINATION SWITCH STEERING SWITCH ST RS STEERING WHEEL SWITCH M643 SG REFER TO THE FOLLOWING SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION 5 FUSE BLOCK DX JUNCTION BOX J B GY YT 26 M216 M644 M643 12 04 5067 180120 i THIS CONNECTOR IS NOT SHOWN IN HARNESS LAYOUT EL SECTION MEL3210 EL 203 AUDIO Wiring Diagram W ANT Wiring Diagram NHEL0085 EL W ANT 01 FUSE 5 10 BLOCK EL POWER IGNITION SWITCH ACC OR ON O 2K WINDOW ANTENNA MAIN WINDOW ANTENNA SUB G W 505 MEOS TO AUDIO UNIT IL 111 a M503 M504 L B CONDENSER ANTENNA
352. plied e toterminal 2 of LH headlamp e through daytime light control unit terminals 10 and 13 and e through lighting switch terminals 6 and 5 e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Ground is also supplied e to terminal 2 of RH headlamp e through daytime light control unit terminals 9 and 14 e 10 combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator e through lighting switch terminals 9 and 8 e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 With power and ground supplied the high beam headlamps and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL While the headlamp is turned ON by 2ND of light switch the 5 minute timer is activated when the ignition switch is turned from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF Continuity between terminals 21 and 22 and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will be disturbed after 5 minutes then the headlamps will be turned off While the headlamp is turned ON by AUTO of light switch the 5 minute timer is activated when the ignition switch signal changes from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF and either one of LH or RH front door switch ON signal is input The auto light delay off timer is activated as the following e When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated the timer in operation is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset e When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated
353. ption RAP signal s power supply period can be changed by mode setting Selects RAP signal s power supply period between two steps e MODE 1 45 sec MODE 2 OFF MODE 3 2 min Trouble Diagnoses NHEL0225 Possible cause Repair order 10A fuse 40A fusible link and Check 10A fuse No 10 located in fuse block J B E90 circuit breaker 40A fusible link letter i located in fuse and fusible Grounds M9 M25 and M87 link box and E90 circuit breaker Turn ignition switch Sunroof switch ON and verify battery positive voltage is present at Sunroof switch circuit terminals 1 and 6 of sunroof motor Sunroof motor Check grounds M9 M25 M87 Check sunroof switch Check harness between sunroof switch and sunroof motor Replace sunroof motor Sunroof switch Check sunroof switch Sunroof switch circuit Check the harness between sunroof motor and sun roof switch EL 210 50 Diagnoses Power sunroof cannot be operated 1 Full closed position not initial Initialize full closed position or closed fully ized Check the following Sunroof slide mechanism Check obstacles in sunroof etc GI Sunroof switch Check worn or deformed sunroof Sunroof switch circuit Check sunroof sash tilted too far inward or outward Sunroof motor Check sunroof switch MA Check harness between sunroof motor and sunroof switch Replace sunroof
354. r LH door is opened the interior room lamp turns on while the interior room lamp switch is in the DOOR position When any door is opened step lamps turn ON INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL The lamp turns off automatically when interior lamp step lamp spot lamp and or vanity mirror illumination is illuminated with the ignition key is in OFF position if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the lamp switch is in ON position for more than 10 minutes After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system the lamps illuminate again when e driver s door is locked or unlocked e door is opened or closed e key is removed from ignition key cylinder or inserted in ignition key cylinder Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of 5011 1 EL 109 EL 101 LG 0212 ILLUMINATION FRONT STEP LAMP RH FRONT STEP LAMP LH Schematic HI HOLIM 1404 HOLIMS MOO INN HOLIMS 390 INN 4907 3000 201 3000 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Schematic HM HOLIMS MOGNUR MOUNT ndo dd 1 083 INOW J INOINOINQANO LINN 1081 3ONVHLIN3 LYVWS
355. r full levels of coolant engine oil and fuel and spare tire jack and tools Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver s seat Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting screw Front bumper 1 the distance between the screen and the center of the fog lamp lens as shown alt lett Main axis of light 2 Remove front fog lamp For detail refer to BODY END in BT section 3 Turn front fog lamps ON 10 m 33 ft 4 Adgjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high inten Vertical centerline sity zone is 87 mm 3 43 in below the height of the fog lamp ahead of left fog lamp centers as shown at left e When performing adjustment if necessary cover the Top edge Vertical centerline lamps and opposite fog lamp Intensity zone ahead of right fog lamp Floor to center of fog lamp lens height of fog lamp centers 87 3 43 High intensity areas Unit mm EL 80 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS System Description System Description TURN SIGNAL OPERATION M With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is sup plied GI e through 10A fuse No 26 located in the fuse block J B to hazard switch terminal 2 e through terminal 1 of the hazard switch e combination flasher unit terminal 1 e through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit EM e
356. r source 09 When turning ignition switch to Battery voltage MENI When turning ignition switch to OFF Battery voltage rd 5 Power source When turning ignition switch to Battery voltage ce When turning ignition switch to OFF Battery voltage EL 62 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Eds Wire Voltage Item color BEEN values LH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Battery voltage HI position Gl When releasing parking brake with engine running and Approx half battery turning lighting switch to OFF daytime light operation voltage MA CAUTION Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P osition 42017 EM RH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Battery voltage HI BEAM position LG When releasing parking brake with engine running and Approx half battery turning lighting switch to OFF daytime light operation voltage LG B RH hi beam ground LH hi beam ground GE A CAUTION Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P position When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Less than 1V HI BEAM position AT When releasing parking brake with engine running and Approx half battery turning lighting switch to OFF daytime light operation voltage
357. ration of initialization refer to 5011 1 Operation Manual IVIS NVIS is malfunctioning Replace ECM Ref part No B Perform initialization with CONSULT II For the operation of initialization refer to CONSULT II Operation Manual IVIS NVIS EL 382 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5 Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Self diagnostic results DIFFERENCE OF KEY displayed on 5011 1 screen CONFIRM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DIFFERENCE OF KEY displayed on 5011 1 screen NHEL0177S08 SELF DIAGNOSIS DTC RESULTS TIME DIFFERENCE OF KEY Is CONSULT II screen displayed as above p GOTO 2 p SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT II Perform initialization with CONSULT II Re register all IVIS NATS ignition key IDs For initialization and registration of IVIS NATS ignition key IDs refer to CONSULT II operation manual IVIS NVIS IMMU INITIALIZATION SEL293W INITIALIZATION FAIL THEN IGN KEY SW OFF AND ON AFTER CONFIRMING SELF DIAG AND PASSWORD PERFORM C U INITIALIZATION AGAIN SEL297W NOTE If the initialization is not completed or fails CONSULT II shows above message on the screen Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re registered IVIS NATS ignition key p lIgnition key ID was unregistered Ref part
358. relays LH and RH are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps LH and RH The headlamps flash intermittently When the vehicle security system is triggered ground is supplied intermittently e from smart entrance control unit terminal 42 e 10 vehicle security horn relay 2 terminal 2 When vehicle security horn relay 2 is energized ground is supplied intermittently e to vehicle security horn relay 1 terminal 2 and e to horn relay terminal 1 When vehicle security horn relay 1 and horn relay are energized then power is supplied to vehicle security horn and horn The horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION To deactivate the vehicle security system a door or trunk lid must be unlocked with the key or keyfob When the key is used to unlock the door front power window main switch terminal 19 receives a ground sig nal e from terminal 1 of the LH key cylinder switch EL 327 NHELO0196S05 LG SU 55 25 RS SG IDX VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM System Description Cont d When the smart entrance control unit receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob the vehicle security system is deactivated Disarmed phase PANIC ALARM OPERATION Remote keyless entry system m
359. reroute function has been turned OFF and the recommended route is not followed Search for a recommended route between the vehi cle s current location and the destination area Displayed only when the destination area has been set When destinations have been entered route guidance OFF or destination have been reached Route Info Detour Edit Route and Route Clac are displayed EL 397 LG RS SG NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description Display with Pushed SETTING Switch NHEL0296S0403 Edit Address Book Tel x Guidance Volume Quieter Louder SEL614X The function of each icon is as follows Icon Description The current location can be stored in the Address Save Current Location Book Many adjustments and settings can be made for maxi Sole Sens mum driving pleasure and convenience Edit Address Book The Address Book data can be edited The volume and or on off of voice prompt can be trolled joystick 398 0297 Schematlic NAVIGATION SYSTEM Schematic 2 25 GS 17 mm 67 GA 7 58 2 A oe SOL S8V IM ME SOL 1_ INO33j 1NO J 3109IH3A SLO CINN 7031409 YOLINOW INOW 4313
360. result of keyfob function check with CONSULT II is OK keyfob is not malfunctioning Trunk lid does not open when trunk opener button 1 Keyfob battery and function check 307 is continuously pressed 2 Trunk lid opener actuator check E 3 Key switch insert check 4 Replace keyfob Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure NOTE If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT II is OK keyfob is not malfunctioning EL 306 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses KEYFOB BATTERY AND FUNCTION CHECK NHEL0195S02 1 CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY Remove battery refer to EL 323 and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals and Voltage V 2 5 3 0 NOTE Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly Stamped SEL237W OK or NG GO TO 2 2 CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT II Check keyfob function LK BUTTON SIG BUTTON SIG TRUNK BTN SIG PANIC BTN UN BUTTON ON and LK UN BTN DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II When pushing each button of keyfob the corresponding monitor item woman should turned as follows LK BUTTON SIG ON Pushing LOCK LK BUTTON SIG UN BUTTON SIG ON Pushing UNLOCK UN BUTTON SIG TRUNK BTN SIG ON Pushing TRUNK TRUNK BTN SIG Pushing PANIC PANIC BTN SIG PANIC BIN ON Pushing UNLOCK UN BUTTON ON UN BUTTON ON ON Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK LK UN BTN
361. retained power operation e manual close operation during retained power operation Power window main switch controls driver s and passenger s side power window regulator motor for open and the power window will be lowered about 150 mm 5 91 in EL 263 LG POWER WINDOW Schematic Schematic NHELO103 248208 SZ O 2 d 550 raw 8 9 Zr 55558 SE Ao 55 2080 2006 55 H 85 25 4 5 d zo T 330 row 11 i TTT 2 ofo 2006 H 2 8 gt 52 2 wo zr gt lt lt 3 58 E X 8 Bi x US Ez 5 rm na LJ MEL3380 EL 264 POWER WINDOW Wiring Diagram WINDOW Wiring Diagram WINDOW NHELO104 BATTERY IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START WITH REAR SUNSHADE WITHOUT REAR SUNSHADE FUSE REFER TO EL POWER 10 J B G EL WINDOW 05 gt TO EL WINDOW 06 L dc NEXT PAGE mmm vR 5 gt FUSE DOOR SW DOOR SW DR AS LG R L B B mmm w gt e TO EL WINDOW 05 B B gt _ gt L TO WIL do EL WINDOW 06 B B B B B B B m m m m s ed Lod Le e
362. rminals 109 L and 113 ECM connector ECM Approx 108 1320 109 113 4377 NG p Repair harness between VDC TCS ABS control unit and TCM CIRCUIT CHECK E CHECK CONNECTOR 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Check following terminals and connector for damage bend and loose connection control module side and harness side e CM e Harness connector F53 e Harness connector M223 NG terminal or connector NHEL0331S10 2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect TCM connector 2 Check resistance between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 L and 6 R TCM connector TCM 5 6 108 1320 NG p Repair harness between steering wheel angle sensor TCM SEL439Y OK or NG EL 466 CAN SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses STEERING WHEEL ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK 1 CHECK CONNECTOR 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Check the terminals and connector of steering wheel angle sensor for damage bend and loose connection sensor side and harness side NG p Repair terminal or connector NHEL0331S11 OK or NG 2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect steering wheel angle sensor connector 2 Check resistance between steering wheel angle sensor harness connector M218 terminals 5 L and 4 R AEG Steering wheel angle sensor connector
363. rness connector M227 and harness connector M223 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between steering wheel angle sensor harness connector M218 terminals 5 L 4 R and ground E G Steering wheel angle sensor connector 415 Continuity should not exist 4 5 SEL572Y OK or NG K NG Repair harness between steering wheel angle sensor and harness connector M227 e Repair harness between harness connector M227 and harness connector M223 EL 471 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 10 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect TCM connector 2 Check continuity between TCM harness connector F51 terminals 5 L and 6 R 24 TCM connector TCM __ Continuity should not exist 5 6 NG Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53 SEL440Y CHECK 55 5 Check continuity between harness connector F51 terminals F51 L 6 and ground connector Continuity should not exist 5 6 OK or NG SEL441Y NG p Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F53 2 ECM TCM INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION Check components inspection Refer to INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION EL 472 OK or NG Connect all the connectors and diagnose again Refer to Work Flow EL 460 NG gt ECM and or
364. rocedure Data link connector CONSULT II Inspection Procedure an INT LAMP BATTERY SAVER UNT 1 Turn ignition switch OFF 2 Connect CONSULT II and CONSULT II CONVERTER to NHEL0213 NHEL0213S01 the data link connector Ys p gt A 3 Turn ignition switch ON 4 Touch START NISSAN BASED VHCL CONSULT I SELECT SYSTEM SMART ENTRANCE AIR BAG 5 Touch SMART 6 Touch INT LAMP or BATTERY SAVER REAR DEFOGGER KEY WARN ALM LIGHT WARN ALM SEAT BELT ALM INT LAMP BATTERY SAVER 7 Select diagnosis mode DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST and WORK SUPPORT are available for INT LAMP and BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE TEST WORK SUPPORT EL 108 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS CONSULT II Application Items CONSULT II Application Items 0214 INT LAMP Data Monitor NHEL0214S01 NHEL0214S0101 Monitored Description IGN ON SW Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch MA DOOR SW RR Indicates ON OFF condition of ignition switch KEY ON SW Indicates ON OFF condition of key switch DOOR SW DR Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch LH DOOR SW AS Indicates ON OFF condition of front door switch RH LG LOCK SW DR AS Indicates ON OFF condition of front door lock switch UNLK SW DR AS Indicates ON OFF condition of front door lock switc
365. round is supplied to wiper switch terminal 17 through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 1 005750101 When the wiper switch is placed in the LO MIST position ground is supplied e through terminal 14 of the wiper switch e wiper motor terminal 3 With power ground supplied the wiper motor at low speed When the wiper switch is placed in the HI position ground is supplied e through terminal 16 of the wiper switch e wiper motor terminal 1 With power ground supplied the motor at high speed Auto Stop Operation NHEL0057S0102 With wiper switch turned OFF wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield base SU When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with wiper switch OFF ground is provided from terminal 14 of the wiper switch to wiper motor terminal 3 in order to continue wiper motor operation at low speed BR Ground is also supplied through terminal 13 of the wiper switch ST to wiper motor terminal 2 e through terminal 6 of the wiper motor and e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 RS When wiper arms reach base of windshield wiper motor terminals 2 and 4 are connected instead of terminals 2 and 6 Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position Intermittent Operation The wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approx
366. rt the engine 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display 3 Push SETTING switch 4 Select System Setting 5 Select Color Display color will change to Day mode Night 6 Select MAP switch then the display will go back to the cur rent location map NOTE e Display color can be changed independently when light LC ing switch is turned on and off e Initial setting of the color is as follows When lighting switch is turned off Day mode EC When lighting switch is turned on Night mode 22 Darker Brighler Contrast AT Brightness Setting NHEL0301S0802 DISPLAY SETTING 1 Start the engine 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display SU 3 Push SETTING switch 4 Select System Setting 5 Select Bright or Dark to adjust the brightness of display BR 6 Select MAP switch then the display will go back to the cur rent location map Display brightness adjusted independently when light ing switch is turned on and off BS SG HEADING MODE NHEL0301S09 Start the engine ID Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display Push SETTING switch Select System Setting Select Heading SYSTEM SETTING x Select one of the following T 215019 Setting EL 423 Control Panel HEADING
367. s Door switch connector Door switch connector Front LH Rear LH rs Front RH ES ET Rear Pome Continuity Front door switches Open SEL192W OK or NG Check the following e Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch P Replace door switch EL 310 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses KEY SWITCH INSERT CHECK CHECK KEY SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check key switch KEY ON SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II When key is inserted to KEY ON SW 22 ignition key cylinder KEY ON SW ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder KEY ONSW OFF SEL315W Without CONSULT II Check voltage between control unit harness connector E144 terminals 25 B R and ground 10195505 Smart entrance control unit connector Voltage V Condition of key switch Key is inserted Approx 12 Condition of key switch Key is removed 0 CONNECT SEL022Y Refer to wiring diagram in EL 298 OK or NG NG gt GO TO 2 2 _ KEY SWITCH INSERT Check continuity between key switch harness connector E154 terminals 3 and 4 Key switch connector Continuity p Condition of key switch Key is inserted Yes Condition of key switch Key is inserted No OK or NG Check the following
368. s activated when the ignition 1 0268501 EL 86 CORNERING LAMP System Description Cont d switch signal changes from ON or START to OFF ACC OFF and either one of LH or RH front door switch ON signal is input The auto light delay off timer is activated as the following When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the timer is activated the timer in operation is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontin ued and the 45 second timer is reset When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 5 minute timer is reset When all the door switch ON signals are input while the timer is activated the timer is discontinued and the 45 second timer is reset Exterior lamp battery saver control mode and auto light delay off timer period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT II EL 47 When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND after cornering lamp is turned off by the battery saver control ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11 and to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 Then cornering lamp illuminates again EL 87 Gl MA LG SU 55 25
369. s by ing both and D N switches at the same time for more than 5 seconds 2 Select Confirmation adjustment 3 Select Initialize Location Then the previous screen is dis played 4 Push MAP switch and then push SETTING switch 5 Select System Setting EL 418 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta 6 Select GPS Information SYSTEM SETTING Select one of the following MA 7 More than one GPS satellite icon turns green It may take 1 LG to 15 minutes NOTE Drive the vehicle for a while in order to change the receiving condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite if the GPS GPS Information Previous Calculation Longitude Latitude i Altitude icon does not turn green The driving distance which is necessary depends on the receiving condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite 4 8 Push switch and check the following e Confirm that the GPS icon on the map turns green e Then the position marker should show the current location 1 e Position marker rotates corresponding to the movement of the vehicle 9 Initialization is completed ST RS BY SG EL 419 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Control Panel Mode Control Panel Mode APPLICATION ITEMS NHEL0301S01 Mode Reference page Display Auto Open
370. s may lead to a melted bulb and or bulb LA socket HIGH BEAM NHEL0259S02 1 Turn the bulb clockwise LH high beam counterclockwise way RH high beam high beam 2 Remove the bulb 2 vean PENA 3 Install in the reverse order of removal EL 50 Zn vertical Center of low beam bulb 125 7 4 95 Aiming allowable area 7 99 5 3 917 1 NS NN HEADLAMP FOR USA Aiming Adjustment Aiming Adjustment NHEL0260 TES LOW BEAM 1 0260501 1 Turn headlamp low beam 2 Use agjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment e First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then make adjustment by loosening the screw adjustment Screen Vertical center line ahead of head lamps V 333 13 11 Basic illuminating 130 5 12 area for adjustment Horizontal Cut off line center line of head lamps Screen Cut off line Unit mm in SEL957VA EL 51 HEADLAMP FOR DAYTIME SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHEL0261 Instrument panel driver side So sensor Fuse block J B mj hn 12222202221 Smart entrance control unit Front door gt LH 2 System Description The headlamp system for Canada vehicles contains daytime light contro
371. se block J B GI to key switch terminal 3 and to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 MA When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder power is interrupted e through key switch terminal 4 to smart entrance control unit terminal 25 EM With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B LG e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 Ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64 e through body grounds terminals M9 M25 and M87 When the front driver side door is opened ground is supplied FE e through body grounds B7 and B46 with rear sunshade or B12 without rear sunshade e to front door switch LH terminal 3 e from front door switch LH terminal 2 e to smart entrance control unit terminal 1 When the front passenger side door is opened ground is supplied AX through body grounds B106 and 127 e to front door switch RH terminal 3 e from front door switch RH terminal 2 e to smart entrance control unit terminal 2 When any other door except front door is opened ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit termi BIR nal 3 in the same manner as the front door switch When the front driver side door is unlocked by the central switch the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal ST e through body grounds terminals M9 M25 and M87 e to door lock
372. self diagnosis will end after the vehicle speed sensor diagnosis is performed 2 Diagnosis ends after self diagnostic results have been indicated for 10 minutes if left unattended EL 226 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER On Board Diagnosis MALFUNCTION CODE TABLE In this mode malfunction code is indicated by the number of flashes the automatic drive positioner indicator lamps indicator lamp 1 indicator lamp 2 as shown below Detected items Indication of seat memory switches 1 and 2 Explanation Seat sliding e TL 1 While the seat motors Seat reclining are moving for 2 5 seconds IND1 IND2 if the number of seat LG sliding reclining lifting IND1 IND2 2 times or less the seat device is determined EG Seat lifting rear IND1 IND2 If the vehicle speed sensor IND1 IND2 output of less than 7 km h Vehicle speed 4 MPH is detected the sensor circuit vehicle speed sensor is determined to be 1 0 5 malfunctioning malfunction the above items BR SEL597W Detected Detected Nana Diagnostic procedure Diagnostic procedure PROCEDURE 2 PROCEDURE 5 Sliding encoder check Lifting encoder rear check sliding PROCEDURE 6 PROCEDURE 9 Sliding motor check Lifting motor rear check lifting PROCEDURE 3 VEG Seat Reclining encoder check PROCEDURE 12 reclining PROCEDURE 7 Vehicle
373. speed sensor check Reclining motor check PROCEDURE 4 Lifting encoder front check PROCEDURE 8 Lifting motor front check Seat lifting front EL 227 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses WORK FLOW 0277 1 0277501 CHECK IN LISTEN TO CUSTOMER COMPLAINT ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS 1 Does self diagnostic results exist No SYMPTOM BASIS Yes Repair Replace according to Perform diagnostic procedure the self diagnostic results according to the symptom chart 2 the next ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS 1 REPAIR REPLACE FINAL CHECK Confirm that the malfunction is completely fixed by operating the system OK CHECK OUT SEL599W EL 228 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses PRELIMINARY CHECK 1 0277502 Are automatic operation NG Both operation No seat system functions oper SYMPTOM 1 and manual operation ate el Some of the seat system func SYMPTOM 2 tions do not operate effected functions during 1 matic operation some all functions do not operate during manual operation LG NG Automatic Some functions tions do operate functions I No automatic operation functions SYMPTOM 5 operate AT Only storing memory function SYMPTOM 6 does not operate AX Memorized position set proce
374. ss AIR BAG MODULE HORN SWITCH To main harness 5 21 y VOL DOWN DRIVE COMP TRIP MEL243O EL 34 HEATED STEERING Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and Harness Connector Location NHELO0314 Fuse block J B Behind A C fan control unit of Tes dash side tent contrat unt 6148 89 614 gt gt 7 271 22 E 2 Heated steering Heated steering switch relay M167 Driver side view with ud Sak instrument panel removed SEL452Y System Description 2 The heated steering system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit The heated steering system operates only for approximately 30 minutes after heated steering switch is turned ON Then the heated steering system is turned OFF when the heated steering switch is turned again or ignition switch OFF within 30 minutes after heated steering system ON Power is supplied at all times e to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 e through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse block J B e to heated steering relay terminal 3 e through 10A fuse No 72 located in the fuse and fusible link box With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B e to heated steering relay terminal 1 and e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 Ground is supplied e to terminal 2 and 5 of heated steeri
375. switch Key is inserted No SEL549Y Check the following e 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch p Replace key switch EL 170 WARNING Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CHECK CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check seat belt buckle switch SEAT BELT SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II Without CONSULT II When seat belt is fastened SEAT BELT SW ON When seat belt is released SEAT BELTSW OFF SEL317W 1 Turn ignition switch ON 2 Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 28 OR and ground NHEL0055S05 Smart entrance control unit connector Voltage V Condition of seat belt buckle switch Fastened Approx 5 Condition of seat belt buckle switch Unfastened 0 SEL994X OK or NG Seat belt buckle switch is OK NG p GOTO2 2 CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when seat belt is fastened and unfastened Seat belt buckle switch connector Yn Continuity 2 TS Seat belt is fastened No DISCONNECT Seat belt is unfastened Yes OK or NG SEL313W Check the following e Seat belt buckle switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between smart en
376. t SEL302W OK or NG GO TO 3 Check the following e 15A fuse No 59 located in the fuse and fusible link box e Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector Ref Part No C1 EL 379 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5 Trouble Diagnoses 3 CHECK IGN SW ON SIGNAL 1 Turn ignition switch ON 2 Check voltage between terminal 7 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT II or tester IMMU connector M42 DISCONNECT OK or NG Battery voltage should exist SEL303W gt GO TO 4 Check the following e 15A fuse 20 located in the fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector Ref part No C2 4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU 1 Turn ignition OFF 2 Check harness continuity between IMMU terminal 4 and ground IMMU connector V 4 DISCONNECT Continuity should exist B 2171 m SEL304W Repair harness Ref part No C3 EL 380 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses 5 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect ECM connector 2 Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 116 and IMMU terminal 1 DISCONNECT j H S x IMMU connector ECM _ O CONNECTOR 116 Continuity should exist OR OR gt GO TO 6 p harness or connector Ref part No C4 SEL305W OK or NG CHECK COMMU
377. t CD loading slot 029650201 CD ejection switch e The gyro angular speed sensor and the CD ROM drive are built in units that control the navigation functions e Signals are received from gyro the vehicle speed sensor and the GPS antenna Vehicle location is determined by com bining this data with the data contained in the CD ROM map Locational information is shown on liquid crystal display panel CD ROM Driver NHEL0296S0202 Maps traffic control regulations and other pertinent information can be easily red from the CD ROM disc NHEL0296S02 EL 392 Vehicle steering direction Ceramic electric sensor Sensed Sensed 8 27 voltage Ceramic piezo electric voltage sensor FB Calculated value A a a During ri EN x LA ES MM t d essc TANT A SHOES NOE D t 6 i T y AM RAADHUISSTRAAT BIRDVIEWO NAVIGATION SYSTEM Map CD ROM Gyro Angular Speed Sensor System Description Cont d 1 029650203 CD ROM has maps traffic control regulations and other pertinent information To improve CD ROM map matching and route determination functions the CD ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format Therefore the use of a CD
378. t ECM connector and harness connector F53 2 Check continuity between harness connector F48 terminals 109 L and 113 f 52 _ O CONNECTOR Continuity should not exist 109 113 SEL431Y OK or NG Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F53 EL 468 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses 3 HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between ECM harness connector F48 terminals 109 L 113 R and ground ECM connector 0 as Continuity should not exist 109 113 OK or NG SEL432Y NG p harness between ECM and harness connector F53 4 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect harness connector M2 2 Check continuity between harness connector 2 terminals 22 L and 23 R Harness connector Ill ll 12291 Continuity should not exist SEL567Y OK or NG NG p Repair harness between harness connector M223 and harness connector M2 5 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M2 terminals 22 L 23 R and ground 24 Harness connector rr L 111111111 2223 Continuity should not exist SEL568Y OK or NG NG Repair harness between harness connector M223 and harness connector M2 EL 469 SYSTEM FOR MODELS Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 6
379. t connector If above systems are normal replace the front power window switch EL 116 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer Cont d T CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL LOCKIUNLOGK SIGNAL _ With CONSULT II Check front door key cylinder switch KEY CYL 5 CYL UN SW in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK KEY CYL LK SW ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK KEY CYL UN SW ON SEL342W Without CONSULT II 1 Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned LOCK or UNLOCK 2 Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after key is turned LOCK or UNLOCK Neutral Voltage 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL397Y Replace smart entrance control unit NG gt GO TO 12 EL 117 INTERIOR STEP 5 VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 42 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH 1 Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector D8 2 Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals Door key cylinder 0
380. t hands e When checking body side harness with a circuit tester be certain to disconnect the harness con nector from the xenon headlamp e When the xenon headlamp is lit the xenon bulb must be installed in the headlamp housing Never turn on xenon headlamp if the bulb is out of the headlamp housing CAUTION Make sure to install the bulb securely if the xenon bulb is improperly installed in its socket high ten sion current leaks occur This may lead to a melted bulb and or bulb socket Symptom Neither headlamp operates LH headlamp low and high beam does not operate but RH head lamp low and high beam does operate RH headlamp low and high beam does not operate but LH headlamp low and high beam does operate LH high beam does not operate but LH low beam operates Possible cause 10A fuse Lighting switch Smart entrance control unit 20A fuse Headlamp LH relay Headlamp LH relay circuit Lighting switch circuit Smart entrance control unit 20A fuse Headlamp RH relay Headlamp RH relay circuit Lighting switch circuit Smart entrance control unit Bulb 15A fuse Headlamp LH relay Headlamp LH relay circuit Headlamp LH high beams cir cuit Lighting switch Lighting switch circuit Daytime light control unit EL 60 Repair order Check 10A fuse No 13 located in fuse block J B Verify battery positive voltage is present at termina
381. t is adjusted to the proper positions for the driver automatically in 3 different ways MEMORY AUTOMATIC SET AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING and AUTOMATIC SET RETURN Automatic Drive Posi tioner ADP CONDITIONS INHIBITING AUTOMATIC OPERATION Automatic memory setting procedures are suspended under any of the following conditions 1 When vehicle speed is more than 7 km h 4 MPH When driver s side power seat switch is turned on When any two of the switches set switch and memory switches 1 and 2 are turned ON NHEL0273S02 When cancel switch is turned When selector lever is in any position other than P When ignition switch is turned to START position Operation resumes when ignition switch is returned to ON 7 When detention switch malfunction is detected e Detention switch failure is sensed when detention switch remains off for at least 2 seconds at a vehicle speed of greater than 7 km h 4 MPH FAIL SAFE SYSTEM Output Failure NHEL0273S0301 When the ignition switch is in the ON position if any of the parts indicated in the following chart move more than the specified amount within a period T2 when no ON input is sent from any of the switches indicated in the following chart or an output from the automatic drive positioner is not produced an output failure is sensed Motor operation will be suspended automatically and all automatic operations will be ineffective
382. t malfunctioning NATS MAL FUNCTION P1612 NATS MAL IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID FUNCTION verification between key ID and IMMU is NG EL 383 P1615 NATS MAL IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal FUNCTION EL 384 P1614 NATS MAL The result of ID verification between IMMU and is FUNCTION System initialization is required EL 385 P1611 EL 374 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM 5 CONSULT II Cont d P No Code Malfunction is detected when Detected items NATS program Self diag screen terms nostic result of ENGINE 1 Reference When the starting operation is carried out five more times consecutively under the following conditions 5 NATS will shift the mode to one which prevents the 35 engine from being started e Unregistered ignition key is used e IMMU or ECM s malfunctioning DON T ERASE BEFORE All engine trouble codes except IVIS NATS trouble EL 378 CHECKING ENG DIAG code has been detected in ECM NATS MAL LOCK MODE FUNCTION P1610 LG RS EL 375 IVIS INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NATS Trouble Diagnoses Trouble Diagnoses NHELO177 WORK FLOW CHECK IN Listen to customer complaints or request Get symptoms NOTE If customer reports a No Start condition request ALL KEYS to be bro
383. tes will be re searched at this time Automatic search does not func Vehicle is not running on search object route tion road indicated by orange brown or red line Use the RE ROUTE mode to search again Unable to select detour route Vehicle is not running on recommended route or return to the recommended route Detour route search results are All possible conditions were considered but This is not abnormal identical to previous search results are the same More than five way points cannot be specified at the same time Break down into smaller segments and perform search Unable to set a way point More than five way points have been previ ously set and not cleared Voice guide is only available at certain inter sections marked with 7 In some cases the Unable to select starting point Starting point will normally be your present during route edit location during route edit Park the vehicle safe area perform Cannot select certain menu items While vehicle is running operation Voice Guide Information NHEL0304S0302 Symptom Possible cause Repair order guide is not available even when the vehicle makes turn Return to recommended route or reperform Voice guide does function Vehicle is not running on recommended route route search Voice guide is OFF Set voice guide to the ON position Route guide is canceled Turn the route guide
384. through body ground M9 M25 and M87 OPEN OPERATION P When rear sunshade switch is turned to UP the ground is supplied to rear sunshade unit terminal 1 Based on the ground signal to control unit terminal 6 through rear sunshade unit terminal 1 power is supplied e 10 motor terminal 2 e control unit terminal 9 and ground is supplied e 10 motor terminal 1 e from control unit terminal 8 When sunshade is fully up control unit stops to supply power to motor based on the signal from UP DOWN limit switch CLOSE OPERATION When rear sunshade switch is turned to DOWN ground is supplied to rear sunshade unit terminal 2 Based on the ground signal to control unit terminal 7 through rear sunshade unit terminal 2 power is supplied e 10 motor terminal 1 e control unit terminal 8 and ground is supplied e 10 motor terminal 2 e from control unit terminal 9 When sunshade is fully down control unit stops to supply power to motor based on the signal from UP DOWN limit switch Once the sunshade switch is pushed the open or close operation will be continued until the control unit detects full open or full close based on the signal from UP DOWN limit switch During open or close operation of sunshade the input signal from sunshade switch is ignored When control unit detects the slack of sunshade based on the signal from slack detection switch the motor will be stopped When control unit detects no slack of sunshad
385. to 6 REMOVAL Check the resistance between terminals 2 and 5 Ohmmeter 7 Resistance Float position mm wale O 168 622 Approx 45 55 gt 5976550 315 335 22 1 0 870 80 0 80 3 1 and 3 When float rod is in contact with stopper NHEL0047 NHEL0047S01 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK 1 Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission speed 2 Turn vehicle speed sensor pinion quickly and measure voltage across 1 and 2 NHEL0047S03 Approx 0 5V Alternating current EL 139 LG BOARD COMPUTER System Description System Description FUNCTION This board computer can indicate following items Outside air temperature Range Cruising possible distance Journey time hour meter Average fuel consumption Average vehicle speed Outside air temperature indication e This indicator shows indication of outside air temperature while ignition switch is in ON position e Ambient sensor is used commonly by auto air conditioner and this board computer When auto air condi tioner operates board computer will correct ambient sensor signal based on positive voltage signal to ter minal 60 of board computer from A C auto amp e Indication range is between 30 and 55 C 22 and 131 F When outside temperature is less than 30 22 F or more than 55 C 131 F display shows
386. to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 59 e through smart entrance control unit terminal 60 e from lighting switch terminal 12 Headlamp relays LH and RH are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps LH and RH LOW BEAM OPERATION When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in LOW position power is supplied e from terminal 7 of each headlamp relay e to terminal of each headlamp Ground is supplied e to headlamp LH terminal 4 e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 and e to headlamp RH terminal 4 e through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 With power and ground supplied the headlamp s will illuminate HIGH BEAM OPERATION FLASH TO PASS OPERATION When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH position or PASS position power is supplied e from terminal 5 of each headlamp relay e terminal 1 of each headlamp and e 10 combination meter terminal 26 for the HIGH BEAM indicator Ground is supplied to headlamp LH terminal 2 through lighting switch terminals 6 and 5 through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 and to headlamp RH terminal 2 to combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator through lighting switch terminals 9 and 8 through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 With power and ground supplied the high beams and the high beam indicator illuminate EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER C
387. to turn signal switch terminal 1 Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 Le LH Turn 003050101 When the turn signal switch is moved to the LH position power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal 3 10 e front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 e combination meter terminal 25 rear combination lamp LH terminal 1 Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal 2 through body grounds T6 and T8 Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 With power and ground supplied the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps Turn T 003050102 When the turn signal switch is moved to the RH position power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal 2 to SU e front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 e combination meter terminal 29 BR rear combination lamp RH terminal 1 Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 through body grounds E11 E22 and E53 Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 2 through body grounds T6 and T8 ST Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 With power and ground supplied the combination flasher unit controls the flashing
388. tor Seat control Front lifting device LH Continuity t TEILT unit LH Lifing encoder front SEL613W 4 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER FRONT SHORT CIRCUIT Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground 24 C Seat control unit LH Terminals Continuity 17 Ground 19 Ground 28 Ground SEL614W OK or NG Replace lifting encoder front EL 238 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 Lifting encoder rear check 1 LIFTING ENCODER REAR OUTPUT SIGNAL Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 30 and ground with CONSULT II or oscilloscope when power seat lifting rear is operated Ae Seat control unit LH NHEL0277S08 HI Approx 5V LO Approx 0V SEL615W 2 LIFTING ENCODER REAR INPUT SIGNAL Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground Ae Seat control unit LH E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 121 1 15 Battery voltage should exist SEL616W OK or NG Replace seat control unit LH EL 239 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses Cont d 3 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER REAR OPEN CIRCUIT 1 Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector 2 Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector Terminals Rear lifti
389. trance control unit and fuse EL 308 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminals 43 B or M145 terminal 64 B and ground Smart entrance control unit connector DISCONNECT Continuity should exist SELO20Y Refer to wiring diagram in EL 298 Power supply and ground circuits are OK NG Check ground harness EL 309 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Cont d DOOR SWITCH CHECK P 1 CMECKDOORSWTCHIWUTSINAL ___ With CONSULT II Check door switches DOOR SW RR DOOR SW DR DOOR SW AS in DATA MONITOR mode with CON SULT II DATA MONITOR Monitor item iti iti DOOR SW RR Condition Condition DOORSWBR DOOR SW RR Rear doors switch DOOR SW AS DOOR SW DR Door switch LH DOOR SW AS Door switch RH SEL024Y Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminals 1 LG 2 R L or 3 R W and ground Smart entrance control unit connector Terminals Cond TT V ondition oltage E V Front door switch LH Front door Open switch RH door switches SELO021Y OK or NG CHECK DOOR SWITCH Disconnect door switch harness connector 2 Check continuity between door switch terminal
390. trance control unit and seat belt buckle switch seat belt buckle switch EL 171 WARNING Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 NHELO0055S06 1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check ignition switch ON signal IGN ON SW DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA MONITOR When ignition switch is ON IGN ON SW ON When ignition switch is OFF IGN ON SW OFF SEL318W Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 27 G and ground Smart entrance control HS unit connector DISCONNECT Terminals Ignition switch position Ground voltage SEL995X OK or NG p GOTO 2 Check the following e 10A fuse 10 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse EL 172 WARNING Trouble Diagnoses 2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT II Check driver door switch signal DOOR SW DR in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT II DATA When driver s door is DOOR SW DR open DOOR SW DR ON When driver s door is closed DOOR SW DR OFF Without CONSULT II Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M143 terminal 1 LG and ground SEL319W Smart entrance control unit connector ES HS Voltage V
391. ude is used to confirm the longitude and latitude of some optional area point How to Perform NHEL0300S0602 LG Self Diagnosis 1 Start the engine SCC ONO 0 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display 3 Push both MAP and D N switches at the same time for more EC than 5 seconds 4 Select Confirmation adjustment 5 Select Navigation Confirmation Adjustment select one of the AUR Diagnosis for Signals from the Car BR ST RS 6 Select Longitude amp Latitude Navigation Select one of the following SG 7 Adjust the pointer with using the joystick and touch Set 8 The longitude and latitude are displayed 3 277 p 2 EL 415 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Cont d ADJUST THE ANGLE MODE Description 22 1 030050701 If the display indicates a larger or smaller turning angle than the actual turning angle the gyro angular speed sensor sensing val ues must be checked In case that the vehicle on the display makes larger angle turn than reality touch In case that the vehicle on the display makes smaller angle turn than reality touch NHEL0300S07 How to Perform Self Diagnosis 1 Start the engine ud 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display 3 Push both MAP and D N s
392. ught to an INFINITI dealer in case of an IVIS NATS malfunction 10177501 NOTE In rare case CHAIN ECM IMMU might be stored as a self diagnostic result during key registration procedure even if the system is not malfunctioning KEY SERVICE REQUEST Additional key ID registration TROUBLE Verify the security indicator Using the CONSULT II program card for IVIS NATS check the SELF DIAGNOSIS with CONSULT II Self diagnostic results referring to IVIS NATS but no information about engine self diagnostic results is displayed on CONSULT II INITIALIZATION Refer to CONSULT II operation manual IVIS NVIS Self diagnostic results referring to IVIS NATS and DON T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG are displayed on CONSULT II This means that engine trouble data has been detected in ECM Turn ignition switch OFF Repair IVIS NATS If necessary carry out C U INITIALIZATION with CONSULT II Turn ignition switch ON Erase the IVIS NATS SELF DIAGNOSIS by using CONSULT II Touch Start the engine Verify no lighting up of the security indicator OK Perform running test with CONSULIT II engine SELF DIAGNOSIS mode NG Verify NO DTC displayed on the CONSULT II screen OK CHECK OUT Turn ignition switch OFF Repair IVIS according to self diagnostic results referring to
393. ument panel removed SELO51Y System Description 0073 The rear window defogger system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit The rear window defogger operates only for approximately 15 minutes Power is supplied at all times e torear window defogger relay terminal 3 through 20A fuse No 7 located in the fuse and fusible link box and to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 through 20A fuse No 4 located in the fuse and fusible link box to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 through 10A fuse No 13 located in the fuse and fusible link box With the ignition switch in the ON or START position power is supplied e through 10A fuse No 10 located in the fuse block J B e tothe rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and e to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 Ground is supplied to terminal 32 of the rear defogger switch built in A C control unit or A C auto amp through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 When the rear defogger switch is turned ON ground is supplied e through terminal 31 of the rear defogger switch e to smart entrance control unit terminal 14 Terminal 37 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay termi nal 2 With power and ground supplied the rear window defogger relay is energized Power is supplied e through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay e tothe rear window defogger and e totermina
394. und Battery voltage If NG check the following e 10A fuse No 23 located in fuse block J B e Harness for open or short between 10A fuse No 23 located in fuse block J B and rear sunshade unit GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NHEL0281S02 Check continuity between rear sunshade unit terminal 6 ground Terminals Continuity 6 Ground Yes NG check harness for open between sunshade unit termi nal 6 and body ground M9 M25 and M87 REAR SUNSHADE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CHECK 1 Disconnect rear sunshade unit connector 2 Check the following continuity NHEL0281S03 Terminals Switch position Continuity U Yes 1 Ground Neutral No Down No U No 2 Ground Neutral No Down Yes If NG check the following e Harness for open or short between rear sunshade unit and rear sunshade switch e Harness for open or short between rear sunshade switch and ground e Hear sunshade switch EL 258 REAR SUNSHADE Diagnoses REAR SUNSHADE SWITCH CHECK 1 Disconnect rear sunshade switch NHEL0281S04 44 GJ Bun 2 Check continuity between rear sunshade switch terminals mecum Terminals Continuity al E oC o LG NG replace rear sunshade switch SU BR ST RS BY EL 259 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE ASCD System Description System Description Refer to EC 53 Automatic S
395. unit LH terminals 4 or 12 and ground 0277510 62 AE Condition Seat control unit LH 6512 of reclining switch ER wami Forward EW Ground Backward SEL621W OK or NG Replace seat control unit LH CHECK RECLINING MOTOR 1 Disconnect reclining device LH connector 2 Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation y UT device LH 17 CD Terminals DISCONNECT Operation Forward Backward SEL622W OK or NG Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and reclining motor EL 242 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 Lifting motor front check LEE CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR FRONT Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 5 or 13 and ground CONNECT Condition Seat control unit LH of lifting switch front 0277511 Terminals Voltage V 12 SEL623W OK or NG Replace seat control unit LH 2 LIFTING MOTOR FRONT 1 Disconnect front lifting device LH connector 2 Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation Front lifting Ta device LH T S 1 3 DISCONNECT 3 1 Terminals 4 SEL624W OK or NG Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor front Replace lifting motor front
396. ut CONSULT II 1 Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 L and ground with oscillo scope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned LOCK or UNLOCK 2 Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec just after key is turned LOCK or UNLOCK Neutral Voltage 12V 9V 10 sec measurement by analog circuit tester SEL397Y Replace smart entrance control unit NG gt GO TO 6 EL 122 INTERIOR STEP SPOT VANITY MIRROR TRUNK ROOM LAMPS Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer 6 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH 1 Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector D8 2 Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals Door key cylinder 0 Door unlock switch terminal switch connector 2 Ground terminal Yn 31211 Terminals Continuity DISCONNECT 3 Door lock switch terminal SEL187Y OK or NG Check the following e Door key cylinder switch ground circuit e Harness for open or short between front power window main switch and door key cyl inder switch If above systems are normal replace the front power window main switch p Replace door key cylinder switch EL 123 SU 02 25 METERS AND GAUGES Component Parts and Harness Connector Location Component Parts and
397. utput circuit to woofer Check harness continuity between audio unit terminal 12 and woofer terminal 45 Check harness continuity between woofer terminal 47 BR and ground Check the output circuits to woofer from speaker amp Sr AM FM stations are weak Window antenna Check window antenna or noisy Audio unit ground Check audio unit ground condition Audio unit Remove audio unit for repair RS Audio unit generates noise 1 Poor audio unit ground Check audio unit ground in AM and FM modes with 2 Loose or missing ground bonding straps 2 Check ground bonding straps BT engine running Ignition condenser rear window Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger defogger noise suppressor condenser noise suppressor condenser lgnition coil or secondary wiring Check ignition coil and secondary wiring HA Audio unit Remove audio unit for repair Audio unit generates noise 1 Poor audio unit ground Check audio unit ground in AM and FM modes with 2 Antenna Check antenna SG accessories on switch pops and motor noise Accessory ground Faulty accessory EL 201 Check accessory ground Replace accessory AUDIO Inspection Inspection AUDIO UNIT All voltage inspections are made with e Ignition switch ON or ACC e Audio unit ON e Audio unit and amps connected If audio unit or amp is removed for inspection supply a ground to the case using a jum
398. will show all segments and return to the normal compass mode within 10 seconds of no switch activity If the vehicle changes zone repeat steps 1 thru 3 See map EL 147 Gl MA LG 55 0308 Wiring Diagram 5 EL COMPAS 01 IGNITION SWITCH ON OR START FUSE 10A BLOCK REFER TO EL POWER J B M19 Wiring Diagram COMPAS AUTO ANTI DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR WITH COMPASS R15 98 el REFER TO THE FOLLOWING FUSE BLOCK JUNCTION BOX J B lt N 5m L N 1 5131017 1 1213 61718 2940 EL 148 WARNING LAMPS Schematic Schematic 0049 GA LG HH H1 HI HOLIMS HOLIMS HOLIMS HOLIMS 3009 3009 4008 3004 419043 1NONJ 72 lt 25 YP 80 92 GG 80 405 35 13 311303 H1 HOLIMS 1314 ONY HOLIMS HOLIMS HOLIMS 13A31 LINN H LIMS dAY1 3122018 8 dN 5 35 j34nSS3Hd WOON 1138 BOIVNH3LIV T3A31 1303 210 1995 2 L 71091405 3SNV31N3 1 5 2041405 ran 4 7 SD gt 1 L 25 SOL S8V Bee S a T YSN 404 SOL GA 2QA GD 2 SOL
399. wing e Ground circuit for power seat switch e Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and power seat switch Replace power seat switch DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11 Cancel switch check 1 0277514 CHECK CANCEL SWITCH 1 Disconnect cancel switch connector 2 Check continuity between cancel switch terminals Usa DISCONNECT Cancel switch Cancel switch Terminals Continuity M n SEL628W OK or NG Check the following e Ground circuit for cancel switch e Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and cancel switch cancel switch EL 245 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Trouble Diagnoses DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 12 2 Key detention door switch and vehicle speed sensor check CHECK KEY SWITCH SIGNAL Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 2 and ground Seat control unit LH Condition Voltage V Key is inserted Approx 12 Key is removed SEL629W Check the following e 10A fuse No 12 located in fuse block J B e Key switch e Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse e Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and key switch Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals and ground Seat control unit LH Battery voltage Battrery voltage SEL630W OK or NG gt GO TO 3 Check the following
400. witches at the same time for more than 5 seconds 4 Select Confirmation adjustment NHEL0300S0702 Confirmation adjustment 5 Select Navigation Confirmation Adjustment a select one of the following Diagnose the Display Diagnosis for Signals from the Car initialize Lo 6 Select Adjust the angle Navigation x select one of the following 7 Select Left Turn to adjust the angle to the left Touch Right l Adjust the angle Turn to adjust the angle to the right 8 Select to increase the angle change coefficient to reduce the angle change coefficient Select Set to save the changed values in memory PE km 10 Then the vehicle turning angle on the display has adjusted 2 22 00 EL 416 NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation Adjustment Mode Conta SPEED CALIBRATION MODE EI How to Select of the following 1 Start the engine 2 Push OPEN CLOSE switch and then open the display GI 3 Push both MAP and D N switches at the same time for more than 5 seconds 1 0300508 1 030050801 Gonfirmation adjustment 4 Select Confirmation adjustment 5 Select Navigation 16 Confirmation Adjustment a select one of the following Diagnosis for Signals from the Car 6 Select Speed Calibration Navigati
401. y Interior lamp Battery saver control for headlamps parking lamps licence lamps tail lamps fog lamps illumination lamps Battery saver control for inte rior lamp step lamp spot lamp vanity mirror illumination Battery saver control for rear window defogger and door mirror defogger Retained power control for electric sunroof Retained power control for power window Heated steering NHEL0124S04 Door lock and unlock switch LH and RH Key switch Insert Door switches Door key cylinder switches Door lock actuator Horn relay Vehicle security horn relay 1 Vehicle security horn relay 2 Hazard warning lamp Interior lamp Ignition key hole illumination Door lock actuator Trunk lid opener actuator Key switch Insert Ignition switch ACC Door switches Keyfob signal Door lock unlock switch LH Key switch Insert Ignition switch ON Lighting switch 1st Seat belt switch driver s seat Front door switch LH Warning chime located in smart entrance control unit Ignition switch ON Rear window defogger switch Rear window defogger relay Ignition switch ACC ON Door switches Hood switch Trunk room lamp switch Door lock unlock switches Door key cylinder switch lock unlock Vehicle security horn relay 2 Headlamp relay Security indicator Door switches Keyfob signal lock unlock Interior lamp Door lock unlock switches lock unlock Key hole illumination Door key cylinder
402. y e opening a door e opening the hood or the trunk lid e detection of battery disconnect and connect Once the vehicle security system is in armed phase if the smart entrance control unit receives a ground sig nal at terminal 1 2 3 door switch 13 trunk room lamp switch or 6 hood switch the vehicle security sys tem will be triggered The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently Power is supplied at all times e through 10A fuse No 61 located in fuse and fusible link box to vehicle security horn relay 1 terminals 1 and 3 and to vehicle security horn relay 2 terminal 1 through 10A fuse No 57 located in fuse and fusible link box to horn relay terminal 2 Power is also supplied at all times through 15A fuse No 68 located in fuse and fusible link box to headlamp relay LH terminal 3 through 20A fuse No 54 located in fuse and fusible link box to headlamp relay LH terminals 1 and 6 through 15A fuse No 69 located in fuse and fusible link box to headlamp relay RH terminal 3 and through 20A fuse No 55 located in fuse and fusible link box to headlamp relay RH terminals 1 and 6 When the vehicle security system is triggered ground is supplied intermittently e to headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21 and e headlamp LH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 59 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 When headlamp
403. y 490 pue ains ag H1 epis 1295 Apog Apog MEL2200 EL 490 HARNESS LAYOUT Body Harness Cont d LG 50011295 ly pue 23 5 18 0 1 JO HOA 01 Buom Jo oy ui 1deoxe sio199uuo2 95991 12euuoosip jou N23 2y esneo Aew os aeda sjojoeuuoo y YOO pue 9408 eg x pog t a HI 105 28 205095 oye qd qo yeas ss uiey qns HI 129 pejeeu SOL HI 10sues SOL 108095 Tees 284 01 10 49 Gzzw oL oL Sgv SO L OQA 05 38 OL GSH oL epeusuns 1 5 Sseujeu qns BIA Wun 1ees 10jenjoe epeusuns Gwe
404. y the battery saver control ground is supplied e to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11 and then e headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and EL 39 LG RS SG IDX HEADLAMP FOR USA System Description Cont d e through lighting switch terminal 12 Then headlamps illuminate again AUTO LIGHT OPERATION The auto light control system has an optical sensor inside it that detects outside brightness When lighting switch is in AUTO position ground is supplied e smart entrance control unit terminal 23 e from lighting switch terminal 42 When ignition switch is turn to ON or START position outside brightness is darker than prescribed level Ground is supplied e to headlamp relay LH and RH terminals 2 e through smart entrance control unit terminals 21 59 and 43 64 Then both headlamp relays and tail lamp relay are energized headlamps low or high and tail lamps are illu minate according to switch position Auto light operation allows headlamps and tail lamps to go off when outside brightness is brighter than pre scribed level NOTE The delay time changes maximum of 20 seconds as the outside brightness changes For parking license and tail lamp auto operation refer to PAR
405. ystem will activate automatically NOTE Vehicle security system can be set even though all doors are not locked Pattern B With any door including hood and trunk lid open if lock unlock switch is used to lock doors terminal 33 receives a ground signal e from terminal 8 of lock unlock switch LH e from terminal 11 of lock unlock switch RH e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 or With any door including hood and trunk lid open if the key is used to lock doors front power window main switch terminal 6 receives a ground signal e from terminal 3 of the key cylinder switch LH e through body grounds M9 M25 and M87 NHELO0196S03 1 0196504 326 VEHICLE SECURITY THEFT WARNING SYSTEM System Description Cont d If these signals and lock signal from keyfob are received by the smart entrance control unit ground signals of terminals 1 2 and 3 are interrupted and all doors are closed the vehicle security system will activate auto matically NOTE Vehicle security system can be set even though the rear door is not locked Once the vehicle security system has been activated smart entrance control unit terminal 38 supplies ground to terminal 5 of the security indicator lamp The security lamp will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds and then blinks every 2 6 seconds Now the vehicle security system is in armed phase VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION The vehicle security system is triggered b

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SECTION EL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents